UNIVERSITY OF THE PHILIPPINES
MANILA
Padre Faura St., Ermita, Manila
PROPOSED U.P. MANILA MAIN LIBRARY
AND LEARNING COMMONS BUILDING
Padre Faura St., Ermita, Manila
Technical Specifications
November 2017
Structural
Mechanical
Electrical
Auxillary
Plumbing
Fire Protection
2/F LTA Building
118 Perea Street, Legaspi Village,
1229 Makati City, Philippines
Tel: (6 32) 893 5827
Fax: (6 32) 813 5543
E-mail: acoconsulting@aco.com.ph
Website: www.aco.com.ph
A.C. ONG Consulting, Inc.
2/F LTA Building
118 Perea Street, Legaspi Village,
1229 Makati City, Philippines
Tel: (6 32) 893 5827
Fax: (6 32) 813 5543
E-mail: acoconsulting@aco.com.ph
Website: www.aco.com.ph
This document is and shall remain the property of A.C.Ong Consulting Inc. The
document may only be used for the purposes for which it was commissioned and in
accordance with the Terms of Engagement for the commission. Unauthorised use of
this document in any form whatsoever is prohibited.
Document Status
Rev
No.
Author
Reviewer
K. R. Siongco
M.K.B. Mañago
Approved for Issue
Name
A. C. Ong
J. Amparo
F. Nasayao
A. C. Ong
R. Pagilagan
F. Dacasin
A. C. Ong
P. Ocampo
P. Tamayo
A. C. Ong
E. Bardelosa
C. Alcantara
Signature
Date
Contents
1. Structural..................................................................................................0-1
2. Mechanical ............................................................................................... 0-2
3. Electrical & Auxillary ............................................................................... 0-3
4. Plumbing ..................................................................................................0-4
4. Fire Protection ........................................................................................ 0-5
Part 1-0
Structural
Technical Specifications
SECTION 02100
PREPARATION OF SITE
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
The Work includes furnishing all labor, materials, tools and equipment required for the
preparation of the Site prior to construction.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A. Detailed working drawings.
1.3
PROTECTION
The Contractor shall exercise the greatest care in protecting existing structures and
piping while proceeding with work under this Section. All repairs required because of
damage from the Contractor’s operations shall be at the expense of the Contractor and
no claims for additional payment will be accepted.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CLEARING, GRUBBING AND STRIPPING
A. Except as otherwise directed, cut, grub, remove and dispose of all trees, stumps,
brush, shrubs, roots, paving and any other objectionable material within the
construction limits shown on the Drawings. All stumps, brush and roots shall be
grubbed, removed from the site and disposed properly and legally.
B. Protect the area beyond the limits of grading shown on the Drawings and any trees
designated by the Engineer from damage by any construction operation by erecting
suitable barriers or other approved means.
C. Strip topsoil from all areas to be occupied by buildings, trenches, roadways, the
sludge lagoons, and all other areas to be excavated or filled. Avoid mixing topsoil
with subsoil and stockpile it in areas on the site as approved by the Engineer.
Topsoil shall be stockpiled free from brush, trash, large stones and other
extraneous material. Any topsoil remaining, after all work is in place, shall be
disposed of by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer.
** END OF SECTION **
Page 1 of 1
PREPARATION OF SITE
Technical Specifications
SECTION 02200
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, GRADING AND SLOPE PROTECTION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
The Work includes furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary
to perform all excavation, backfilling, filling, grading, and slope protection as shown on
the Drawings.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
Other Sections of the Specifications shall also apply to the extent required for proper
performance of this Work.
Section 33001
Site Preparation
Section 33003
Yard Piping
Section 33004
Roadways and Paving
Section 33006
Loaming and Seeding
Section 33007
Waste Water Disposal System
1.3 SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
Except as otherwise indicated, the current editions of the following Standards apply to
the WORK of this Section:
ASTM D698
Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Standard Effort
ASTM D1556
Density of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone
Method
ASTM D1557
Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil
Using Modified Proctor Test
ASTM D2487
Classification of Soils for Engineering
Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Proposed methods of construction including dewatering, excavation, sheeting,
bracing, filling, compaction and backfilling for the various portions of the project.
B. Samples as required by the applicable Reference Standards and under Part 2 –
PRODUCTS of this Specification.
Page 1 of 9
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, GRADING & SLOPE PROTECTION
Technical Specifications
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
The Contractor is responsible for the performance of all tests and inspection required
by this Standard Specification. However, the owner reserves the right to perform any
or all prescribed tests and inspection where such is deemed necessary to ensure that
materials conform to the specifications, and to be paid for by the Contractor.
1.6 PROTECTION
A. Sheeting and Bracing – General
1. The Contractor shall furnish, put in place and maintain such sheeting and
bracing as may be required to support the sides of excavations, to prevent any
movement which could in any way diminish the width of the excavation below
that necessary for proper construction, and to protect adjacent structures from
undermining or other damage. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, sufficient or
proper supports have not been provided, additional supports shall be put in at
the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for the sufficiency
of such supports. Care shall be taken to prevent voids outside of the sheeting,
but if voids are formed, they shall be immediately filled with compacted granular
fill and rammed.
2. The Contractor shall leave in place all sheeting and bracing which the Engineer
may direct him in writing to leave in place at any time during the progress of the
Work for the purpose of preventing injury to structures, utilities or property,
whether public or private.
3. All sheeting and bracing not to be left in place shall be carefully removed in
such a manner as not to endanger the construction of other structures, utilities
or property. All voids left or caused by withdrawal of sheeting shall be
immediately refilled with compacted granular material by ramming with tools
especially adapted to that purpose, or by other means as approved.
4. The right of the Engineer to order sheeting and bracing left in place shall not be
construed as creating any obligation on his part to issue such orders, and his
failure to exercise his right to do so shall not relieve the Contractor from liability
to damages to persons or property occurring from or upon the work occasioned
by negligence or otherwise, growing out of a failure on the part of the
Contractor to leave in place sufficient sheeting and bracing to prevent any
caving or moving of the ground.
5. No wood sheeting shall be withdrawn if driven below mid-diameter of any pipe,
and under no circumstances shall any wood sheeting be cut off at a level lower
than one foot above top of any pipe.
B. Pumping and Drainage
1. The Contractor shall at all times during construction, provide and maintain
proper equipment and facilities to remove all water entering excavations.
Excavations shall be kept dry so as to obtain a satisfactory undisturbed subgrade foundation until the fills or structures to be built thereon have been
completed to such extent that they will not be floated or damaged by allowing
water levels to return to natural levels.
Page 2 of 9
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, GRADING & SLOPE PROTECTION
Technical Specifications
2. Dewatering shall at all times be conducted in such a manner as to preserve the
undisturbed bearing capacity of the sub-grade soils at proposed bottom of
excavation.
3. The Contractor shall maintain the water level below the bottom of excavation in
the various work areas continuously. The Contractor’s proposed method of
dewatering, if required, shall be approved by the Engineer.
4. Water entering the excavation from surface runoff shall be collected in shallow
ditches around the perimeter of the excavation, drained to sumps, and be
pumped or drained by gravity from the excavation to maintain a bottom free
from standing water.
5. The Contractor shall take all additional precautions to prevent uplift of any
structure during construction. All such arrangements shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
6. Drainage shall be disposed of in an approved area only so that flow or seepage
back into the excavated area will be prevented.
7. Floatation shall be prevented by the Contractor by maintaining a positive and
continuous removal of water. The Contractor shall be fully responsible and
liable for all damages that may result from failure to adequately keep
excavations dewatered.
8. Removal of dewatering equipment, if required, shall be accomplished after the
system is no longer required; the material and equipment constituting the
system shall be removed by the Contractor.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General
1. Excess materials which have been excavated and stockpiled in selected areas
on the site which meet the Specifications shall be used as much as possible for
fills.
2. For both materials obtained on site and for materials obtained off-site, the
Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the source of the material and shall
furnish the Engineer for approval, a representative sample weighing
approximately 25 kilograms, at least ten calendar days prior to the date of
anticipated use of such material. Samples shall be resubmitted as required
until approval is obtained.
B. Fill
1. Common Fill
Common fill may be obtained from on-site excavated material if approved by
the Engineer or from off-site sources. Common fill shall consist of mineral soil,
substantially free of clay, organic material, silt, loam, wood, trash, and other
objectionable material which can not be compacted properly.
Page 3 of 9
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, GRADING & SLOPE PROTECTION
Technical Specifications
Common fill shall not contain broken concrete, masonry, rubble, asphalt
pavement, or other similar materials. It shall have physical properties such that
it can be readily spread and compacted during filling.
Common fill shall not contain stones larger than 250mm in any dimension, nor
stones larger than 150mm in the upper 0.50 meter of fill. Not more than 30%
shall pass a No. 200 sieve. The liquid limit of the fraction passing a No. 40
sieve shall not exceed 50%.
2. Structural Fill
Structural fill shall be furnished and placed as required to replace materials
encountered and found unsuitable below foundation elevation of structures; or
when foundation elevation is set above existing grade as shown on the plans or
directed by the Engineer in writing. Structural fill shall be used below all
structures that have under drains as shown on the Drawings.
Structural fill shall consist of suitably graded clean sands or gravel-sand
mixtures belonging to Group Symbol SW or GW of the Unified Soil
Classification, ASTM D2487. Particles shall be sound and not more than 15%
shall pass the No. 200 sieve, nor more than 50%, the No. 40 sieve.
The composite material shall be non-plastic and free from organic matter, clay
lumps, or other deleterious materials.
3. Granular Fill
Granular fill material shall consist of hard, durable, free draining sand and
gravel or hard stone; shall be free from organic matter or other deleterious
substances and shall be reasonably well-graded within the following limits:
Size
Per Cent by Weight Passing
75mm (3 in.)
100
0.60mm (No. 30)
0-20
0.15mm (No. 100)
0-5
4. Screened Gravel
Screened gravel shall consist of hard, durable, rounded or sub-angular particles
of proper size and gradation, and shall be free from sand, loam, clay, excess
fines, and deleterious materials. Screened gravel shall be graded within the
following limits:
Page 4 of 9
Sieve Size
Per Cent by Weight Passing
16mm (5/8 in.)
100
13mm (1/2 in.)
40-100
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, GRADING & SLOPE PROTECTION
Technical Specifications
10mm (3/8 in.)
15-45
2.0mm (No. 10)
0-5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 STRIPPING AND GRUBBING
Before any fills are placed or any paving or construction started, the area of all such
work shall be stripped and grubbed of all top organic materials to a minimum depth of
150mm. Any weak, loose, soft, spongy, or otherwise unsuitable materials shall be
removed from the site, and may be deposited in a spoil area, as directed by the
Engineer, but shall not be used in any on-site fills.
3.2 EXCAVATION
Excavation shall include, without classification, the removal of all materials of whatever
nature encountered, including all obstructions of any nature that would interfere with
the proper execution and completion of the Work. The removal of said materials shall
conform to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings.
The Contractor shall furnish, place, and maintain all supports and shoring that may be
required for the sides of the excavations, and all pumping, ditching, or other approved
measures for the removal or exclusion of water, including taking care of storm water
reaching the site of the Work from any source so as to prevent damage to the Work or
adjoining property.
Excavations shall be sloped or otherwise supported in a safe manner in accordance
with the latest applicable safety requirements of the Department of Public Works and
Highways and as approved by the Engineer.
A. Excavation Below Grade
1. If the bottom of any excavation is taken out below the limits specified on the
Drawings, or directed by the Engineer, it shall be refilled at the
Contractor’s expense with concrete, compacted structural fill, or other material
satisfactory to the Engineer.
2. Compacted structural fill, when used for refill, shall be placed in not greater than
150mm layers.
B. Structure Excavation
1. Excavation for structures to be founded on base slabs and footings are
intended to be carried to undisturbed natural soil of suitable approved bearing
capacity. If, upon uncovering and in the opinion of the Engineer, the material at
or below the normal grade of excavation as indicated on the Drawings, is
unsuitable for the support of structures, such material shall be over excavated
and replaced with compacted structural fill. The Contractor will be paid based
on unit price established in the Schedule of Bid Prices.
Page 5 of 9
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, GRADING & SLOPE PROTECTION
Technical Specifications
2. Excavation, including removal of rock and boulders, shall be made to such lines
and grades as will give suitable room for buildings and structures, for bracing
and supporting, pumping and draining, and to the limits indicated on the
Drawings. The bottom of the excavations shall be rendered firm and dry and in
all respects acceptable to the Engineer.
3. Excavation and dewatering shall be accomplished by methods which preserve
the undisturbed state of subgrade soils. Subgrade soils which become soft,
loose, “quick”, or otherwise unsatisfactory for support of structures as a result of
inadequate excavation, dewatering or other construction methods, shall be
removed and replaced by compacted structural fill at the Contractor’s expense.
4. Dewatering shall be such as to prevent boiling or detrimental under seepage at
the base of the excavation. The Contractor shall install such means as required
to preserve the stability of the base of the excavation.
5. Excavating equipment shall be satisfactory for carrying out the work in
accordance with the Specifications.
6. When excavation for foundations has reached prescribed depths, the Engineer
shall be notified and he will inspect conditions. If materials and conditions are
not satisfactory to the Engineer, the Engineer will issue instructions as to the
procedures, and if additional costs are involved, adjustments of the Contract will
be made on the basis of unit prices agreed upon by the Engineer and the
Contractor in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents.
C. Miscellaneous Excavation
The Contractor shall perform all the remaining miscellaneous excavation. He shall
make all excavations necessary to permit the placing of loam and plants, for
constructing roadways, and any other miscellaneous earth excavation.
3.3 FILL AND COMPACTION
A. General
1. Fills shall be placed as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
Where embankments are to be placed and compacted on hillsides, or to be
placed against existing embankment, or to be built one half at a time, the slopes
of original hillsides, existing embankments, or new fill shall be cut into or
benched in order to accommodate each layer of new work a horizontal distance
of not less than 1.5 meters. Materials thus removed shall be spread and
compacted with the new materials.
2. Compaction shall be performed as specified hereinafter for the particular
materials and operations:
a) A pass shall be one complete coverage of the area to be compacted by the
rear wheel tire treads or tractor treads in contact with the flat earth surface.
b) Areas adjacent to structures and other areas inaccessible to a roller or truck
shall be compacted with approved mechanical compaction equipment.
Compaction of the fill by such means shall be to the same degree of
compaction as obtained by other approved equipment. The Engineer may
Page 6 of 9
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, GRADING & SLOPE PROTECTION
Technical Specifications
make the necessary tests to determine the amount of compactive effort
necessary to obtain equal compaction. The fill compacted by mechanical
compactors shall be placed in 150mm layers and thoroughly tamped over
the entire surface. Compaction equipment is subject to approval by the
Engineer.
3. The surface of filled areas shall be graded to smooth true lines, strictly
conforming to grades indicated, and no soft spots or un compacted areas will
be allowed in the Work.
4. Temporary bracing shall be provided as required during filling and backfilling of
all structures to protect partially completed structures against all construction
equipment loads, hydraulic pressures, and earth pressures.
B. Placing Structural Fill
1. After all unsuitable materials have been stripped and removed, the area to be
filled shall be compacted by rolling using pneumatic tire rollers or tandem rollers
of capacity approved by the Engineer. Moisture content of the material in situ
should be dry to the optimum. The Engineer shall conduct density test on the
compacted base. At least 95% of modified proctor maximum density (ASTM
D1557, Method C) must be attained.
2. Fill shall be spread by graders or bulldozers and compacted in layers not
thicker than 150mm.
3. Compacted structural fill shall be placed and compacted as specified laterally to
the limits defined by a 1 on 1 line sloped outward and downward from a point at
least 0.7 meters outside the bottom edge of all footings.
4. Water shall be added by means of sprinklers to each layer in amounts that will
bring the fill material to its optimum density. Compaction will not be permitted
on completely dry materials.
5. A minimum of two coverage is required for each layer. The Engineer may,
during the progress of the work, conduct tests as to the degree of compaction
of the fill and may require additional passes when density of the fill has not
reached 95% of modified proctor dry density (ASTM D1557, Method C).
6. In areas inaccessible to the large rollers, hand-held tampers shall be used in
which case, maximum layer heights shall be 0.15 meter when compacted or as
required to achieve 95% of modified proctor dry density.
C. Backfilling – Common Fill
1. Common fill may be used as backfill against the exterior walls of structures or in
other areas as designated by the Engineer. Common fill materials shall be
placed in layers having maximum thickness of 300mm measured before
compaction. Moisture content of the material at the start of compaction shall be
at or near optimum.
2. Common fill shall be compacted to at least ninety per cent of maximum density
as determined by ASTM D698.
Page 7 of 9
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, GRADING & SLOPE PROTECTION
Technical Specifications
3. Materials placed in fill areas shall be deposited to the lines and grades shown
on the Drawings, making due allowance for settlement of the material and for
the placing of loam thereon.
4. The surfaces of filled areas shall be graded to smooth true lines, strictly
conforming to grades indicated on the grading plan. No soft spots or
uncompacted areas will be allowed in the Work.
5. No compaction shall be done when the material is too wet either from rain or
from excess application of water.
3.4 GRADING
A. Grading in preparation for placing of loam, planting areas, paved walks and roadways,
and appurtenances shall be performed at all places that are indicated, to the lines,
grades, and elevations shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. All
material encountered of whatever nature within the limits indicated, shall be removed
and disposed of. During the process of grading, the sub-grade shall be maintained in
such condition that it will be well drained at all times. When directed, temporary drains
and drainage ditches shall be installed to intercept or divert surface water that may affect
the condition of the Work.
B. If at the time of grading, it is not possible to place any material in its proper section of the
permanent structure, it shall be stockpiled in approved areas for later use. No extra
payment will be made for the stockpiling or double handling of excavated material.
C. The right is reserved to make minor adjustments or revisions in lines or grades, if found
necessary as the work progresses, due to discrepancies on the Drawings or in order to
obtain satisfactory construction.
D. Stones or rock fragments larger than 100mm in their greatest dimensions will not be
permitted in the top 150mm of the finished sub-grade of all fills or embankments.
E. In cuts, all loose or protruding rocks on the back slopes shall be barred loose or
otherwise removed to line or finished grade of slope. All cut and fill slopes shall be
uniformly dressed to the slope, cross section, and alignment shown on the Drawings, or
as directed by the Engineer.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF UNSUITABLE/SURPLUS MATERIALS AND ROCKS
A. Unsuitable excavated materials shall be removed from the immediate site of work
and disposed of by the Contractor on the Owner’s land as directed by the Engineer.
B. Suitable excavated material may be used for fill or backfill, if it meets the
specifications for common fill. Excavated material so approved may be neatly
stockpiled at the site where designated by the Engineer provided there is an area
available that will not inconvenience traffic or adjoining property owners. If space
limitations do not permit stockpiling on the site, the Contractor will be required to
make arrangements for off-site stockpiling. Transport of such material from and to
the immediate site, including any stockpiling agreements, shall be entirely at the
Contractor’s expense and shall not constitute grounds for additional payment.
C. Surplus excavated material shall be used to fill depressions or other purposes as
the Engineer may direct.
Page 8 of 9
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, GRADING & SLOPE PROTECTION
Technical Specifications
D. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of all pieces of rock which are not
suitable for use in other parts of the Work. Rock disposed of by hauling away to
spoil areas is to be replaced by approved surplus excavation obtained elsewhere
on the Work, insofar as it is available. Any deficiency in the backfill material shall
be made up with acceptable material approved by the Engineer.
E. Fragments of ledge and boulders smaller than 25kgs.weight may be used in
backfilling trenches and other deep fills. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the
quantity is excessive, he may order the removal and disposal of some of this rock.
The small pieces of rock used as backfill shall not be placed in trenches until the
pipe has at least 0.7 meters of earth over it. The Contractor shall place these
pieces of stone in thin layers, alternating them with earth to be sure that all voids
between the stones are completely filled with earth to prevent the occurrence of
voids and settlement which will result there from.
F. Rock may be used for fill only with the approval of the Engineer.
3.6 COMPACTION/FIELD DENSITY TESTS
Field density tests shall be performed in accordance with the test procedure specified
in ASTM D1556.
The location and frequency of field tests shall be at the discretion of the Engineer.
Necessary tests shall be performed by the Engineer for acceptance of a compacted
layer before attempting to place new fill material. Any layer or portion thereof that does
not meet minimum compaction requirements shall be reworked and re-compacted until
it meets the specified density requirements as determined by the Engineer.
** END OF SECTION **
Page 9 of 9
EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, GRADING & SLOPE PROTECTION
Technical Specifications
SECTION 03150
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
The Work includes furnishing all materials, labor, equipment and incidentals required to
make all concrete joints tight as detailed on the Drawings.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
Other Sections of the Specifications shall also apply to the extent required for proper
performance of this Work.
1.3
Section 33009
Concrete Reinforcement
Section 33010
Concrete Finishes
SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
Except as otherwise indicated, the current editions of the following Standards apply to
the WORK of this Section:
1.4
ASTM D412
Vulcanized
Rubber
and
Thermoplastic
Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers Tension
ASTM D746
Brittleness Temperature
Elastomers by Impact
ASTM D1752
Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork
Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving
and Structural Construction
ASTM D2240
Rubber Property – Durometer Hardness
of
Plastics
and
SUBMITTALS
A. Detailed working drawings.
B. Samples/test reports/certificates as required by the applicable Reference
Standards.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The Contractor is responsible for the performance of all tests and inspection required
by this Standard Specification. However, the owner reserves the right to perform any
or all prescribed tests and inspection where such is deemed necessary to ensure that
delivered materials conform to the specifications, and to be paid for by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall furnish the owner certified copies of records showing that each
material has been pre-tested, and
Page 1 of 2
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Technical Specifications
complied with all applicable requirements of this Standard. The Contractor shall, at his
own expense, replace all rejected materials for failure to comply with this Specification.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1
INSTALLATION

Construction joints shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings. Unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings, bonding will be required at all horizontal joints
in walls. Surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with Section 33010.

Construction joints will be permitted at locations other than those indicated on the
Drawings, provided a written permission from the Engineer is obtained.

The surfaces of the groove for the rubber sealant shall not be coated with curing
compound.

Where indicated on the Drawings, joint sealant shall be placed in all joints to the
depth shown. Cleaning of the grooves, priming, handling and application of the
materials, including bond breaker, shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.

Waterstops for all joints shall be continuous around the corners and intersections,
either in horizontal or vertical direction, as indicated on the Drawings. Field splices
and joints shall be made in accordance with the waterstop manufacturer’s
instructions, using a thermostatically controlled heating iron.

Holes for steel tying wires shall be drilled in the water stops as recommended by
the manufacturer.

Steel tying wire shall be as specified in Section 33009, Concrete Reinforcement.

A sufficient number of wire ties shall be installed to ensure that the waterstops
remain in their original position during the placement of concrete.
** END OF SECTION **
Page 2 of 2
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Technical Specifications
SECTION 03200
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
The WORK includes fabrication and installation of all steel bars and steel tie wire, clips,
supports, chairs, and spacers required for the reinforcement of concrete as shown on
the Drawings.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
Not Used
1.3
SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
Except as otherwise indicated, the current editions of the following Standards apply to
the WORK of this Section:
1.4
ASTM A82
Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A615/A615M
ASTM A706/A706M
Deformed and Plain Billet – Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
PNS 49
Philippine National Standard – Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
SUBMITTALS
A. Detailed working drawings and bending schedules of all reinforcement.
B. Samples and test certificates as required by the applicable Reference Standards.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The Contractor is responsible for the performance of all tests and inspection required
by this Standard Specification. However, the owner reserves the right to perform any
or all prescribed tests and inspection where such is deemed necessary to ensure that
delivered materials conform to the specifications, and shall be paid for by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall furnish the owner certified copies of records showing
that each material has been pre-tested, and complied with all applicable requirements
of this Standard. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, replace all rejected
materials for failure to comply with this Specification.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
Reinforcement steel shall be deformed, new billet steel bars conforming to ASTM
A615, Grade 60 and 40, substantially free from mill scale, rust dirt, grease or other
foreign matter.
Page 1 of 4
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
Technical Specifications
Chemical Composition: The percentages of carbon, manganese, phosphorus, sulfur
and silicon on finished bars shall conform to the specified values in PNS 49 as shown
in Table 2.
Rail –steel bars will not be permitted in the Work.
Table 2 – Chemical Requirements
Chemical Composition, Per Cent Maximum
Element
Hot-Rolled Non-Weldable
Deformed Steel Bar
Hot-Rolled Weldable Deformed
or Plain Steel Bar
Carbon
-
0.38
Manganese
-
1.26
Phosphorus
0.0625
0.058
Sulfur
0.0625
0.058
Silicon
-
-
Reinforcement steel shall bear a mill identification symbol, shall be tagged with the size
and mark number so that different types may be identified, and shall be stored off the
ground to protect the steel from moisture and dirt until placed in final position.
Steel wire for tying reinforcing bars and waterstops shall conform to ASTM A82.
The following reinforcing steel bar sizes shall be used for all reinforced concrete design
under this Contract.
Bar Designation
Page 2 of 4
Approximate
Cross Sectional Area
(mm²)
Approximate
Unit Weight
(kg/m)
#10
78
0.616
#12
113
0.888
#16
201
1.579
#20
314
2.466
#25
492
3.854
#28
615
4.833
#32
804
6.313
#36
1018
7.991
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
Technical Specifications
Should the Contractor wish to use reinforcing steel bars having areas different from
those shown (with consequent different designations), the following requirements shall
apply:

If the proposed substitute bar has an area from 97% to 105% of the designated
bar, a direct substitution may be made without changes to bar spacing.

If the proposed substitute bar has an area less than 97% of the designated bar,
substitution may be allowed provided bar spacing is reduced to not more than the
minimum clear distance between bars.

If the proposed substitute bar has an area more than 105% of the designated bar,
changes in spacing is limited to a maximum spacing of 300mm. All proposed
changes shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

Changes shall be implemented upon approval by the Engineer of the reinforcing
arrangement Drawings, required as shop drawings, which shall be finalized upon
issuance by the Engineer of the guidelines on related criteria, as maximum and
minimum spacing and bond strength.

Approval by the Engineer of bar size substitutions does not relieve the Contractor
of other specified requirements, including steel grade and bar deformations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FABRICATION OF REINFORCEMENT
Reinforcement steel shall be accurately fabricated to the dimensions shown on the
shop drawings and bar schedules.
All reinforcing bars shall be bent cold around a pin with a free revolving collar having a
diameter of the bar of not less than the following:




Four times for stirrups
Six times for bars up to and including 25mm diameter
Eight times for bars over 25mm diameter
Ten times for bars 43mm and 57mm diameter
Reinforcement steel shall not be straightened nor rebent. Bars with kinks or bends not
shown on the Drawings will not be accepted.
3.2
INSTALLATION OF REINFORCEMENT
All reinforcing bars shall be accurately placed as shown on the Drawings, and in
accordance with the shop drawings and bar schedules. The reinforcing bars shall be
secured against displacement with annealed iron wire ties of minimum GA#16 GI Wire
(i.e. 1.39mm diameter) or suitable clips at the intersections.
Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings reinforcement steel shall be installed
with a clearance for concrete cover as follows:

Page 3 of 4
Concrete placed directly on earth
75 mm
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
Technical Specifications

Formed surfaces in contact with the soil, water or
exposed to the weather
75 mm

Concrete cover of main reinforcement steel for
columns and beams
40 mm

Walls not in contact with the soil, water or exposed to
the weather

Top of slabs exposed to weather for Ø16 and smaller

Underside of slabs over water surface, but not in
contact with the water
Top of slabs exposed to weather for Ø20mm and
above
50 mm
All other slab surfaces
20 mm


40 mm
No reinforcing bars shall be welded.
All reinforcing bars in slabs shall be supported on concrete cubes or chairs of the
correct height, containing soft steel wires embedded therein for fastening to the
reinforcement steel. Such spacers or chairs shall have a minimum compressive
strength of 24 MPa.
Reinforcing bars for vertical surfaces in beams, columns and walls shall be properly
and firmly positioned from the forms by means of stainless steel (tipped) bolsters or
other equal methods approved by the Engineer.
Reinforcement steel projecting from structures that are to be concreted or where
concrete has already been poured shall not be bent out of its correct position.
** END OF SECTION **
Page 4 of 4
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
Technical Specifications
SECTION 03300
CONCRETE
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
The WORK includes furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals
necessary for the construction of all concrete work.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
Other Sections of the Specifications shall also apply to the extent required for proper
performance of this Work.
1.3
Section 33009
Concrete Reinforcement
Section 33010
Concrete Finishes
Section 33011
Construction Joints
SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
Except as otherwise indicated, the current editions of the following Standards apply to
the WORK of this Section:
ASTM C31
Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens
in the Field
ASTM C33
Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C39
Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens
ASTM C42
Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and
Sawed Beams
ASTM C94
Ready-mixed Concrete
ASTM C143
Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete
ASTM C150
Portland Cement
ASTM C347
Recommended
Practice
for
Concrete
Formwork, US Corps of Engineers CRD C-572
ASTM C494
Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C805
Rebound Number of Hardened Concrete
Page 1 of 10
CONCRETE
Technical Specifications
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Samples as required by the applicable Reference Standards and in accordance
with Part 3 – EXECUTION of this Specification.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The Contractor is responsible for the performance of all tests and inspection required
by this Standard Specification. However, the owner reserves the right to perform any
or all prescribed tests and inspection where such is deemed necessary to ensure that
delivered materials conform to the specifications, and shall be paid for by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall furnish the owner certified copies of records showing
that each material has been pre-tested, and complied with all applicable requirements
of this Standard. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, replace all rejected
materials for failure to comply with this Specification.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cement: Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to ASTM C150, Type II, as
follows:
Table 1- Physical Requirements of Cement
Test
Compressive Strength for ages indicated, min.
3 days
7 days
Time Setting by Vicat Method
Initial Set, minimum
Final Set, maximum
Fineness, by turbidimeter test, minimum
Requirement
12.0 MPa
19.0 MPa
45 minutes
375 minutes
160 m²/kg
B. Aggregates
1. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be washed inert natural sand conforming
to ASTM C33, and shall range in size from coarse to fine within the following
limits of US Standard sieve sizes:
Table 2- Grading Requirements for Fine Aggregates
Page 2 of 10
Sieve Designation
Per Cent (%) Passing
9.5 mm (3/8)
100
4.75 mm (No. 4)
95-100
2.36 mm (No. 8)
80-100
1.18 mm (No. 16)
50-85
CONCRETE
Technical Specifications
0.60 mm (No. 30)
25-60
0.300 mm (No. 50)
5-30
0.150 mm (No. 100)
0-10
0.075 mm (No. 200)
0-3
2. Coarse Aggregate: Coarse aggregate shall be well graded crushed stone or
washed gravel conforming to ASTM C33, size No. 67 as follows:
Table 3 – Grading Requirements for Coarse Aggregates
Sieve Designation
Weight Per Cent Passing
25 mm (1”)
100
19.0 mm (3/4)
90-100
9.5 mm (3/8)
20-55
4.75 mm (No. 4)
0-10
2.36 mm (No. 8)
0-5
0.075 mm (No. 200)
0-1
3. Water: Water used in mixing, curing or other designated application shall be
reasonably clean and free of oil, salt, acid, alkali, grass or other substances
injurious to the finished product.
4. Admixtures

Admixtures conforming to ASTM C494 may be used upon approval of the
Engineer in writing, to control the time setting, to effect water reduction and to
increase workability. Proportioning and mixing shall be as recommended by
the manufacturer.

The admixture may be a hydroxylated carboxylic acid type or a hydroxylated
polymer type, but shall contain no calcium chloride. The use of an admixture
shall not change the required quantities of cement specified under Table 4 of
this Section.

The total air entrained measured at the discharge from the truck shall be 3.0
per cent maximum for finished slabs and 3.5 to 5.0 per cent for all other
concrete.
2.2 QUALITY OF CONCRETE
A. Before placing any concrete, the Contractor shall discuss with the Engineer the
source of materials and concrete he proposes to use. Samples of aggregate and
cement shall be furnished to the Engineer for testing.
Page 3 of 10
CONCRETE
Technical Specifications
B. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, his proposed design mix for
evaluation.
C. Compressive strength, water-cement ratio and cement factor specified in Table 4
shall apply for regular and pumped concrete:
Table 4 – Concrete Quality Requirements
Requirements
All Structural
Concrete Fill
Concrete
Test
Minimum Compressive Strength at 28
days (Mpa)
17.0
21.0 – 42.0
Maximum Net Water Content
(liters/100kg cement)
62.0
53.0
Minimum Cement Content (kg/m³)
260
330
3.5 – 5.0
3.5 – 5.0
32
32
Total Air Content (%)
Concrete Temp., Max. ( °C)
D. Consistency of the concrete as measured in accordance with ASTM C143 shall
be as shown in Table 5.
No excessively wet concrete will be permitted. Concrete delivered to the site
having a slump more than that specified herein will be rejected.
Table 5 – Concrete Consistency
Slump (mm)
Type of Structure
Recommended
Range
50
25-75
Plain footings, gravity walls, slabs and
beams
50-75
25-100
Heavy reinforced foundation walls and
footings
75-100
50-125
100
75-125
Pavement and Slabs on Ground
Thin reinforced walls and columns
Page 4 of 10
CONCRETE
Technical Specifications
2.3 FORMS
A. Forms shall be made of either steel or new lumber approved by the Engineer and
shall be free from roughness and imperfections, substantially watertight,
adequately braced and tied to prevent movement and displacement when concrete
is placed and vibrated. No wooden spreaders will be allowed in the concrete.
Forms shall be thoroughly cleaned before using and shall be treated with approved
non-staining oil or other approved material and allowed to dry before placement of
the reinforcing steel.
B. Form ties in concrete exposed to view shall be the cone-washer type. Through
bolts or common wire shall not be used for form ties.
C. Molding or bevels shall be built into the forms to produce a 20-mm chamfer on all
exposed projecting corners.
D. Forms for walls shall have removable panels at the bottom for cleaning, inspection
and scrubbing-in of bonding paste.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MIXING CONCRETE
A. Ready-mixed or transit-mixed concrete shall conform to ASTM C94. The concrete
supplier shall furnish to the Engineer for his approval, the dry proportions to be
used, with evidence that these will produce concrete of the quality specified.
B. Ready-mixed or transit-mixed concrete shall be transported to the site in watertight
agitator or mixer trucks. Discharge at the site shall be within one (1) hour after the
cement was first introduced into the mix. Retempering (i.e. mixing with or without
additional cement, aggregate or water) of the concrete which has partially
hardened, will not be permitted.
3.2 PLACING OF CONCRETE
A. All debris, dirt and water shall be removed from the forms. Forms, reinforcement
steel, pipes, conduits, sleeves, anchors and other embedded items shall be
inspected and approved by the Engineer before placing any concrete. The
Contractor shall advise the Engineer of his readiness to proceed at least 12 hours
before each placement of concrete.
B. The surfaces of previously placed concrete, such as vertical or horizontal
construction joints, shall be roughened, cleaned of foreign matter and laitance, and
saturated with water.
Immediately before the new concrete is placed, all hardened surfaces shall receive
a thorough coating of neat cement grout at least 5 mm thick which shall be well
scrubbed in by means of stiff bristle brushes. The new concrete then shall be
placed before the grout sets up.
Concrete shall be uniformly placed during the process of depositing until the
completion of the layer to maintain an approximately horizontal plastic surface.
The rate of placing concrete in forms shall not exceed o.60 meter of vertical rise
Page 5 of 10
CONCRETE
Technical Specifications
per hour. The spreading of mounds of concrete with vibrator or by shoveling will
not be permitted.
C. Concrete shall not be placed in water or stay submerged within 24 hours after
placing, except for curing nor shall running water be permitted to flow over concrete
surfaces within four days after the placing of concrete.
D. Chutes for conveying concrete shall be of U-shaped metal and provided with a
baffle plate at the end. Chutes shall be placed at an angle of not less than 25
degrees, nor more than 45 degrees from horizontal and shall be kept clean and
free from hardened concrete. Maximum length of chute to be traveled by plastic
concrete shall not be more than 1.50 meters.
E. In thin walls or columns of considerable height, the concrete shall be placed in such
a manner as to prevent segregation and accumulation of hardened concrete on the
forms or the reinforcement steel located above the concrete mass. Free fall of
concrete shall not be permitted to exceed 1.50 meters below the ends of hoppers,
chutes, ducts, tremies, or “windows” in wall forms, without approval of the
Engineer.
F. Where waterstop type construction joints are provided, the concrete shall be
properly worked by rodding and vibrating around the waterstops to produce
watertight joints, before any concrete is poured on the upper surfaces, particularly
in the case of horizontal waterstops in slabs.
Waterstops shall be accurately positioned and securely held in place, and shall be
protected at all times to prevent damage or displacement. Any damage to, or
displacement of waterstops shall be corrected by the Contractor to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.
3.3 TAMPING AND VIBRATING
A. During and immediately after placing the concrete, compaction shall be carried out
by experienced operators using high-speed internal mechanical vibrators. Care
shall be taken to ensure that vibration is continued long enough to produce
optimum consolidation without segregation of the aggregates or migration of air.
B. At least one vibrator shall be used for every eight cubic meters of concrete placed
per hour. One spare vibrator in operating condition shall be available on the site.
C. Vibrators shall be supplemented with proper wooden spade, puddling adjacent to
forms and rodding around embedded fixtures, to remove trapped air bubbles and to
prevent honeycombing.
3.4 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. All concrete work shall be properly cured. Details of the Contractor’s curing
procedures and curing compounds intended to be used shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
B. All exposed surfaces including finished surfaces shall be treated immediately after
concrete has been poured, to provide continuous moist curing for at least 7 days.
Walls and vertical surfaces may be covered with continuously saturated burlap or
kept moist by other approved means. Horizontal surfaces, slabs, etc. shall be
Page 6 of 10
CONCRETE
Technical Specifications
ponded to a depth of 15mm or kept continuously wet by means of sprinklers or
other approved methods.
C. Formed surfaces shall be thoroughly soaked with water at least twice each day
until the forms are removed. Curing shall continue as specified above.
D. Where finishing of concrete surfaces is performed before the end of the curing
period, the concrete shall not be permitted to dry out and shall be kept continuously
damp by means of a fog of water from the time the concrete has been placed until
the end of the curing period.
E. The Contractor shall protect all concrete work against injury from the elements and
defacements of any nature during construction operations.
3.5 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. The Contractor shall not remove any forms for at least 48 hours or until the
concrete has attained a strength of at least 30 per cent of the ultimate 28-day
strength. This is equivalent to approximately 50-day-degrees of moist curing. Day
degree represents the total number of days times the average daily air temperature
in °C at the surface of the concrete, e.g. 2 days at an average temperature of 25°C
equals 50 day-degrees.
B. Forms for beams and slabs shall not be stripped for at least 150-day degrees and
supports shall not be removed until the concrete has attained at least 60% of the
specified 28-day strength and is capable of safely supporting its own weight.
Construction live loads shall not be placed upon it until the concrete has attained its
specified 28-day strength.
C. Removal of forms shall be in accordance with ACI – 347. Forms shall be stripped
such that they will not damage the concrete. No forms shall be removed until the
concrete has gained sufficient strength to support itself. The Contractor is
responsible for the safety of all structures.
3.6 REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Defective or honeycombed areas, as determined by the Engineer, shall be chipped
down to at least 25mm deep into sound concrete by means of chisels or chipping
hammers. If honeycombs exist around reinforcement steel a clear space, at least
10mm wide shall be chipped all around the steel.
B. For areas less than 40mm deep, the patch may be made as in filling form-tie holes.
C. Thicker repairs will require build-up in successive 40mm deep layers on successive
days, and each layer shall be applied with neat cement pastes.
D. For very deep patches, a non-shrink aggregate, with or without the addition of pea
gravel, may be the used subject to the approval of the Engineer.
E. The materials shall be mixed as recommended by the manufacturer of the nonshrink aggregate or as directed by the Engineer.
Where a metallic non-shrink aggregate is utilized, the final 15mm of the patch shall
be composed of 1 to 1-1/2 cement / sand mortar without the non-shrink aggregate
Page 7 of 10
CONCRETE
Technical Specifications
to prevent rust staining of the surface. After hardening, the patch shall be rubbed
as for filling form-tie voids, in accordance with Section 33010, Rubbed Finish.
F. All exposed concrete surfaces and adjoining work stained by spilling or leakage of
concrete shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.7 INSPECTION
Installation of reinforcing steel, pipes, sleeves, anchors and other embedded items,
batching, mixing, transportation, placing, curing and finishing of concrete shall at all
times be subject to the inspection of the Engineer. No concrete shall be placed without
the prior approval of the Engineer.
3.8 FIELD CONTROL
A. Sets of six (6) cylinder specimens shall be taken at random by the Contractor in the
presence of the Engineer in accordance with ASTM C31. One (1) set per 50 cubic
meters of concrete, or fraction thereof, poured during the day shall be made for the
compressive strength test. At least one set of samples for strength test shall be
made for each class of concrete.
B. Two (2) cylinders shall be tested after 7 days and two cylinders after 28 days.
Should the average strength of the 28-day test specimens be less than the
specified value, a verification test shall be conducted on the remaining two (2)
cylinder samples, after 28 to 45 days. Compressive tests shall be in accordance
with ASTM C39 and shall be performed by a laboratory engaged by the Owner.
Testing fees shall be paid by the Contractor.
C. The Contractor shall assist, cooperate and provide the concrete for the test
cylinders and such auxiliary personnel and equipment needed to take the test
specimens.
D. Ready-mixed concrete shall be sampled and tested in accordance with the
following methods.
Table 9 – Sampling and Test Methods for Ready-Mixed Concrete
Sampling/Test Method
Applicable ASTM Standard
Compressive Test Specimens
C31
Compression Tests
C39
Yield, Unit Weight
C138
Air Content
C138/C173/C231
Slump
C143
Sampling Fresh Concrete
C172
Temperature
C1064
Page 8 of 10
CONCRETE
Technical Specifications
3.9 FIELD TESTING
A. Should the average strength of the verification test specimens be less than the specified
value, the Engineer may take further core samples from the portion of the structure
which was determined by the Engineer to represent the deficient 28-day/verification test
specimens.
B. If the strength of any core samples is less than the minimum requirements shown in
Table 4, the Contractor shall strengthen or replace the portions of the structure
concerned at no additional cost and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
C. The Contractor shall also deduct from payments otherwise due to him, the actual cost to
the Owner for taking all core samples extracted from that portion of the Work.
D. Slump tests, temperature and entrained air measurements shall be made when
specimens for strength tests are taken and during placement of concrete, as often as
necessary for control checks. If measured slump or air content falls outside the specified
limits, a check test shall be made immediately on another portion of the same composite
sample. In the event of a second failure, the concrete shall be considered to have failed
the requirements of the specification and the whole batch shall be rejected.
3.10 BASIS OF ACCEPTANCE / REJECTION
Final acceptance of all concrete will be based on satisfactory results of compressive
strength tests.
Strength tests representing each class of concrete must meet the following two
requirements:
 The average of any three consecutive strength tests shall be equal to, or greater than
the specified strength.
 No individual strength test shall be more than 15% below the specified strength.
Except as provided below, acceptance criteria will be as outlined in ASTM C94 and
ACI 318. Concrete which achieves the required compressive strength will be accepted
as satisfactory for payment provided placement, finish and tolerance meet the specified
requirements.
Concrete with average strength deficient by not more than fifteen per cent (15%) of the
required strength may be accepted, subject to cost reduction given in the following
schedule:
Page 9 of 10
Per Cent (%) Deficiency
In Average Strength
Per Cent (%) of
Unit Price Reduction
Less than 3
0
0 to less than 5
15
5 to less than 10
30
10 to 15
40
CONCRETE
Technical Specifications
more than 15
100
Concrete represented by test results wherein the average strength indicated a
deficiency of not more than fifteen percent (15%) but with an individual test deficient by
more than fifteen percent (15%) will not be eligible for payment but may be accepted or
ordered replaced at the discretion of the Engineer.
Concrete represented by compressive strength tests that fail to achieve the required
strength as specified, shall be liable to rejection and subsequent removal and
replacement.
However, if any strength tests falls below the specified value by more than 15%, or an
individual test is deficient by more than 15%, and load carrying capacity has been
significantly reduced, tests of cores drilled from the area in question may be required in
accordance with ASTM C42, wherein L/D ratio is not less than 1.25 prior to capping. In
such cases, three (3) cores shall be taken for each strength test more than 15% below
the required value.
If concrete in the structure will be dry under service conditions, cores shall be air dried
for 7 days before test and shall be tested dry. If concrete in the structure will be more
than superficially wet under service conditions, cores shall be immersed in water for at
least 40 hours and be tested wet.
Concrete in an area represented by core tests shall be considered structurally
adequate if the average of three (3) cores is equal to at least 85% of the specified
strength, and if no single core is less than 75% of the minimum requirement.
Additional testing of cores extracted from locations represented by erratic core strength
results shall be permitted.
Acceptance and subsequent payment of concrete in question shall be based on the
results of such tests, provided the complete operation has been supervised by the
Engineer.
Rebound hammer test (ASTM C805) may be carried out by the Contractor prior to
drilling core samples from structure in question, but the results of such rebound tests
shall not be used as basis for acceptance or rejection of the concrete.
** END OF SECTION **
Page 10 of 10
CONCRETE
Technical Specifications
SECTION 04200
MASONRY
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
The Work includes furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to
construct all concrete masonry unit walls including the following:
 Concrete hollow block walls.
 Masonry reinforcing bars for concrete blocks.
 Grouting.
 Connecting wall anchors, ties, bolts and related embedded items.
 Installation of frames for doors, windows, louvers, steel lintels, and recessed fixtures.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
Other Sections of the Specifications shall also apply to the extent required for proper
performance of this Work.
1.3
Section 33030
Cement Plastering
Section 33019
Caulking and Dampproofing
Sections 33020 to 33028
Doors, Windows and Glass
SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
Except as otherwise indicated, the current editions of the following Standards apply to
the WORK of this Section:
1.4
ASTM C33
Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C90
Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units
ASTM C144
Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
ASTM C150
Portland Cement
SUBMITTALS
A. Detailed working drawings.
B. Samples as required by the applicable Reference Standards.
Page 1 of 6
MASONRY
Technical Specifications
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The Contractor is responsible for the performance of all tests and inspection required
by this Standard Specification. However, the owner reserves the right to perform any
or all prescribed tests and inspection where such is deemed necessary to ensure that
delivered materials conform to the specifications, and shall be paid for by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall furnish the owner certified copies of records showing
that each material has been pre-tested, and complied with all applicable requirements
of this Standard. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, replace all rejected
materials for failure to comply with this Specification.
1.6
PROTECTION OF MATERIALS
All perishable materials for the Work of this Section shall be delivered, stored and
handled to preclude damage of any nature. Manufactured materials, such as cement,
shall be delivered and stored in their original containers, plainly marked with
identification of material and maker. Materials in broken containers, or in packages
showing watermarks or other evidence of damage, shall not be used and shall be
removed from the site.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A. Cement
Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C150, Type I. Masonry cements shall not
be used. One color of cement shall be used throughout the Work.
Cement shall be used for the application intended and in accordance with the
approved recommendation of the manufacturer.
B. Sand for Mortar
Sand shall be clean, durable particles, free from injurious amounts of organic
matter and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C144, Aggregate for
Masonry Mortar.
Sand for grout shall conform to ASTM C144 or C33 as required.
C. Water
Water shall be free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, organic matter,
and shall be clean and fresh.
D. Concrete Hollow Blocks
1. Classification
Concrete block shall conform to ASTM C90, Type I, Normal Weight.
2. Manufacturing Requirements
Page 2 of 6
MASONRY
Technical Specifications
Concrete hollow blocks shall be manufactured from Portland cement
conforming to ASTM C150.
Aggregates for concrete blocks shall consist of sand and evenly graded pea
gravel conforming to ASTM C33.
All concrete hollow blocks shall be even textured with straight and true edges,
wet steam cured for at least 18 hours and then air cured in covered storage for
not less than 28 days before delivery to the job site and shall conform to the
requirements of Table 1.
Table 1 – Quality Requirements
Compressive Strength
(Minimum, MPa)
Water Absorption
(Maximum, kg/m³)
Moisture Content
(Maximum, % of
Total Absorption)
Average of
Five (3) Samples
Individual
Sample
Average of
Five (3) Samples
Average of
Five (3) Samples
7.1
6.9
208
40
The moisture content of hollow blocks when laid shall not exceed 35 per cent.
3. Dimensions
The actual dimensions of the concrete hollow blocks shall be as shown in
Table 2.
Table 2 - Dimensions
Nominal Dimension (mm)
*Actual Dimension (mm)
Width
Height
Length
Width
Height
Length
100
200
400
92
194
397
150
200
400
143
194
397
200
200
400
194
194
397
No average dimension shall differ from the specified actual dimensions by more
than 3 mm.
4. Minimum Face Shell and Web Thickness
The following dimensions shown in Table 3 shall apply for minimum face and
web thickness.
Page 3 of 6
MASONRY
Technical Specifications
Table 3 - Minimum Thickness of Face Shells and Webs
2.2
Nominal Width
mm (in.)
Face Shell Thickness
(Minimum, mm)
Web Thickness
(Minimum, mm)
102 (4”)
19
19
152 (6”)
25
25
203 (8”)
32
25
MORTAR MIXES
Masonry mortar for setting blocks shall be in the proportion of 1 part cement to 3 parts
sand or as otherwise approved by the Engineer. Mortar shall be mixed with water in an
amount compatible with workability. Ingredients shall be accurately measured by
volume.
Mixing shall be done immediately before usage. The Contractor shall use the dry-mix
method, wherein the materials for each batch shall be well turned together until the
cementitious materials has been thoroughly distributed throughout the mass, after
which the water shall be gradually added until a thoroughly mixed mortar of the
required plasticity is obtained.
Mortar boxes shall be cleaned out at the end of each day’s work and all tools shall be
kept clean. Mortar that has begun to set shall not be used.
The mixing of mortar by hand will be permitted only when the quality of hand mixing is
comparable to mechanical mixing. The Engineer reserves the right to reject hand
mixing and require all mixing by mechanical means. Mortar shall not be retained for
more than 1-1/2 hours and shall be constantly mixed until used.
Pointing mortar shall be prehydrated mortar mixed dry, and water added while mixing
to obtain a damp, or workable mix. After one or two hours, sufficient water shall be
added to bring it to proper consistency, which shall be somewhat drier than masonry
mortar.
The color of mortars shall be uniform throughout for adjoining areas, and shall be
satisfactory to the Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. General
All masonry shall be laid plumb and true to lines. Masonry shall be carried up in a
uniform manner. No portion shall be raised more than one meter above adjacent
portions, except with the approval of the Engineer.
Page 4 of 6
MASONRY
Technical Specifications
B. Concrete Hollow Block

Concrete blocks shall be laid in running bond, unless otherwise indicated.
Joints shall not exceed 10 mm, shall be uniform throughout, and finished
slightly concave and smooth.
Pointing shall be performed with the proper tools to a dense and neat finish.
Finger pointing will not be allowed.
All blocks shall be laid in a full bed of mortar applied to shells. Apply mortar to
the vertical joint of blocks that have already set in the wall, and to all contact
faces of the unit. Each unit shall be placed and shoved against the previously
laid block to produce a well-compacted vertical mortar joint for the full shell
thickness.
Intersecting bearing walls shall be tied together with metal ties at 0.80-meter
vertical spacing. Bends of tie and reinforcing bars shall be embedded in cells
filled with mortar.
Concrete blocks shall be reinforced with gage 10mm diameter at 0.60 meter on
centers in vertical and horizontal direction.

All necessary block cutting shall be neatly done by a masonry saw or cutting
shall be done by hammering at any times with an approved hand tool.

Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, door, window and louver frames
shall be installed using screws and expansion shields. All frames shall be set
tightly against the masonry wall.

Control joints shall be installed as detailed on the Drawings. The joints shall be
raked out to a depth of 20 mm for the full height of the wall and caulked. The
maximum length between joints shall be 10 meters, if not shown on the
Drawings, or as directed by the Engineer.
Joints made at the intersection of block walls with structural concrete, and
where indicated, shall be filled with mortar grout and pointed.
C. Concrete Hollow Block to be Plastered
Concrete block walls, which are to be plastered, shall be laid in running bond.
Joints are to be left rough to assist in the bonding of plaster. Otherwise, concrete
block masonry shall conform to paragraph B, Concrete Hollow Block. Control joints
in plastered block walls shall be carried through the plaster, but the joints shall not
be plastered.
3.2
LINTELS, TIES AND MICELLANEOUS ITEMS
The Contractor shall build in all miscellaneous items specified in other sections to be
set in masonry including frames, lintels, reinforcing steel, electrical boxes and fixtures,
sleeves, grilles, anchors and other miscellaneous items. All anchorage, attachments,
and bonding devices shall be set so as to prevent slippage and shall be completely
covered with mortar.
Page 5 of 6
MASONRY
Technical Specifications
3.3
GROUTING
Grout and cement mortar for setting railings, frames in walls and where otherwise
required shall be done with mortar of 1 part cement to 1 part sand. Before placing
grout, thoroughly clean all surfaces. Grout shall be tamped into place with a blunt tool
to fill the entire void. In the event space does not permit tamping, the Contractor shall
build the necessary forms and place the grout by pouring from one side only. When
grout is placed by pouring, a head of grout shall be maintained in the form. Grout shall
be kept wet for three days after the temporary supports or adjusting wedges are
removed; the empty space shall be filled with grout and shall be pointed.
3.4
CLEANING
All exposed masonry work shall be thoroughly cleaned. Mortar smears and droppings
on concrete block walls shall be dry before removal with a trowel. Masonry work may
be cleaned using a mild muriatic acid solution.
** END OF SECTION **
Page 6 of 6
MASONRY
Technical Specifications
SECTION 05100
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
The Work includes providing all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary
to furnish and install all structural steel items including bearing plates and
miscellaneous shapes and plates required for proper erection of structural materials as
shown on the Drawings.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
Other sections of the Specifications shall also apply to the extent required for proper
performance of this Work.
Section 33014
1.3
Miscellaneous Metals
SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
Except as otherwise indicated, the current editions of the following Standards apply to
the WORK of this Section:
1.4
ASTM A36
Carbon Structural Steel
ASTM A325
Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105
Ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
ISO 261
ISO General Purpose Metric Screw Threads General Plan
AWS A5.1
Mild Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes
AWS D1.4
Structural Welding Code – Reinforcing Steel
ACI 315
Details
and
Reinforcement
ACI 318
Building Code Requirements for Reinforced
Concrete
Detailing
of
Concrete
SUBMITTALS
A. Detailed shop drawings of all structural steel items.
B. Samples as required by the applicable Reference Standards.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The Contractor is responsible for the performance of all tests and inspection required
by this Standard Specification. However, the owner reserves the right to perform any
or all prescribed tests and inspection where such is deemed necessary to ensure that
Page 1 of 3
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Technical Specifications
delivered materials conform to the specifications, and shall be paid for by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall furnish the owner certified copies of records showing
that each material has been pre-tested, and complied with all applicable requirements
of this Standard. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, replace all rejected
materials for failure to comply with this Specification.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A. Structural shapes, plates and bars unless otherwise noted shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM A36.
B. Welding rods shall conform to AWS A5.1. All welding rods shall be E70XX grade.
C. High strength steel bolts shall conform to ASTM A325.
D. Hexagonal Nuts
E. Standard Washers
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FABRICATION AND ERECTION
A. Details of concrete reinforcement steel for fabrication and erection shall conform to
ACI 315, unless otherwise specified.
All members shall fit closely together and shall be straight and true; the finished
work shall be free from burrs, bends, twists and open joints.
Materials for welding shall be the best available as recommended by the
manufacturer of the materials to be welded, and in accordance with AWS
Standards.
B. All holes, angles, supports, and braces shall be provided as required. Any
unmatched holes in shop assembly of field connections shall be reamed and the
pieces match marked before disassembly.
Drift pins shall be used only for bringing members into position and not to enlarge
or distort holes.
Any piece weakened by reaming to compensate for eccentricity to a point where
the strength of the joint is impaired will be rejected and a new and satisfactory
piece shall be provided by the Contractor at his own expense.
Slotted holes and washers shall be provided for truing-up steel requiring accurate
alignment.
C. Anchor bolts shall be accurately located on the base plates and welded in position.
3.2
FIELD CONNECTIONS
Base plates where required shall be accurately placed in position.
Page 2 of 3
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Technical Specifications
Field connections shall be made by welding or high strength bolting.
3.3
WELDING
Welding of parts shall be in accordance with the Structural Welding Code D1.1 of the
AWS and shall only be done by welders certified as to their ability to perform welding
in accordance with the locally accepted requirements.
The Contractor may substitute field bolting where field welding is shown, provided
bolting details have been approved by the Engineer.
3.4
BOLTING
High-strength bolts shall conform to ASTM A325.
Anchor bolts shall be of mild steel with hexagonal nuts. Threads shall be clean cut
and conform to ISO 261. Anchor bolts shall be hot-dip galvanized and shall be
accurately set before the concrete is poured unless specifically permitted otherwise by
the Engineer. To facilitate the setting of anchor bolts, the Contractor shall use screed
plates, or may substitute wooden templates instead of screed plates upon written
approval of the Engineer.
Anchor bolts with pipe sleeves shall be in accordance with the details shown on the
Drawings.
3.5
PAINTING
A. Shop Painting
All structural steel shall be shop primed in accordance with Section 33035 after
fabrication and cleaning.
All steelwork shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose mill scale, rust, and foreign
matter before shop painting.
Each individual piece shall be painted before assembly. Paint shall be applied only
to dry surfaces.
Edges where field welding is required shall not be painted.
B. Field Painting
After erection, the Contractor shall thoroughly prepare and clean the structural steel
surfaces of all dirt, grease, rust or other foreign matter.
** END OF SECTION **
Page 3 of 3
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Part 2-0
Mechanical
Technical Specifications
SUBMITTALS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES:
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1.4
1.1.5
1.1.6
1.1.7
1.1.8
1.1.9
1.1.10
1.1.11
1.1.12
1.1.13
1.2
Submittal procedures
Construction progress schedules
Proposed Products list
Product Data
Shop Drawings
Samples
Design data
Test reports
Certificates
Manufacturer's instructions
Manufacturer's field reports
Erection drawings
Construction photographs
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Refer to Contract Closeout: Contract closeout submittals.
1.3
REFERENCES
A. AGC (Associated General Contractors of America) publication "The Use of CPM in
Construction - A Manual for General Contractors and the Construction Industry".
1.3.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Transmit each submittal with Architect/Engineer accepted form.
B. Sequentially number the transmittal form.
number and a sequential alphabetic suffix.
Revise submittals with original
C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and
detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate.
D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialled certifying that review, approval,
verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work,
1
Technical Specifications
and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the
Work and Contract Documents.
E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Architect/Engineer at
business address. Coordinate submission of related items.
F. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from
the Contractor.
G. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations
which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.
H. Provide space for Contractor and Architect/Engineer review stamps.
I. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous
submission.
J. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to
promptly report any inability to comply with requirements.
K. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.
1.3.2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
A. Submit initial schedule in duplicate within 15 days after date established in
Notice to Proceed.
B. Revise and resubmit as required.
C. Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying changes
since previous version.
D. Submit network analysis diagram using the critical path method, as outlined in
AGC - The Use of CPM in Construction.
E. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of
separate stages and other logically grouped activities. Indicate the early and late
start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration.
F. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each
submission.
G. Indicate submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, samples, and
product delivery dates, including those furnished by Owner and required by
Allowances.
2
Technical Specifications
1.3.3 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST
A. Within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit list of major products
proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of
each product.
B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade
name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards.
1.3.4 PRODUCT DATA
A. Product Data for Review:
1. Submitted to Architect/Engineer for review for the limited purpose of
checking for conformance with information given and the design concept
expressed in the contract documents.
2. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article above and for record documents
purposes described in CONTRACT CLOSEOUT.
B. Product Data for Information:
1. Submitted for the Architect/Engineer's
administrator or for the Owner.
knowledge
as
contract
C. Product Data for Project Close-out:
1. Submitted for the Owner's benefit during and after project completion.
D. Submit the number of copies which the Contractor requires, plus three (3) copies
which will be retained by the Architect/Engineer.
E. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data.
Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this
Project.
F. Indicate Product utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection
requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment
and appliances.
G. After review distribute in accordance with the Submittal Procedures article
above and provide copies for record documents described in CONTRACT
CLOSEOUT.
3
Technical Specifications
1.3.5 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Shop Drawings For Review:
1. Submitted to Architect/Engineer for review for the limited purpose of
checking for conformance with information given and the design concept
expressed in the contract documents.
2. After review, produce copies and distribute in accordance with
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article above and for record documents
purposes described in CONTRACT CLOSEOUT.
B. Shop Drawings For Information:
1. Submitted for the Architect/Engineer's
administrator or for the Owner.
knowledge
as
contract
C. Shop Drawings For Project Close-out:
1. Submitted for the Owner's benefit during and after project completion.
2. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection
requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional
equipment and appliances.
3. Submit in the form of one reproducible transparency and one opaque
reproduction.
1.3.6 SAMPLES
A. Samples For Review:
2. Submitted to Architect/Engineer for review for the limited purpose of
checking for conformance with information given and the design concept
expressed in the contract documents.
3. After review, produce duplicates and distribute in accordance with
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article above and for record documents
purposes described in CONTRACT CLOSEOUT.
B. Samples For Information:
1. Submitted for the Architect/Engineer's
administrator or for the Owner.
knowledge
as
contract
C. Samples For Selection:
4
Technical Specifications
1. Submitted to Architect/Engineer for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.
2. Submit samples of finishes in custom colors selected, textures, and
patterns for Architect/Engineer selection.
3. After review, produce duplicates and distribute in accordance with
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article above and for record documents
purposes described in CONTRACT CLOSEOUT.
D. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the
Product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample
submittals for interfacing work.
E. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information.
F. Submit the number of samples specified in individual specification sections; two
of which will be retained by Architect/Engineer.
G. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in individual
specification sections.
H. Samples will not be used for testing purposes unless specifically stated in the
specification section.
1.3.7 DESIGN DATA
A. Submit for the Architect/Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator or for
the Owner.
B. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with
information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
1.3.8 TEST REPORTS
A. Submit approved test report for the Architect/Engineer's knowledge as contract
administrator or for the Owner.
B. Submit test reports for information for the limited purpose of assessing
conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the
contract documents.
1.3.9 CERTIFICATES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the
manufacturer, installation/application Subcontractor, or the Contractor to
Architect/Engineer, in quantities specified for Product Data.
5
Technical Specifications
B. Indicate material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements.
Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but
must be acceptable to Architect/Engineer.
1.3.10 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions
for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, to
Architect/Engineer for delivery to Owner in quantities specified for Product Data.
B. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and
special environmental criteria required for application or installation.
1.3.11 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD REPORTS
A. Submit reports for the Architect/Engineer's benefit as contract administrator or
for the Owner.
B. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect/Engineer
for information.
C. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with
information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
1.3.12 ERECTION DRAWINGS
A. Submit drawings for the Architect/Engineer's benefit as contract administrator or
for the Owner.
B. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with
information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
C. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by
the Architect/Engineer or Owner.
1.3.13 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Photographs taken during the construction and progress reports submit by the
contractor for Engineer/Client evaluation and approval.
6
Technical Specifications
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
1.1.1 Closeout procedures.
1.1.2 Final cleaning.
1.1.3 Adjusting.
1.1.4 Project record documents.
1.1.5 Operation and maintenance data.
1.1.6 Spare parts and maintenance Products.
1.1.7 Warranties and bonds.
1.1.8 Maintenance service.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Refer to Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Progress cleaning.
B.
Refer to Starting of Systems:
balancing.
System start-up, testing, adjusting, and
1.1.1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has
been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents
and ready for Architect/Engineer's review.
B. Provide submittals to Architect/Engineer that are required by governing or other
authorities.
C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum,
previous payments, and sum remaining due.
1.1.2 FINAL CLEANING
7
Technical Specifications
A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment.
B. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials
appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned.
C. Replace filters of operating equipment.
D. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
E. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
F. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from
the site.
1.1.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered
operation.
1.1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual
revisions to the Work:
1.
Drawings
2.
Specifications
3.
Addenda
4.
Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract
5.
Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples
6.
Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting
B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.
C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.
D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.
E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of
actual Products installed, including the following:
1.
Manufacturer's name and product model and number
8
Technical Specifications
2.
Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3.
Changes made by Addenda and modifications.
F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings : Legibly mark each item to record actual
construction including:
G.
1.
Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum.
2.
Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities
and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.
3.
Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed
in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the
Work.
4.
Field changes of dimension and detail.
5.
Details not on original Contract drawings.
Submit documents to Architect/Engineer with claim for final Application for
Payment.
1.1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit data bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch (A4) text pages, three D side ring binders
with durable plastic covers.
B. Prepare binder cover with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS", title of project , and subject matter of binder when multiple
binders are required.
C. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically
organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced
laminated plastic tabs.
D. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or
system description identified, typed on 20 pound white paper, in three parts as
follows:
1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
Architect/Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment
suppliers.
9
Technical Specifications
2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by process
flow and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify
names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and
suppliers. Identify the following:
A.
Significant design criteria.
B.
List of equipment.
C.
Parts list for each component.
D.
Operating instructions.
E.
Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.
F.
Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended
cleaning methods and materials, and special precautions
identifying detrimental agents.
3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:
A.
Shop drawings and product data.
B.
Air and water balance reports.
C.
Certificates.
D.
Originals of warranties
E.
Submit
F.
Submit one (1) draft copy of completed volumes 30 days prior
to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned
after final inspection, with Architect/Engineer comments.
Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final
submission.
E.
Submit three sets of revised final volumes, within 15 days after
final inspection.
1.1.6 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS
A. Provide spare parts for 1 year supply as indicated on approved contract
documents whichever is greater, maintenance, and extra Products in quantities
specified in individual specification sections.
10
Technical Specifications
B. Deliver to Project site and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to
final payment.
1.1.7 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
A. Provide notarized copies.
B. Execute and assemble transferable warranty documents from Subcontractors,
suppliers, and manufacturers.
C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in three D side ring binder with durable
plastic cover.
D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment.
E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide
updated submittal within days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as
start of warranty period.
1.1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Furnish service and maintenance of components indicated in specification
sections for two year from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation.
Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required.
C. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components.
Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the
manufacturer of the original component.
D. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or
Subcontractor without prior written consent of the Owner.
11
Technical Specifications
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW (VRF)
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
1.1.1
Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) Publications:
210-81
Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment
260-75
Application, Installation and Servicing of Unitary Systems
360 -83
Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment
410-72
Forced Circulation Air-cooling and Air- heating Coils
520-78
Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressor and Condensing Units
Unit
1.1.2 Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA) Publications:
210-74
Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating
99-83
Standard Handbooks
210-74
Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating
1.1.3 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air- Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
Inc. Publications:
1983
Equipment, Handbook and Product Directory
1980
Systems, Handbook and Product Directory
15-78
Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration
1.1.4 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:
A386-78
Zinc-Coating (Hot-Dip) on Assembled Steel Products
12
Technical Specifications
B117-85
Salt Spray (Fog) Testing
B209-83
Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
B280-83
F 872-84
Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration
Service
Field
Filter Units, Air Conditioning: Viscous-Impingement Type Cleanable
1.1.5 National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) Publications:
MG-1-1978
Motors and Generators (Rev. 82)
ICS-1978
Industrial Controls, Devices, Controllers and Assembles
(Rev. 83)
1.1.6 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications:
70-81
National Electrical Code
90A-81
Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
91-04
Exhaust System for Air Conveying of Gases, etc.
1.1.7 Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Publications:
109-78
Tube Fittings for Flammable and Combustible Fluid Refrigeration
Services and Marine Use
873-79
Temperature Indicating and Regulating Equipment
900-77
Air Filters
1.2
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: Section 15011, "Mechanical General Requirements", with
the following additions and modifications, applies.
1.3
DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The work includes the following:
1.4
SUBMITTALS: The contractor shall submit all other items for approval.
1.4.1
Manufacturer's Data:
a.
b.
c.
VRF Type Units (Indoor and Outdoor Unit)
FCU (Wall or Ceiling Mounted Type)
Ceiling Cassette
13
Technical Specifications
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
1.4.2
Wall Mounted Units
Ceiling Suspended
Ceiling Concealed
ACCU
Refrigeration piping & accessories
Certified Test Reports
a. VRF Type Units (Indoor and Outdoor Unit)
b. Fans / Blower data
1.4.3 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
a. VRF Type Units (Indoor and Outdoor Unit)
1.4.4 Posted Operating Instructions:
a.
1.4.5
VRF Type Units (Indoor and Outdoor Unit)
Manufacturer's Recommended Procedures:
a. Installation, including evacuation and charging procedures
b. Start-up and initial operation
c. Spare parts list for 1 year supply
d. complete supplier list with contact information details
1.4.6
Report of Start-Up and Initial Readings
1.5 CORROSION PREVENTION: Unless specified otherwise, equipment fabricated from ferrous
metals that do not have a zinc coating conforming to ASTM A386 or a duplex coating of zinc
and paint shall be treated for prevention of rust with a factory coating or paint system that
will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test except that equipment located outdoors shall
be tested for 500 hours. The salt spray fog test shall be in accordance with ASTM B 117 using
a 20 percent sodium chloride solution. Immediately after completion of the test, the coating
shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling or cracking, no loss of adhesion, and the specimen
shall show no signs of rust creepage beyond 3 mm on either side of the scratch mark. The film
thickness of the factory coating or paint system applied on the equipment shall be not less
than film thickness used on the test specimen.
1.6 SAFETY STANDARDS:
1.6.1 Design, Manufacture and Installation of Mechanical Refrigeration Equipment:
ASHRAE 15-78.
1.6.2 Machinery Guards: Fully guard drives mechanisms, or other moving parts in
accordance with ANSI B15.1. Provide guards fabricated of steel with coated, RAL color shall
14
Technical Specifications
be according to architect and expanded metal, rigidly mounted, and readily removed
without disassembly.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
Trane
Daikin
Samsung
Mitsubishi
Carrier
Hitachi
LG
2.1 General: The air conditioning system shall be designed, constructed, and rating tested in
accordance with ARI Standard 430. Units shall be ARI certified.
2.2 Performance Rating: Cooling capacity of unit shall meet the total heat requirements
indicated. Submittal shall include catalogue selection data, which accounts for entering air
conditions at evaporator, and condenser air conditions.
2.3 Air Conditioner; VRF Type: Unit shall be a multi-split system full inverter controlled
compressor capable of changing the speed linearly to follow variations in cooling load. The
indoor units shall be constructed for indoor installation and the outdoor unit shall be
completely weather- proofed for outdoor installation. Both indoor and outdoor units shall be
properly assembled, internally piped and wired, thoroughly tested, and charged with R410A
refrigerant at the factory.
Cooling capacity - The total capacity of the multi-system full inverter controlled compressor
(KW) shall be as shown on the equipment schedule.
2.3.1
Indoor Units:
Units shall have capacities at the operating conditions specified. They shall include an
evaporator coil, expansion valve, centrifugal type air circulation blower, permanent type air
filter, condensate drip pan and insulated decorative cabinet with discharge plenum, supply
and return air grilles.
a. Refrigeration Cycle – The refrigeration cycle shall be equipped with heat exchanger, an
electronic expansion valve, solenoid valves and flare connections.
b. Indoor Fan and Fan Motor – The indoor fan shall be the multi-blade centrifugal type,
statically and dynamically balanced and direct driven by an electric motor. The motor
15
Technical Specifications
bearing shall be permanently lubricated. The fan shall deliver air flow indicated on the
schedule, nominal air flow for the model selected. They shall be provided with a
combination fan switch and thermostat. Three operating positions can be selected
according to the required conditions. Fan motor shall be equipped with overload
protection.
c. Indoor Heat Exchanger – The heat exchanger shall be multi-pass, cross-finned tube type,
equipped with highly-efficient aluminium fins, mechanically bonded to seamless, oxygen
free copper tubes. The fins shall be spaced at no more than 12 fins per 25.4 mm. The
face area shall not be less than the manufacturer’s recommendation. The coil shall be
cleaned, dehydrated and tested for leakage at the factory.
2.3.2 Outdoor Unit:
Unit shall be air cooled, split type multi system air conditioner consisting of one, two or
three outdoor unit and multiple indoor units, each having capability to cool independently
for the requirements of the rooms, connectible to multiple indoor units that can be joined
to one refrigerant circuit and controlled individuality.
a. Full Inverter controlled compressor shall be capable of changing the speed linearly to
follow variations in cooling and heating load. Outdoor unit shall be suitable for mixmatch connection of the following type of indoor units.
 Cassette Type
 Ceiling Suspended Type
 Wall Mounted Type
 Ceiling Concealed Mounted type
b. Capacity
Unit shall have a total capacity as shown on the equipment schedule of the plans.
c. Refrigerant circuit

The refrigerant circuit shall include an accumulator, plural electronic expansion
valves, one or two oil separators, a receiver and liquid and gas shut off valves.
Filter drier and crankcase heaters shall be furnished.

The outdoor unit shall either have one scroll type conventional compressors and
multiple inverter type compressors. The indoor unit shall be equipped with an
electronic control valve to control refrigerant flow individually.

Refrigerant shall be R410a
d. Safety Devices
16
Technical Specifications
The following safety devices shall be part of the outdoor unit; high pressure switch,
fused crankcase heater, fusible plug, thermal protectors for compressor and fan
motor, over current protection for inverter, short recycling protection timer.
e. Oil Recovery System
Unit shall be equipped with an oil recovery system to ensure stable operation with
long refrigerant piping
f. Controls

Computerized PID control shall be used to maintain a correct room temperature.

Unit shall be equipped with a self diagnosis circuit for easy maintenance and
service

The indoor unit shall be operated individually and each having a remote controller
with an ON/OFF switch, a fan speed selector, a timer, a thermostat setting button
and LCD which indicates temperature setting, operation mode, malfunction code
and filter cleaning timing etc.

The remote controller shall memorize the latest malfunction code for easy
maintenance.

Up to 20 indoor units can be controlled by one remote controller in case of group
control operation
2.3.3 Related Accessories
a. The following accessories shall be provided:



Piping branches and headers with insulation for quick work and smooth refrigerant
flow
Remote control devices for operation and monitoring of indoor unit from remote
Multi-function centralized controller
b. The monitoring function shall be capable of indicating operation and trouble signals of
the indoor and outdoor unit to the remote
2.3.4 Outdoor unit shall be provided with anti-corrosion treatment. Cabinet shall be
constructed of galvanized steel sheet, baked with synthetic paint. The service panel shall be
easily removable for service access to the electrical components and the compressor.
2.3.5 Fans: Statically and dynamically balanced, with air capacities horsepower, fan types,
fan arrangement, and pressure ratings as indicated. Fan bearing life shall be minimum
200,000 hours at operating conditions. Provide guard (bird) screens for outdoor inlets and
17
Technical Specifications
outlets. Equip with automatic back-draft damper where indicated. Housing and fan wheel
shall be aluminium or steel.
a. 4-Way Cassette Type - shall be design for quiet operation and shall match any interior
design with a wide air flow wing installed turning to both sides of the air outlet to allow
the air distribution in every four corners of the panel. The unit shall be provided with
shutter to conceal the air outlet with the louvers when the operation is stopped. The
louvers shall cover the air outlet horizontally providing a neat appearance. There shall be
provision for fresh air duct connection. Install drain to meet local sanitation codes. Unit
shall be provided with condensate pump installed as standard from the factory.
b. Ceiling Type Indoor Unit – shall be design for quiet operation with auto-louver to
automatically controls upward and downward motion of air flow and grille that serves as
a shutter when stopped. A long life filter (mildew-proof) shall be fitted as a standard
with no maintenance for 2,500 hours of operation. The fan shall be of a silent type with
integral vibration isolators.
c. Wall Mounted Type Indoor Unit - shall be design for quiet operation, slim compact and
highly performance diagonal flow cone type fan to minimize the noise. A long life filter
(mildew-proof) shall be fitted as a standard with no maintenance for 2,500 hours of
operation for ordinary offices.
d. Ceiling Concealed Type Indoor Unit – shall be design for quiet operation, slim compact
and highly performance Sirocco type fan to minimize the noise. An external static
pressure of up to 200 Pa shall be used. A long life filter (mildew-proof) shall be fitted as a
standard with no maintenance for 2,500 hours of operation for ordinary offices.
2.4 CLEANING, PAINTING, AND IDENTIFICATION: Cleaning, painting, and identification of
piping shall be as specified under Section entitled "Painting of Building (Field Painting)".
2.5 IDENTIFICATION TAGS AND PLATES: Provide equipment, gages, thermometers, valves,
and controllers with tags numbered and stamped for their use. Plates and tags shall be of
brass or suitable nonferrous material, securely mounted or attached. Minimum letter and
numeral size shall be 3 mm.
PART 3 : EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION: Application and installation practices for unitary air-conditioning systems
shall conform to the requirements of ARI 260.
3.1.1 General: Install equipment and components in a manner to insure proper and
sequential operation of the equipment and its control. Installation of the system should
strictly comply with the manufacturer’s recommended installation practice. Manufacturer’s
18
Technical Specifications
representative should check and verify the installation to ensure it is in accordance with their
recommendations. Preliminary refrigerant pipe sizes are depicted in the plan and requires to
make necessary final pipe sizing that conform to their recommendation. Installation of
equipment not covered herein or in the manufacturer's representative. Provide proper
foundations for mounting of equipment, accessories, appurtenances, piping and controls
including, but not limited to, supported vibration isolators, stands, guides, anchors, clamps
and brackets. Foundations for equipment shall conform to equipment manufacturer’s
recommendation, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Set anchor bolts and sleeves
accurately using properly constructed templates. Anchor bolts shall be of adequate length
and provided with welded-on plates on the head end embedded in the concrete. Level
equipment base, using jacks or steel wedges, and neatly grouted-in with a non-shrinking type
of mortar grout. Locate equipment so that working space is available for all necessary
servicing such as shaft removal, disassembling compressor cylinders and pistons, replacing or
adjusting drives, motors, or shaft seals, access to water valves and head of shell and tube
equipment, tube cleaning or replacement, access to automatic controls, refrigerant charging,
lubricator, oil draining and working clearance under overhead lines. Provide electric isolation
between dissimilar metals for the purpose of minimizing galvanic corrosion.
3.1.2 Air Conditioning System: Install system as indicated, in accordance with the
requirements of ASHRAE 15-78, and as recommended in the manufacturer's installation and
operational instructions. All electrical control devices shall be enclosed in the indoor and
outdoor units. The refrigeration cycle shall be equipped with solenoid valves and flare
connections to changeover the cycle in mediating between outdoor unit and indoor unit.
3.1.3 Electrical Work: Electric motor driven equipment specified herein shall be
provided complete with motors, motor starters, and controls. Electrical equipment and
wiring shall be provided with complete "Interior Wiring Systems". Motor starters shall be
provided complete with properly sized thermal overload protection and other
appurtenances necessary for the motor control specified. Provide manual or automatic
control and protective devices required for the operation, herein specified and any control
wiring required for controls and devices but not indicated.
3.1.4 Refrigerant Piping:
Piping and fitting installation shall conform to the
requirements of ASME B31.1. Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at
the jobsite, and worked into place without springing or forcing, completely clearing all
windows, doors, and other openings. Cutting or other weakening of the building structure to
facilitate piping installation will not be permitted without written approval. Pipe or tubing
shall be cut square, shall have burrs removed by reaming, and shall permit free expansion
and contraction without causing damage to the building structure, pipe, joints, or hangers.
Changes in direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of pipe 100 mm (4
inches) and smaller will be permitted, provided a pipe bender is used and wide weep bends
are formed. Mitering or notching pipe or other similar construction to form elbows or tees
will not be permitted. The centerline radius of bends shall not be less than 6 diameters of
the pipe. Bent pipe showing kinks wrinkles, flattening, or other malformations will not be
accepted. Piping shall be installed 4 mm per m (1/2 inch per 10 feet) of pipe in the direction
of flow to ensure adequate oil drainage. Open ends of refrigerant lines or equipment shall
be properly capped or plugged during installation to keep moisture, dirt, or other foreign
19
Technical Specifications
material out of the system. Piping shall remain capped until installation. Equipment piping
shall be in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations and the
contract drawings. Equipment and piping arrangements shall fit into space allotted and
allow adequate acceptable clearances for installation, replacement, entry, servicing, and
maintenance.
3.1.5 FANS: Installation shall conform to NFPA 91, and SMACNA Round Industrial Duct
Construction Standards, and SMACNA Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards.
Provide mounting and supports for equipment and accessories, including structural supports,
hangers, vibration isolators, stands, clamps and brackets, access doors, and dampers. Install
accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.1.5.1 Installation of Supports:
3.1.5.1.1 Selection: Selection of equipment support system shall take into account the
best practice recommendations and requirements of SMACNA Round Industrial Duct
Construction Standards, SMACNA Rectangular Industrial Duct Construction Standards, and
NFPA 91; location and precedence of work under other sections; interferences of various
piping and electrical work; facility equipment; building configuration; structural and safety
factor requirements; vibrations and imposed loads under normal and abnormal service
conditions. Indicated support sizes, configurations, and spacing are the minimal type of
supporting component required for normal loads. Where installed loads are excessive for the
normal support spacing, provide heavier duty components or reduce the element spacing.
After system start-up, replace or correct support elements, which vibrate and cause noise or
possible fatigue failure.
3.2 FIELD TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
3.2.1 Tests: All tests shall be performed and the Contractor shall furnish materials and
equipment required for test. Tests after installation and prior to acceptance shall be
performed in the presence of the Engineer and subject to his approval. Equipment and
material certified as having been successfully tested by the manufacturer in accordance with
referenced specifications and standards will not require retesting before installation.
Equipment and materials not tested at the place of manufacturer will be tested before or
after installation, as applicable, where necessary to determine compliance with referenced
specifications and standards.
3.2.1.1 Leak Testing: Upon completion of installation of the air conditioning equipment,
test all factories as well as field refrigerant piping with an electronic-type leak detector to
acquire leak tight refrigerant systems. If leaks are detected at the time of installation or
during the guarantee period, remove the entire refrigerant charge from the system, correct
the leaks and retest the system.
3.2.1.2 Evacuation, Dehydration, and Charging: After system is found to be without leaks,
evacuate the system using a reliable gage and a vacuum pump capable of pulling a vacuum of
at least 1 mm Hg absolute. Evacuate system in strict accordance with the triple-evacuation
and blotter method or in strict accordance with equipment manufacturer's printed
20
Technical Specifications
instructions. System leak testing, evacuation, dehydration, and charging with refrigerant shall
comply with the requirements contained in ARI Standard 260.
3.2.1.3 Start-Up and Operation Tests: Follow the manufacturer's start-up and initial
operation procedures and place the system under all modes of operation to ensure that it is
functioning correctly. Adjust safety and automatic control instruments as necessary to ensure
proper operation and sequence. Initial operation period shall be not less than 8 hours. The air
conditioner manufacturer/vendor shall perform the start-up and should verify and confirm
the complete installation. Manufacturer should issue acceptance of the installed system that
the system is fully functional and operational according to the need of the project.
3.2.1.4 Performance Tests: Upon completion of evacuation, charging, start-up, final leak
testing, and proper adjustment of controls, the system shall be performance tested to
demonstrate that it complies with the performance and capacity requirements of the
specifications and plans. Test the system for not less than 8 hours, during which time hourly
readings shall be recorder. At the end of the test period, the readings shall be averaged and
the average shall be considered to be the system performance.
21
Technical Specifications
REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
PART 1 : GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Piping.
B. Refrigerant.
C. Moisture and liquid indicators.
D. Valves.
E. Strainers.
F. Check valves.
G. Pressure relief valves.
H. Filter driers.
I. Solenoid valves.
J. Expansion valves.
K. Receivers.
L. Flexible connections.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ARI 495 - Refrigerant Liquid Receivers.
B. ARI 710 - Liquid Line Dryers.
C. ARI 730 - Flow-Capacity Rating and Application of Suction-Line Filters and FilterDriers
D. ARI 750 - Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves.
E. ARI 760 - Solenoid Valves for Use With Volatile Refrigerants.
F. ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
22
Technical Specifications
G. ASHRAE 34 - Number Designation of Refrigerants.
H. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes, SEC 9 - Qualification Standard for
Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing
Operators.
I. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
J. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings For Flared Copper Tubes.
K. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping.
L. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.
M. ASME SEC 8D - Boilers and Pressure Vessels Code,Rules for Construction of
Pressure Vessels.
N. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and
Seamless.
O. ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate
and Elevated Temperatures.
P. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.
Q. ASTM B280 - Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field
Service.
R. ASTM F708 - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.
S. AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal.
T. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code, Steel.
U. MSS SP58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer.
V. MSS SP69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
W. MSS SP89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Where more than one piping system material is specified ensure system
components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is
not jeopardized. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and
couplings for servicing are consistently provided.
23
Technical Specifications
B. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASTM B31.5 MSS SP69
unless indicated otherwise.
C. Liquid Indicators:
1.
2.
3.
Use line size liquid indicators in main liquid line leaving condenser.
If receiver is provided, install in liquid line leaving receiver.
Use line size on leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.
D. Valves
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Use service valves on suction and discharge of compressors.
Use gage taps at compressor inlet and outlet.
Use gage taps at hot gas bypass regulators, inlet and outlet.
Use check valves on compressor discharge.
Use check valves on condenser liquid lines on multiple condenser
systems.
E. Refrigerant Charging Packed Angle Valve: Use in liquid line between receiver
shut-off valve and expansion valve.
F. Strainers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use line size strainer upstream of each automatic valve.
Where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are used, use
single main liquid line strainer.
On steel piping systems, use strainer in suction line.
Use shut-off valve on each side of strainer.
G. Pressure Relief Valves: Use on ASME receivers and pipe to outdoors.
F.
Permanent Filter Driers:
1.
2.
3.
I.
Replaceable Cartridge Filter Driers:
1.
2.
J.
Use in low temperature systems.
Use in systems utilizing hermetic compressors.
Use filter driers for each solenoid valve.
Use vertically in liquid line adjacent to receivers.
Use filter driers for each solenoid valve.
Solenoid Valves:
1.
Use in liquid line of systems operating with single pump-out or
pump-down compressor control.
24
Technical Specifications
2.
3.
K.
Receivers:
1.
2.
L.
1.5
Use in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems.
Use in oil bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil
and refrigerant into the suction line when system shuts down.
Use on systems 10 tons ,36 kW and larger, sized to accommodate
pump down charge.
Use on systems with long piping runs.
Flexible Connectors: Utilize at or near compressors where piping
configuration does not absorb vibration.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Record exact locations of equipment and refrigeration accessories on record
drawings.
1.6
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum three (3) years documented experience.
G. Design piping system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer
experienced in design of this work and licensed at the place where the Project is
located.
H.
1.7
1.9
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to ASME B31.9 for installation of piping system.
B.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL, as
suitable for the purpose indicated.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section
01600.
B.
Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping containers with labelling
in place.
C.
Protect piping and specialties from entry of contaminating material by
leaving end caps and plugs in place until installation.
25
Technical Specifications
D.
Dehydrate and charge components such as piping and receivers, seal prior to
shipment, until connected into system.
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING
A.
Copper Tubing: ASTM B280, Type ACR hard drawn or annealed.
1.
2.
B.
Copper Tubing to 22 mm OD: ASTM B88, Type K, annealed.
1.
2.
C.
Fittings: ASME B16.26 cast copper.
Joints: Flared.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, 10 mm wall for sizes 300 mm and over,
black.
1.
2.
D.
Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper.
Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy with
melting range 640 to 805 degrees C.
Fittings: ASTM A234, forged steel welding type.
Joints: AWS D1.1, welded.
Pipe Supports and Anchors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Conform to ASME B31.5 .
Hangers for Pipe Sizes 13 to 38 mm: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel,
split ring.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes 50 mm and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable,
clevis.
Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and
hanger rods.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 75 mm: Cast iron hook.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 100 mm and Over: Welded steel bracket
and wrought steel clamp.
Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor
flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or
continuous threaded.
Inserts: Malleable iron case of steel shell and expander plug for
threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing
rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger
rods.
26
Technical Specifications
PART 3 : EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B.
Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C.
Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
INSTALLATION
A. Install refrigeration specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building structure, and
maintain gradient.
C. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space.
D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and locations. Slope
piping one percent in direction of oil return.
E. Install seismic joints/piping to allow for expansion and contraction without
stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.
F. Inserts:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.
Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete
slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.
Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts
carrying pipe over 100 mm.
Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with
slab surface.
Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below
and provide through bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut
recessed into and grouted flush with slab.
G. Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install in accordance with ASTM B31.5.
Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
Install hangers to provide minimum 13 mm space between finished
covering and adjacent work.
Place hangers within 300 mm of each horizontal elbow.
27
Technical Specifications
5.
6.
Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping
independently of connected horizontal piping.
Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation,
provide multiple or trapeze hangers.
H. Arrange piping to return oil to compressor. Provide traps and loops in piping,
and provide double risers as required. Slope horizontal piping 0.40 percent in
direction of flow.
I. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
J. Provide access to concealed valves and fittings.
K. Flood piping system with nitrogen when brazing.
L. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building frame, brush
clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
M. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish
painting.
N. Insulate piping.
O.
Follow ASHRAE 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for
disposal of refrigerant.
P.
Provide replaceable cartridge filter driers, with isolation valves and valved
bypass.
Q. Locate expansion valve sensing bulb immediately downstream of evaporator on
suction line.
R. Provide external equalizer piping on expansion valves with refrigerant distributor
connected to evaporator.
S. Install flexible connectors at right angles to axial movement of compressor,
parallel to crankshaft.
T. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing.
U. Provide electrical connection to solenoid valves.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5.
B. Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 1470 kPa. Perform final tests at 92 kPa
28
Technical Specifications
vacuum and 1470 kPa using halide torch. Test to no leakage.
3.4 SCHEDULES
A.
Pipe Hanger Spacing
Pipe Size, mm
12 to 32
38 to 50
62 to 75
100 t0 150
200 to 300
Maximum Hanger Spacing, m
2
3
3
3
4.25
Hanger Rod, mm
9
9
13
15
22
29
Technical Specifications
THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. At the
discretion of the Government, the manufacturer of any material supplied will be required
to furnish test reports pertaining to any of the tests necessary to assure compliance with
the standard or standards referenced in this specification.
ASHRAE 90.1 - IP
(2007; Supplement 2008; Errata 2009; Errata 2009)
Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise
Residential Buildings, I-P Edition
ASHRAE 90.2
(2007) Energy Efficient
Residential Buildings
ASTM A 167
(1999; R 2004) Standard Specification for Stainless
and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip
ASTM B 209
(2007) Standard Specification for Aluminum and
Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
ASTM C 1126
(2004) Standard Specification for Faced or Unfaced
Rigid Cellular Phenolic Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 1136
(2008) Standard Specification for Flexible, Low
Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 1290
(2006e1) Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous
Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate
HVAC Ducts
ASTM C 1427
(2007) Specification for Preformed Flexible Cellular
Polyolefin Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular
Form
ASTM C 533
(2007) Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate
Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation
Design
of
Low-Rise
30
Technical Specifications
ASTM C 534/C 534M
(2008) Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible
Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and
Tubular Form
MSS SP-69
(2003; R 2004) Standard for Pipe Hangers and
Supports - Selection and Application
MICA Insulation Stds
(1999) National Commercial & Industrial Insulation
Standards
NFPA 96
(2007) Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of
Commercial Cooking Operations
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1.2.1 General
Provide field-applied insulation and accessories on mechanical systems as specified
herein; factory-applied insulation is specified under the piping, duct or equipment to be
insulated. Insulation of heat distribution systems and chilled water systems outside of
buildings shall be as specified in UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
Field applied insulation materials required for use on Government-furnished items as
listed in the SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS shall be furnished and installed by the
Contractor.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not
having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval/information only.
When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will
review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
Submit the three SD types, SD-02 Shop Drawings, SD-03 Product Data, and SD-08
Manufacturer's Instructions at the same time for each system.
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Pipe Insulation Systems and Associated Accessories
Duct Insulation Systems and Associated Accessories
Equipment Insulation Systems and Associated Accessories
31
Technical Specifications
A booklet containing completed MICA Insulation Stds plates detailing each
insulating system for each pipe, duct, or equipment insulating system, after
approval of materials and prior to applying insulation.
a. The MICA plates shall detail the materials to be installed and the specific
insulation application. Submit all MICA plates required showing the entire
insulating system, including plates required to show insulation penetrations,
vessel bottom and top heads, legs, and skirt insulation as applicable. The MICA
plates shall present all variations of insulation systems including locations,
materials, vapor proofing, jackets and insulation accessories.
b. If the Contractor elects to submit detailed drawings instead of edited MICA
Plates, the detail drawings shall be technically equivalent to the edited MICA
Plate submittal.
SD-03 Product Data
Pipe Insulation Systems
Duct Insulation Systems
Equipment Insulation Systems
A complete list of materials, including manufacturer's descriptive technical
literature, performance data, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. The
product number, k-value, thickness and furnished accessories including
adhesives, sealants and jackets for each mechanical system requiring insulation
shall be included. The product data must be copywrited, have an identifying or
publication number, and shall have been published prior to the issuance date of
this solicitation. Materials furnished under this section of the specification shall
be submitted together in a booklet and in conjunction with the MICA plates
booklet (SD-02). Annotate the product data to indicate which MICA plate is
applicable.
SD-04 Samples
Thermal Insulation
After approval of materials, actual sections of installed systems, properly
insulated in accordance with the specification requirements, shall be displayed.
Such actual sections must remain accessible to inspection throughout the job
and will be reviewed from time to time for controlling the quality of the work
throughout the construction site. Each material used shall be identified, by
indicating on an attached sheet the specification requirement for the material
and the material by each manufacturer intended to meet the requirement. The
Contracting Officer will inspect display sample sections at the jobsite.
Approved display sample sections shall remain on display at the jobsite during
the construction period. Upon completion of construction, the display sample
sections will be closed and sealed.
32
Technical Specifications
Pipe Insulation Display Sections: Display sample sections shall include as a
minimum an elbow or tee, a valve, dielectric waterways and flanges, a hanger
with protection shield and insulation insert, or dowel as required, at support
point, method of fastening and sealing insulation at longitudinal lap,
circumferential lap, butt joints at fittings and on pipe runs, and terminating
points for each type of pipe insulation used on the job, and for hot pipelines
and cold pipelines, both interior and exterior, even when the same type of
insulation is used for these services.
Duct Insulation Display Sections: Display sample sections for rigid and flexible
duct insulation used on the job. A temporary covering shall be used to enclose
and protect display sections for duct insulation exposed to weather.
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Pipe Insulation Systems
Duct Insulation Systems
Equipment Insulation Systems
Submit a booklet containing manufacturer's published installation instructions
for the insulation systems in coordination with the submitted MICA Insulation
Stds plates booklet. Annotate their installation instructions to indicate which
product data and which MICA plate are applicable. The instructions must be
copywrited, have an identifying or publication number, and shall have been
published prior to the issuance date of this solicitation.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer's unopened containers. Materials
delivered and placed in storage shall be provided with protection from weather, humidity,
dirt, dust and other contaminants. The Contracting Officer may reject insulation material
and supplies that become dirty, dusty, wet, or contaminated by some other means.
Packages or standard containers of insulation, jacket material, cements, adhesives, and
coatings delivered for use, and samples required for approval shall have manufacturer's
stamp or label attached giving the name of the manufacturer and brand, and a
description of the material. Insulation packages and containers shall be asbestos free.
PART 2 : PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD PRODUCT
Provide materials which are the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in
the manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in
satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. Provide insulation systems in
accordance with the approved MICA National Insulation Standards plates as supplemented
by this specification. Provide field-applied insulation for heating, ventilating, and cooling
33
Technical Specifications
(HVAC) air distribution systems and piping systems which are located within, on, under, and
adjacent to buildings; and for plumbing systems.
2.2 MATERIALS
Provide insulation that meets or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 – IP/ASHRAE
90.2. Insulation exterior shall be cleanable, grease resistant, non-flaking and non-peeling.
Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion, soften, or otherwise
attack surfaces to which applied in either wet or dry state. Materials to be used on stainless
steel surfaces shall meet ASTM C 795 requirements. Materials shall be asbestos free and
conform to the following:
2.2.1 Wire
Soft annealed ASTM A 580/A 580M Type 302, 304 or 316 stainless steel, 16 or 18 gauge.
2.2.2 Insulation Bands
Insulation bands shall be 1/2 inch wide; 26 gauge stainless steel.
2.2.3 Sealants
Sealants shall be chosen from the butyl polymer type, the styrene-butadiene rubber type,
or the butyl type of sealants. Sealants shall have a maximum moisture vapor transmission
of 0.02 perms, and a maximum flame spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke
developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2.3 PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS
Insulation materials shall conform to Table 1. Insulation thickness shall be as listed in
Table 2 and meet or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1–IP/ASHRAE 90.2.
Insulation thickness shall be ½ to 1inch. Comply with EPA requirements in accordance
with RECYCLED / RECOVERED MATERIALS. Pipe insulation materials shall be limited to
those listed herein and shall meet the following requirements:
2.3.1 Aboveground Cold Pipeline (-30 to 60 deg. F)
Insulation for outdoor, indoor, exposed or concealed applications, shall be as follows:
a. Cellular Glass: ASTM C 552, Type II, and Type III. Supply the insulation with
manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.
34
Technical Specifications
b. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: ASTM C 534/C 534M, Grade 1, Type I or II.
Type II shall have vapor retarder/vapor barrier skin on one or both sides of the
insulation. Insulation with pre-applied adhesive shall not be used.
c. Phenolic Insulation: ASTM C 1126, Type III. Phenolic insulations shall comply with
ASTM C 795 and with the ASTM C 665 paragraph Corrosiveness. Supply the
insulation with manufacturer's recommended factory-applied jacket/vapor barrier.
d. Polyisocyanurate Insulation: ASTM C 591, type I. Supply the insulation with
manufacturer's recommended factory-applied vapor retarder/vapor barrier.
Insulation with pre-applied adhesive shall not be used.
e. Flexible Polyolefin Cellular Insulation: ASTM C 1427, Grade 1 Type I or II.
f. Mineral Fiber Insulation with Integral Wicking Material (MFIWM): ASTM C 547.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2.4 DUCT INSULATION SYSTEMS
2.4.1 Duct Insulation
Provide factory-applied [cellular glass polyisocyanurate or phenolic foam/elastomeric
insulation. Provide factory applied elastomeric closed cell or phenolic foam insulation
according to manufacturer's recommendations for insulation with manufacturer's
standard reinforced fire-retardant vapor barrier, with identification of installed thermal
resistance (R) value and out-of-package R value.]
2.4.1.1 Rigid Insulation
Rigid mineral fiber in accordance with ASTM C 612, Class 2 (maximum surface
temperature 400 degrees F), 3 pcf average, 1-1/2 inch thick, Type IA, IB, II, III, and IV.
Alternately, minimum thickness may be calculated in accordance with ASHRAE
90.2/ASHRAE 90.1 – IP.
2.4.1.2 Blanket Insulation
Blanket flexible mineral fiber insulation conforming to ASTM C 553, Type 1, Class B-3, 3/4
pcf nominal, 2.0 inches thick or Type II up to 250 degrees F. Also ASTM C 1290 Type III
may be used. Alternately, minimum thickness may be calculated in accordance with
ASHRAE 90.2/ASHRAE 90.1 - IP.
2.4.2 Kitchen Exhaust Ductwork Insulation
Minimum insulation thickness of 2 inches, blocks or boards, either mineral fiber
35
Technical Specifications
conforming to ASTM C 612, Class 5, 20 pcf average or calcium silicate conforming to ASTM
C 533, Type II. Provide vapor barrier for outside air connection to kitchen exhaust hood.
2.4.3 Acoustical Duct Lining
For ductwork indicated or specified in AIR SUPPLY, DISTRIBUTION, VENTILATION, AND
EXHAUST SYSTEM to be acoustically lined, provide external insulation in accordance with
this specification section and in addition to the acoustical duct lining.
2.4.4 Duct Insulation Jackets
2.4.4.1 All-Purpose Jacket
Provide insulation with insulation manufacturer's standard reinforced fire-retardant
jacket with or without integral vapor barrier as required by the service. In exposed
locations, provide jacket with a white surface suitable for field painting.
2.4.4.2 Metal Jackets
a. Aluminum Jackets: ASTM B 209, Temper H14, minimum thickness of 27 gauge
(0.016 inch), with factory-applied polyethylene and kraft paper moisture barrier on
inside surface. Provide smooth surface jackets for jacket outside dimension 8 inches
and larger. Provide corrugated surface jackets for jacket outside dimension 8 inches
and larger. Provide stainless steel bands, minimum width of 1/2 inch.
b. Stainless Steel Jackets: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M; Type 304, minimum
thickness of 33 gauge (0.010 inch), smooth surface with factory-applied polyethylene
and kraft paper moisture barrier on inside surface. Provide stainless steel bands,
minimum width of 1/2 inch.
2.4.4.3 Vapor Barrier/Weatherproofing Jacket
Vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket shall be laminated self-adhesive (minimum 2 mils
adhesive, 3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000 permeability, greater than 3 ply, standard
grade, silver, white, black and embossed or greater than 8 ply (minimum 2.9 mils
adhesive), heavy duty white or natural).
2.4.5 Weatherproof Duct Insulation
Provide ASTM C 591 Type I, polyurethane or polyisocyanate board insulation, minimum
density of 1.7 pcf ASTM C 552, cellular glass thermal insulation ASTM C 534/C 534M
Grade 1, Type II, flexible cellular insulation], and weatherproofing as specified in
manufacturer's instruction.
36
Technical Specifications
2.5 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SYSTEMS
Insulate equipment and accessories as specified in Tables 4 and 5. In outside locations,
provide insulation 1/2 inch thicker than specified. Increase the specified insulation
thickness for equipment where necessary to equal the thickness of angles or other
structural members to make a smooth, exterior surface.
PART 3 : EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION - GENERAL
Insulation shall only be applied to unheated and uncooled piping and equipment. Flexible
elastomeric cellular insulation shall not be compressed at joists, studs, columns, ducts,
hangers, etc. The insulation shall not pull apart after a one hour period; any insulation
found to pull apart after one hour, shall be replaced.
3.1.1 Installation
Except as otherwise specified, material shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions. Insulation materials shall not be applied until [tests]
[tests and heat tracing] specified in other sections of this specification are completed.
Material such as rust, scale, dirt and moisture shall be removed from surfaces to receive
insulation. Insulation shall be kept clean and dry. Insulation shall not be removed from
its shipping containers until the day it is ready to use and shall be returned to like
containers or equally protected from dirt and moisture at the end of each workday.
Insulation that becomes dirty shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to use. If insulation
becomes wet or if cleaning does not restore the surfaces to like new condition, the
insulation will be rejected, and shall be immediately removed from the jobsite. Joints
shall be staggered on multi layer insulation. Mineral fiber thermal insulating cement shall
be mixed with demineralized water when used on stainless steel surfaces. Insulation,
jacketing and accessories shall be installed in accordance with MICA Insulation Stds plates
except where modified herein or on the drawings.
3.2 PIPE INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION
Install pipe insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA Insulation Stds
plates as supplemented by the manufacturer's published installation instructions.
3.2.1 Pipe Insulation
3.2.1.1 General
Pipe insulation shall be installed on aboveground hot and cold pipeline systems as
specified below to form a continuous thermal retarder/barrier, including straight runs,
37
Technical Specifications
fittings and appurtenances unless specified otherwise. Installation shall be with full
length units of insulation and using a single cut piece to complete a run. Cut pieces or
scraps abutting each other shall not be used. Pipe insulation shall be omitted on the
following:
a. Pipe used solely for fire protection.
b. Chromium plated pipe to plumbing fixtures. However, fixtures for use by the
physically handicapped shall have the hot water supply and drain, including the trap,
insulated where exposed.
c. Sanitary drain lines.
d. Air chambers.
e. Adjacent insulation.
f. ASME stamps.
g. Access plates of fan housings.
h. Cleanouts or handholes.
3.2.1.2 Pipes Passing Through Walls, Roofs, and Floors
a. Pipe insulation shall be continuous through the sleeve.
b. An aluminum jacket or vapor barrier/weatherproofing - self adhesive jacket
(minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) less than 0.0000 permeability, greater
than 3 ply standard grade, silver, white, black and embossed with factory applied
moisture retarder shall be provided over the insulation wherever penetrations
require sealing.
c. Where pipes penetrate interior walls, the aluminum jacket or vapor
barrier/weatherproofing - self adhesive jacket (minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils
embossed) less than 0.0000 permeability, greater than 3 plys standard grade, silver,
white, black and embossed shall extend 2 inches beyond either side of the wall and
shall be secured on each end with a band.
d. Where penetrating floors, the aluminum jacket shall extend from a point below
the backup material to a point 10 inches above the floor with one band at the floor
and one not more than 1 inch from the end of the aluminum jacket.
e. Where penetrating waterproofed floors, the aluminum jacket shall extend from
below the backup material to a point 2 inches above the flashing with a band 1 inch
from the end of the aluminum jacket.
38
Technical Specifications
f. Where penetrating exterior walls, the aluminum jacket required for pipe exposed
to weather shall continue through the sleeve to a point 2 inches beyond the interior
surface of the wall.
g. Where penetrating roofs, pipe shall be insulated as required for interior service to
a point flush with the top of the flashing and sealed with vapor retarder coating. The
insulation for exterior application shall butt tightly to the top of flashing and interior
insulation. The exterior aluminum jacket shall extend 2 inches down beyond the end
of the insulation to form a counter flashing. The flashing and counter flashing shall
be sealed underneath with caulking.
h. For hot water pipes supplying lavatories or other similar heated service that
requires insulation, the insulation shall be terminated on the backside of the finished
wall. The insulation termination shall be protected with two coats of vapor barrier
coating with a minimum total thickness of 1/16 inch applied with glass tape
embedded between coats (if applicable). The coating shall extend out onto the
insulation 2 inches and shall seal the end of the insulation. Glass tape seams shall
overlap 1 inch. The annular space between the pipe and wall penetration shall be
caulked with approved fire stop material. The pipe and wall penetration shall be
covered with a properly sized (well fitting) escutcheon plate. The escutcheon plate
shall overlap the wall penetration at least 3/8 inches.
i. For domestic cold water pipes supplying lavatories or other similar cooling service
that requires insulation, the insulation shall be terminated on the finished side of the
wall (i.e., insulation must cover the pipe throughout the wall penetration). The
insulation shall be protected with two coats of vapor barrier coating with a minimum
total thickness of 1/16 inch. The coating shall extend out onto the insulation 2
inches and shall seal the end of the insulation. The annular space between the outer
surface of the pipe insulation and the wall penetration shall be caulked with an
approved fire stop material having vapor retarder properties. The pipe and wall
penetration shall be covered with a properly sized (well fitting) escutcheon plate.
The escutcheon plate shall overlap the wall penetration by at least 3/8 inches.
3.2.1.3 Pipes Passing Through Hangers
a. Insulation, whether hot or cold application, shall be continuous through hangers.
All horizontal pipes 2 inches and smaller shall be supported on hangers with the
addition of a Type 40 protection shield to protect the insulation in accordance with
MSS SP-69. Whenever insulation shows signs of being compressed, or when the
insulation or jacket shows visible signs of distortion at or near the support shield,
insulation inserts as specified below for piping larger than 2 inches shall be installed,
or factory insulated hangers (designed with a load bearing core) can be used.
b. Horizontal pipes larger than 2 inches at 60 degrees F and above shall be supported
on hangers in accordance with MSS SP-69, and PLUMBING, GENERAL PURPOSE.
39
Technical Specifications
c. Horizontal pipes larger than 2 inches and below 60 degrees F shall be supported
on hangers with the addition of a Type 40 protection shield in accordance with MSS
SP-69. An insulation insert of cellular glass, calcium silicate (or perlite above 80
degrees F), or the necessary strength polyisocyanurate shall be installed above each
shield. The insert shall cover not less than the bottom 180-degree arc of the pipe.
Inserts shall be the same thickness as the insulation, and shall extend 2 inches on
each end beyond the protection shield. When insulation inserts are required in
accordance with the above, and the insulation thickness is less than 1 inch, wooden
or cork dowels or blocks may be installed between the pipe and the shield to prevent
the weight of the pipe from crushing the insulation, as an option to installing
insulation inserts. The insulation jacket shall be continuous over the wooden dowel,
wooden block, or insulation insert.
d. Vertical pipes shall be supported with either Type 8 or Type 42 riser clamps with
the addition of two Type 40 protection shields in accordance with MSS SP-69
covering the 360-degree arc of the insulation. An insulation insert of cellular glass or
calcium silicate shall be installed between each shield and the pipe. The insert shall
cover the 360-degree arc of the pipe. Inserts shall be the same thickness as the
insulation, and shall extend 2 inches on each end beyond the protection shield.
When insulation inserts are required in accordance with the above, and the
insulation thickness is less than 1 inch, wooden or cork dowels or blocks may be
installed between the pipe and the shield to prevent the hanger from crushing the
insulation, as an option instead of installing insulation inserts. The insulation jacket
shall be continuous over the wooden dowel, wooden block, or insulation insert. The
vertical weight of the pipe shall be supported with hangers located in a horizontal
section of the pipe. When the pipe riser is longer than 30 feet, the weight of the
pipe shall be additionally supported with hangers in the vertical run of the pipe that
are directly clamped to the pipe, penetrating the pipe insulation. These hangers
shall be insulated and the insulation jacket sealed as indicated herein for anchors in a
similar service.
e. Inserts shall be covered with a jacket material of the same appearance and quality
as the adjoining pipe insulation jacket, shall overlap the adjoining pipe jacket 1-1/2
inches, and shall be sealed as required for the pipe jacket. The jacket material used
to cover inserts in flexible elastomeric cellular insulation shall conform to ASTM C
1136, Type 1, and is allowed to be of a different material than the adjoining
insulation material.
3.2.1.4 Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Pipe Insulation
Flexible elastomeric cellular pipe insulation shall be tubular form for pipe sizes 6 inches
and less. Grade 1, Type II sheet insulation used on pipes larger than 6 inches shall not be
stretched around the pipe. On pipes larger than 12 inches, the insulation shall be
adhered directly to the pipe on the lower 1/3 of the pipe. Seams shall be staggered when
applying multiple layers of insulation. Sweat fittings shall be insulated with miter-cut
40
Technical Specifications
pieces the same size as on adjacent piping. Screwed fittings shall be insulated with
sleeved fitting covers fabricated from miter-cut pieces and shall be overlapped and sealed
to the adjacent pipe insulation.
3.2.1.5 Pipes in high abuse areas.
In high abuse areas such as janitor closets and traffic areas in equipment rooms, kitchens,
and mechanical rooms, welded PVC/stainless steel, aluminum or flexible laminate
cladding (comprised of elastomeric, plastic or metal foil laminate) laminated self-adhesive
(minimum 2 mils adhesive, 3 mils embossed) vapor barrier/weatherproofing jacket, - less
than 0.0000 permeability; (greater than 3 ply, standard grade, silver, white, black and
embossed) aluminum jackets shall be utilized. Pipe insulation to the 6 foot level shall be
protected.
3.3 DUCT INSULATION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION
Install duct insulation systems in accordance with the approved MICA Insulation Stds
plates as supplemented by the manufacturer's published installation instructions.
Except for oven hood exhaust duct insulation, corner angles shall be installed on external
corners of insulation on ductwork in exposed finished spaces before covering with jacket.
[Duct insulation shall be omitted on exposed supply and return ducts in air conditioned
spaces [where the difference between supply air temperature and room air temperature
is less than 15 degrees F] unless otherwise shown.] Air conditioned spaces shall be
defined as those spaces directly supplied with cooled conditioned air (or provided with a
cooling device such as a fan-coil unit) and heated conditioned air (or provided with a
heating device such as a unit heater, radiator or convector).
3.3.1 Duct Insulation Thickness
Duct insulation thickness shall be in accordance with Table 4.
Table 4 - Minimum Duct Insulation (inches)
Cold Air Ducts
2.0
Relief Duct
1.5
Fresh Air Intake Ducts
1.5
Warm Air Ducts
2.0
Fresh Air Intake Ducts
1.5
41
Technical Specifications
FANS & BLOWERS
1.0
PART 1: GENERAL
1.1 Fans shall be of the type, size, arrangement and capacity as indicated in the
schedule and/or as shown on the drawings.
1.2 Unless specify, fans performance rating data shall be tested accordance with
AMCA Standard 210-85 (Air Movement and Control Association),
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 51-1985 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for
Rating”. Sound ratings shall conform to AMCA Standard 300-85. “Reverberant
Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans”.
1.3 A computer printout of fan performance rating corresponding to the AMCA
licensed data, with corrected ratings for altitude and temperature, fan
operating speed, bearing life, etc., shall be submitted for approval.
1.4 All fans shall be dynamically trim-balanced to ISO 1940 and AMCA 204/3-G2.5
quality grade after assembly. A computer printout with the vibration
spectrum analysis shall be attached to the fans.
1.5 Fan motors shall comply in all respects with continuous rating in accordance
with IEC34 or equivalent. Motor bearing shall be of ball or roller type, grease
or lubricant sealed for life. Fan and drive shall earthed to prevent
accumulation of static charge.
1.6 Kitchen exhaust fan shall be of Bifurcated Axial or SISW Centrifugal direct or
belt driven type. DIDW Centrifugal and Direct Drive Axial Flow Fan where
belts or motor are in the air stream are not acceptable.
1.7 Fans shall be installed at staircase or lobby where fresh air intake is free from
any obstruction and shall be energized only by the fire alarm system. Fan
shall be of Axial Flow Fan or DIDW Centrifugal Fan. Protective grille at the
suction of the fan is required.
1.8 Fans for elevated temperature (Smoke Extraction Fans) with components
rated for high temperature (250ºC, 2Hrs) service, with belt drive assemblies
exposed to the air stream are not acceptable.
1.9 For Smoke Extraction Fans where motor is in the air stream with
electrical/electronic temperature limit switch for motor protecting shall not
be used.
1.10 Anti-condensation heater is recommended to be installed for all
Pressurization and Smoke Spill Fans, and the control circuit shall be arranged
42
Technical Specifications
such the way that the heater is off when the starter is on and vise versa.
Heaters shall be wired from the respective local motor control panel or
motor control console.
2.0 PART 2 : PRODUCTS
2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACATURERS
KRUGER
MORRISON
NIAGARA
NATIONAL
FERRARI
WOODS
BUFFALO
2.2
AXIAL FLOW FANS (DIRECT DRIVE)
A.
Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Air and Sound Certified
Ratings Seal. The test standard used shall be ANSI/AMCA 210-85.
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 51-1985 “Laboratory Method of Testing Fans for
Rating” and AMCA 300 “Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of
fans”.
B.
Fans shall be oven-baked with polyester coating for minimum
thickness of 60 microns or hot-dipped galvanized. To achieve the minimum
and equal clearance between the blade tips and casing, tube casing shall
maintain its roundness by means of using one piece of sheet metal with 90º
edge flanging up.
C.
Fan motor base support shall be properly secured (locked and sealed)
to the fan housing and be of adjustable type to have precise control of motor
shaft central position as well as running clearance between blade tips and
casing. Motor (KW/HP) shall be able to be changed or upgraded at site
without changing fan housing or ducting construction.
D.
Fans supplied shall be complete with factory fabricated mounting
bracket (ceiling or foot mounted) and suction/discharge matching flanges as
accessories.
All hubs shall be cast Aluminum alloy (Grade LM2) unless for Smoke Extractor
Fans where high temperature (250ºC/2Hrs) air is expected then Aluminum
alloy or steel fan impeller blades are required. Otherwise impeller blade
material with Polypropylene (PP), Glass reinforced Polypropylene (PPG) and
Glass-reinforced Polyamid (PAG), to provide self-balancing, anti-static, antisparkling characteristics is preferable.
43
Technical Specifications
E.
Running clearance between blade tips and casing shall not exceed 1%
of the impeller diameter and 2% for smoke spill high temperature fan where
mechanical expansion coefficient is different from normal ambient
temperature. Fan manufacturer shall provide the fan assembled with the
same clearance between blade tips and casing of the tested prototype. Note
that the air performance and pressure loss are greatly affected by the
clearance.
F.
Impellers shall be secured to the drive shaft by a key and keyway.
Axial location shall be provided by a collar or shoulder on the drive shaft
together with a retaining washer and screw fitted into a tapped hole at the
end of the shaft and locked in position. Blades shall be secured in place to the
angel setting by setscrews, locking nuts or setting pins.
Fan motor shall be totally enclosed and external terminal box of at least IP55
shall be provided.
Fans speed shall not exceed 1800 RPM.
All fans after assembly shall be dynamically trim balanced to ISO1940 and
AMCA 204/3-G2.5 quality grade. A computer printout with vibration spectrum
analysis shall be attached to the fans.
2.3 CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Fans forward or backward or Airfoil curved, SISW or DIDW, shall be licensed to bear
the AMCA Air and Sound Certified Ratings Seal. The test standard used shall be
ANSI/AMCA 210-85, NASI/ASHRAE Standard 51-1985 “Laboratory Method of Testing
Fans for Rating” and AMCA 300 “Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of
Fans”.
B. All fans shall be dynamically trim-balanced to ISO 1940 and AMCA 204/3-G2.5 quality
grade after assembly. A computer printout with vibration spectrum analysis shall be
attached to the fans.
C. Fans shall be oven-baked with polyester coating for minimum thickness of 60
microns, unless the housing scroll and side frame is constructed from galvanized
steel sheet (G.I.), Stainless Steel, Aluminum and etc.
D. Fan housing shall be of an appropriate thickness to prevent vibration and drumming.
The fan scroll shall be attached to the side plate by means of continuous lock seam
or intermittent spot welding. The wheel and inlet cone shall be aerodynamically
designed and constructed to provide maximum performance and efficiency as
published by the manufacturer.
44
Technical Specifications
E. Fans must be physically capable of operating safely at every point of rating at or
below the “minimum performance” limit fir that class as defined in AMCA standard
99-2408-69 “Performance Class of Operating Limits of Centrifugal Fans”.
F. Shaft size shall be carefully calculated and designed such that maximum operating
speed (RPM) shall not exceed 75% of the first critical speed. For any application that
is not a standard product form catalogue of the fan manufacturer detailed
calculation of critical speed characteristics shall be submitted for approval
G. Shafts shall be made of carbon steel (C45) machined and polished to tolerance of
standard ISO 286-2 – grade g6 Protective coat of anti-rusting shall be applied to all
bare surfaces of the shaft at the factory.
H. Bearing shall be of self-alignment (concentric) type with adaptor sleeve bearing.
Bearing of eccentric locking collar with grub screw type are not acceptable. Bearing
shall be maintenance free with permanently lubricated sealed ball bearing type.
Bearing life shall be at least 75,000 hours based on basic rating life L10 of ISO 281
standard. Calculation sheet of bearing life shall be submitted for approval.
I.
Motor installed shall be of a minimum 130% of the fan power absorbed (Brake
horsepower) and shall have sufficient torque available for starting and continuous
operation.
J.
Belts and pulleys shall be sized for minimum 150% of the installed motor
horsepower. The belt speed shall not exceed 30m/s. The pulley shall be of Taper
Lock SPZ, SPA, SPB or SPC type. Conventional type of pulley is not acceptable. Both
fan and motor pulley shall be balanced to the quality grade G.2.5
K. Fan outlet velocity shall not exceed 10% of the main duct air velocity designed (0.1”
per 100 ft or 1 Pascal per meter duct length) Pressure Loss is as referred to in
SMACNA Standard unless otherwise specified.
L.
A computer printout on fan performance rating corresponding to the AMCA
licenced data with corrected rating for altitude and temperature fan operating speed
bearing life etc. Shall be submitted for approval
Even when the IVC is fully open, the fan performance is different with
(actually lower than) that of the bare fan due to the system effect.
C. Fan shall be backward or Airfoil curved and will not surge for the whole
operation range of the desired volume / system resistance. An inspection
door is required.
45
Technical Specifications
2.4 SMOKE EXTRACT FAN
A. The centrifugal smoke extract fan is required to be in compliance with the
requirements for Class 1A performance, as defined BS EN 12101-3: 2002 this
requires the fan to be subjected to a rated temperature of 250ºC for a rated
duration of 120 minutes.
B. Fan shall be SISW backward curved type with fan wheel overhung by two
bearing with the drive system totally out of the air stream.
C. The testing certificate or test report shall be issued by TUV-SUV PSB or
approval equivalent test laboratory.
BS 7346 is superseded by BS 12101-3:2002. All fans are tested and
witnessed & certified by TUV SUD.
Fans should be certified for class
F250 (2Hrs) and class F250 (2Hrs), F300 (1Hr) & F400 (2Hr).
D. Centrifugal Roof Smoke Extractor Fans shall be backward curved impeller
with vertical air discharge type. Support casing and mounting base shall be
in galvanized steel with protection grille/bird net. Weather cowl and
weathering skirt shall be moulded in flame retardant glass fibre reinforced
resin.
5.6 DIRECT DRIVE TYPE
A. Fans shall be of DIDW Forward Curved centrifugal type with fan scroll
within a Cabinet.
B. Fan speed shall not exceed 1800 RPM.
C. Motor shall be for power supply 220-240 V/60Hz/Single Phase
2.5 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL DUCT FAN
6.1 Fan shall be of SISW forward or backward curved centrifugal direct driven
type.
6.2 Casing shall be of Galvanized steel with Oven-baked epoxy coating. Impeller
material shall be either Galvanized Steel or Glass Reinforced Polypropylene.
6.3 Motor shall be external rotor type for power supply 220-240V/60Hz/Single
Phase.
46
Technical Specifications
2.6 PROPELLER FAN
7.1 Fan shall be of the ring-mounted type and the blades constructed from
heavy gauge metal. An aerodynamically designed bell mouth constructed
from heavy gauge metal shall be provided. The fan speed shall not exceed
1800RPM at 60Hz Operation.
7.2 Propeller fans shall be direct driven type the motor either a single phase
capacitor start-run or a three-phase squirrel cage induction type. The motor
shall have inbuilt inherent protection against overloading. Motor with
shaded pole or centrifugal switch type is not acceptable
7.3 Bearing shall be maintenance free permanently lubricated type. Fans shall
be complete with wire guards. External grilles, fan chambers and volume
control damper shall be provided where indicated in the specification
drawings.
2.12 REVERSIBLE FAN
Double flanged casing is manufactured in galvanized steel sheet with 220
g/m2 coating. Fan is incorporated with a high efficiency axial impeller with
manually adjustable pitch blades angle of pressure-casted aluminium. High
temperature resistance Class “H” motor, compliance to BS7346 Part 2 1990,
Class B. C and D performance. Tested by Warrington Fire Research in UK in
accordance with BS7346 Part 2 ; 1990 and satisfied the performance criteria
for Class B, C and D as defined in BS standard.
Class B - 250 deg C at 2 hours
Class C – 300 deg C at 0.5 hours
Class D – 300 deg C at 1 hours
BS 7346 is superceded by BS 12101-3:2002. Fans shall meet F250 (2Hrs), F300
(1Hr).
47
Technical Specifications
AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS
PART 1 : GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Diffusers.
B. Registers/grilles.
C. Door grilles.
D. Louvers.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 09900 - Painting: Painting of ductwork visible behind outlets and inlets.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ARI 650 - Air Outlets and Inlets.
B. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets
and Inlets.
C. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.
D. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review
outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission.
Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application,
and noise level.
B. Samples: Submit two of each required air outlet and inlet type.
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
48
Technical Specifications
A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ADC
Equipment Test Code 1062 and ASHRAE 70.
B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified
in this section with minimum three (3) years documented experience.
1.8 MOCKUP
A. Provide mockup of typical interior ceiling module with supply and return air
outlets under provisions of Section 01400.
B. Mockup may not remain as part of the Work.
PART 2 : PRODUCTS
2.1 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS
A. Type: Square and rectangular, adjustable pattern ,diffuser to discharge air in four
way pattern with sectorizing baffles where indicated.
B. Frame: Snap-in type.
C. Fabrication: Aluminum with baked enamel off-white finish.
D. Accessories: Combination splitter damper and multi-louvered equalizing grid
with damper adjustable from diffuser face.
2.2 CEILING SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable curved blades to discharge air
along face of grille.
B. Frame: 32 mm margin with concealed mounting and gasket.
C. Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions with factory off-white enamel finish.
D. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key
operator, operable from face.
2.3 CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Type: Streamlined blades, 19 mm minimum depth, 19 mm maximum spacing,
with blades set at 45 degrees, horizontal face.
49
Technical Specifications
B. Frame: 32 mm margin with concealed mounting.
C. Fabrication: steel and aluminum with 20 gage (0.90 mm) minimum frame, with
factory baked enamel finish , color to be selected.
D. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key
operator, operable from face where not individually connected to exhaust fans.
2.4 CEILING LINEAR EXHAUST AND RETURN GRILLES
A. Type: Streamlined blades with 90 degree one-way deflection, 3.2 x 19 mm ,13
mm centers.
B. Frame: 32 mm margin with concealed mounting.
C. Fabrication: steel and aluminum with 20 gage (0.90 mm) minimum frame,
extrusions, with factory baked enamel finish , color to be selected.
D. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key
operator, operable from face.
2.5 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Type: Streamlined blades, 19 mm minimum depth, 19 mm maximum spacing,
with spring or other device to set blades, horizontal face.
B. Frame: 32 mm margin with concealed mounting.
C. Fabrication: Steel and aluminum with 20 gage (0.90 mm) minimum frame, with
factory baked enamel finish , color to be selected.
D. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key
operator, operable from face.
E. Gymnasiums: Provide front pivoted or welded in place blades, securely fastened
to be immobile.
2.6 DOOR GRILLES
A. Type: V-shaped louvers of 20 gage (0.90 mm) thick steel, 25 mm deep on 13 mm
centers.
C. Frame: 20 gage (0.90 mm) steel with auxiliary frame to give finished appearance
on both sides of door, with factory prime coat finish.
2.7 LOUVERS
50
Technical Specifications
A. Type: 100 mm deep with blades on 45 degree slope , heavy channel frame,
birdscreen with 13 mm square mesh for exhaust and 19 mm for intake.
B. Fabrication: 12 gage (2.50 mm) thick extruded aluminum, welded assembly, with
factory baked enamel finish color to be selected.
C. Mounting: Furnish with exterior , flat flange for installation.
PART 3 : EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position
to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.
D. Provide balancing dampers wherever required or on duct take-off to diffusers,
and grilles and registers, despite whether dampers are specified as part of the
diffuser, or grille and register assembly.
E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black.
51
Technical Specifications
FILTERS
PART 1 : GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Activated carbon filters.
B. Automatic renewable media filters.
C. Disposable, extended area panel filters.
D. Disposable panel filters.
E. Electronic air cleaners.
F. Extended surface high efficiency media filters.
G. Extended surface non-supported media filters.
H. Extended surface retained media filters.
I.
Filter frames.
J. Filter gages.
K. Washable permanent panel filters.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Electrical characteristics and wiring
connections.
1.3
REFERENCES
A. ARI 850 - Commercial and Industrial Air Filter Equipment.
B. ASHRAE 52 - Method of Testing Air Cleaning Devices Used in General
Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter.
C. MIL-STD-282 - Filter Units, Protective Clothing, Gas-Mask Components, and
related Products: Performance-Test Methods.
D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
E. UL 586 - Test Performance of High Efficiency Particulate, Air Filter Units.
F. UL 867 - Electrostatic Air Cleaners.
G. UL 900 - Test Performance of Air Filter Units.
1.4
PERFORMANCE TOLERANCES
A. Conform to ARI 850 Section 7.4.
52
Technical Specifications
B. Dust Spot Efficiency: Plus or minus 5 percent.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate filter assembly and filter frames, dimensions, motor
locations, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
B. Product Data: Provide data on filter media, filter performance data, filter
assembly and filter frames, dimensions, motor locations and electrical
characteristics and connection requirements.
C. Samples: Submit two samples of replacement filter media of each type and each
filter frame.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions:
procedures.
1.6
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
1.7
Operation and Maintenance Data: Include instructions for operation,
changing, and periodic cleaning.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.8
Indicate assembly and change-out
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by
Underwriters' Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and
indicated.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Provide one set of disposable panel filters
PART 2 : PRODUCTS
2.1
DISPOSABLE PANEL FILTERS
B.
Media: UL 900 Class 2, fiber blanket, factory sprayed with flameproof,
non-drip, non-volatile adhesive.
1. Nominal Size: 300 x 600 mm ,400 x 625 mm ,610 x 610 mm.
2. Thickness: 50 mm.
C.
Performance Rating:
1. Face Velocity: 500 FPM (2.54 m/sec)
2. Initial Resistance: 0.15 inch WG (37 Pa).
3. Recommended Final Resistance: 0.50 inches WG (125 Pa).
D.
Holding Frames: 20 gage (0.90 mm) minimum galvanized steel frame with
expanded metal grid on outlet side and steel rod grid on inlet side, hinged
with pull and retaining handles.
53
Technical Specifications
B.
Performance Rating:
1.
2.
3.
MIL-STD-282 Test 0.3 Micron Dioctyl Phthalate Smoke (DOP)
Efficiency: 99.97 percent.
Rated Air Flow Capacity at 1.0 inch WG (250 Pa): 1150 CFM (540
L.sec)
Recommended Final Resistance: 3.0 inch WG (750 Pa).
PART 3 : EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Install air cleaning devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
ASHRAE 52.1/62.1.
B. Prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters with felt, rubber, or neoprene
gaskets.
C. Install filter gage static pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters. Mount
filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum, in accessible position.
Adjust and level.
D. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place.
Replace temporary filters used during construction and testing, with clean set.
E. Provide filter gages on filter banks, installed with separate static pressure tips
upstream and downstream of filters.
54
Part 3-0
Electrical
Technical Specifications
SECTION 16011
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 APPLICATION
This section applies to all sections of Division 16, "Electrical," of this project except as
specified otherwise in each individual section.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Obtain approval before procurement, fabrication, or delivery of items to the job site.
Partial submittals will not be acceptable and will be returned without review. Submittals
shall include the manufacturer's name, trade name, place of manufacture, catalog
model or number, nameplate data, size, layout dimensions, capacity, project
specification and paragraph reference and technical society publication references, and
other information necessary to establish contract compliance of each item to be
furnished.
1.2.1
Shop Drawings
In addition to the requirements of the Contract Clauses, shop drawings shall
meet the following requirements. Drawings shall be a minimum of 216 mm by
280 mm in size, except as specified otherwise. Drawings shall include wiring
diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location,
layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and
other items that must be shown to assure a coordinated installation. Wiring
diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for
each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of
equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation,
maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices. If equipment
is disapproved, revise drawings to show acceptable equipment and resubmit.
1.2.2
Manufacture’s Data
Submittals for each manufactured item shall be current manufacturer's
descriptive literature of cataloged products, equipment drawings, diagrams,
performance and characteristic curves, and catalog cuts.
1.2.3
Certificates of Compliance
Submit manufacturer's certifications as required on products, materials, finish,
and equipment indicated in the technical sections. Certifications shall be
documents prepared specifically for this contract. Preprinted certifications
and copies of previously submitted documents will not be acceptable. The
manufacturer's certifications shall name the appropriate products, equipment,
or materials and the publication specified as controlling the quality of that
item. Certification shall not contain statements to imply that the item does not
meet requirements specified, such as "as good as"; "achieve the same end
use and results as materials formulated in accordance with the referenced
publications"; or "equal or exceed the service and performance of the
specified material”. Certifications shall simply state that the item conforms to
the requirements specified.
Certificates shall be printed on the
manufacturer's letterhead and shall be signed by the manufacturer's official
authorized to sign certificates of compliance.
Page 1 of 2
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Technical Specifications
1.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Handle, store, and protect equipment and materials in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and with the requirements of NFPA 70B, Appendix I,
titled "Equipment Storage and Maintenance During Construction." Replace damaged
or defective items with new items:
1.4 CATALOG PRODUCTS/SERVICE AVAILABILITY
Materials and equipment shall be current products by manufacturers regularly engaged
in the production of such products. Products shall have been in satisfactory
commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period shall
include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of
similar size. The 2-year period shall be satisfactorily completed by a product for sale on
the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures.
Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified
record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the
manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is furnished. The equipment items shall be
supported by service organizations, which are reasonably convenient to the equipment
installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and
emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.
1.5 MANUFACTURER’S RECOMMENDATIONS
Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to be in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations, furnish printed copies of the recommendations prior
to installation. Installation of the item shall not proceed until recommendations are
received. Failure to furnish recommendations shall be cause for rejection of the
equipment or material.
1.6 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Electrical characteristics for this project shall be 34.5kV primary, three phase, four wire,
60 hertz; 400 volts Grounded Y secondary, three phase, 4wire + G, 60 hertz, and 240
volts secondary, single phase, 2 wire + G, 60 Hz.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
Products conforming to other internationally known publications and standards are
acceptable however, proofs or certificates shall be submitted indicating they equal or
surpass standards as referenced herein. Local products are acceptable subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
PAINTING OF EQUIPMENT
3.1.1
FACTORY APPLIED
Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall,
as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA ICS 6 corrosion resistance
test, except equipment specified to meet requirements of ANSI C37.20 shall
have a finish as specified in ANSI C37.20.
** END OF SECTION **
Page 2 of 2
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Technical Specifications
SECTION 16050
ELECTRICAL – GENERAL PROVISION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The WORK to be done under this classification is included in the following Sections:
Section 16130
Raceways and Fittings
Section 16123
Wires and Cables
Section 16442
Panel boards
Section 34005
Miscellaneous Equipment
Section 16510
Interior Lighting System
Section 16450
Grounding System
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor shall furnish and install all materials and equipment necessary for a
complete electrical system as hereinafter specified and shown on the Drawings.
1.3 INTENT
It is the intent of these Specifications that the electrical system shall be suitable in
every way for the service required, and the Contractor shall supply all materials and do
all the work which may be reasonably implied as being required, at no extra cost.
1.4 INSPECTION AND FEES
All materials and installation shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the
Philippine Electrical Code (PEC).
The Contractor shall pay all fees required for permits and inspections.
1.5 TESTS
The Contractor shall test all systems and repair or replace all defective works. The
Contractor shall make all the necessary adjustments to the systems and shall instruct
the Owner’s personnel in the proper operation of the system.
1.6 EXCAVATIONS AND BACKFILLINGS
The Contractor shall do all necessary excavation and backfilling as part of the electrical
work required. Backfill materials shall be thoroughly tamped in place and excavated
surfaces restored, equal to their original condition.
1.7 SLEEVES AND FORMS FOR OPENINGS
The Contractor shall provide and place all sleeves for conduits penetrating floors,
walls, partitions, etc. The Contractor shall locate all necessary slots for his work, and
these shall be formed before concrete is poured.
1.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING
All cutting and patching shall be done in a thoroughly workmanlike manner.
1.9 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS
A. The Drawings are diagrammatic only and are not intended to show exact locations
of outlets and conduit runs.
Page 1 of 3
ELECTRICAL- GENERAL PROVISION
Technical Specifications
B. All three-phase circuits shall be run in separate conduits unless otherwise shown
on the Drawings.
C. Any work installed contrary to the Drawings and Specifications, or without approval
by the Engineer, shall be subject to change as directed by the Engineer, and no
extra compensation will be allowed the Contractor for making these changes.
D. The locations of equipment, fixtures, outlets, and similar devices shown on the
Drawings are approximate only. Exact locations shall be as approved by the
Engineer during construction. The Contractor shall obtain in the field all information
relevant to the placing of electrical work and, in case of any interference with other
work, shall proceed as directed by the Engineer and shall furnish all labor and
materials necessary to complete the work in an approved manner.
E. Surface mounted panel boxes, junction boxes, conduit, etc., shall be supported by
spacers to provide a clearance between wall and equipment.
F. Circuit diagrams shown are diagrammatic and functional only and are not intended
to show exact circuit layouts, number of fittings, or other installation details. The
Contractor shall furnish all labor and materials necessary to install and place in
satisfactory operation all power lighting, and other electrical systems shown. The
Contractor shall install additional circuits wherever needed to conform to the
specific requirements of the equipment.
G. The ratings of motors and other electrically operated devices, together with the size
shown for their branch circuit conductors and conduits, are approximate only and
are indicative of the probable power requirements insofar as they can be
determined in advance of the purchase of equipment. The ratings shown for motor
branch circuit protective devices are the maximum ratings permitted. Lower ratings
may be used where approved as being proper for the dynamic characteristics of
the motor and its connected load.
H. Unless otherwise specified, all conduits, wires, cables and the support systems for
the conduits and cables that are required to make the electrical connections to
equipment shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. All connections to
equipment shall be as shown, specified and directed and in accordance with the
approved shop and setting drawings.
1.10 SIZE OF EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall investigate each space in the building through which equipment
must pass to reach its final location. If necessary, the manufacturer shall be required to
ship his material in sections sized to permit passing through such restricted areas in
the building.
1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Shop drawings shall be submitted for the following equipment:

Lighting fixtures

Panel Boards

Emergency power unit

Miscellaneous equipment
B. The manufacturer’s name and product designation or catalog numbers shall be
submitted for the following materials:

Conduit

Wiring devices
Page 2 of 3
ELECTRICAL- GENERAL PROVISION
Technical Specifications

Boxes and fittings

Wires and cables

Lamps/lighting fixtures

Miscellaneous equipment & devices
If requested by the Engineer, samples shall also be submitted.
C. All shop drawings shall be checked by the Contractor for accuracy and contract
requirements before submittal to the Engineer. Shop drawings shall bear the
signature of the Contractor and date checked and shall be accomplished by the
statement that the shop drawings have been examined for conformity to
Specifications and Drawings. Shop drawings not so checked and noted by the
Contractor may be returned to him.
D. The Engineer check shall be only for conformance with the design concept of the
project and compliance with the Specifications and Contract Drawings. The
Engineer review shall in no way relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of, or
the necessity of, furnishing materials and workmanship required by the Contract
Drawings and specifications which may not be indicated on the shop drawings.
E. The Contractor shall be responsible for all dimensions to be confirmed and
correlated to the job site and for coordination of his work with the work of all other
trades.
F. No material shall be ordered or shop work started until the Engineer’s review of
shop drawings has been completed.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A. Electrical equipment shall be adequately protected against mechanical injury or
damage by water or humidity. Equipment or materials do damaged shall be
repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer, or entirely replaced by the Contractor at
his own expense. Such injured materials and equipment, and are suspected of
damage by water or humidity, shall be subjected by vigorous testing before being
accepted for the work.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for offering all materials and products as
specified sufficiently in advance, taking into account manufacturer’s delivery time,
temporary shortages and other similar considerations. Any departure from the
materials and products specified will be authorized only if it is shown that the nonavailability of such items was not due to a lack of timely and diligent effort on the
part of the Contractor to procure such items.
C. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each panelboard, equipment, enclosure,
relay, switch, and device. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function
and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 3.17
mm thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners
shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the black core.
Minimum size of nameplates shall be 25.4 mm by 63.5 mm. Lettering shall be on
minimum of 6.35 mm high normal block style.
Page 3 of 3
ELECTRICAL- GENERAL PROVISION
Technical Specifications
PART 3 – EXECUTION
A. Nameplate Mounting: Provide number, location, and letter designation of
nameplates as indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two
sheet-metal screws or two-rivets.
C. Painting of Equipment: Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting
systems which shall, as a minimum, meet NEMA requirements.
** END OF SECTION **
Page 4 of 3
ELECTRICAL- GENERAL PROVISION
Technical Specifications
SECTION 16073
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical
Systems" for products and installation requirements necessary for
compliance with seismic criteria.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
D. NECA: National Electrical Contractor’s Association (Standard Practices for Good
Workmanship in Electrical Contracting)
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design:
Design supports for multiple raceways, including
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using
performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of
supported systems and its contents.
C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of
supported equipment and connected systems and components.
D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum
loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety
factor of five times the applied force.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Steel slotted support systems.
2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems
B.
Page 1 of 4
Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the
following:
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Technical Specifications
1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems.
components.
Include Product Data for
4. Equipment supports.
C.
1.6
1.7
Welding certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 3.
B.
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
penetrations.
These items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof
Accessories."
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A.
B.
Steel Slotted Support Systems:
components for field assembly.
Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated
1.
Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied
according to MFMA-4.
2.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or
polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4.
3.
Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed,
glass-fiber-resin channels and angles with 9/16-inch- (14-mm-) diameter
holes at a maximum of 8 inches (200 mm) o.c., in at least 1 surface.
1.
Fittings and Accessories:
Products of channel
manufacturer and designed for use with those items.
2.
Fitting and Accessory Materials:
Same as
angles, except metal items may be stainless steel.
3.
Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.
and
angle
channels
and
C.
Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
D.
Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers,
clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or
cable to be supported.
E.
Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly
consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-
Page 2 of 4
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Technical Specifications
armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have
number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit
individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
2.2
F.
Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M,
steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
G.
Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening
electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners:
Threaded-steel stud, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension,
shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials where used.
2.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors:
Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated
stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with
tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads
and building materials in which used.
3.
Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units
similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
4.
Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements:
type suitable for attached structural element.
5.
Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply
with ASTM A 325.
6.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
7.
Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
MSS SP-58,
FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A.
Description:
Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field
fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.
B.
Materials:
Comply with requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal
Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports
for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section
are stricter.
B.
Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway:
Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum
rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.
C.
Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with
steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least
25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.
1.
D.
Page 3 of 4
Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit
clamps, single-bolt conduit clamps, single-bolt conduit clamps using
spring friction action for retention in support channel.
Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may
be used for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Technical Specifications
and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening
raceways to trapeze supports.
3.2
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as
specified in this Article.
B.
Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1,
EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure
members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C.
Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of
components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static
loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for
strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb
(90 kg).
D.
Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components:
Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural
elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:
E.
3.3
1.
To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2.
To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3.
To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and
expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.
4.
To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5.
Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs
provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standardweight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for
anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4
inches (100 mm) thick.
6.
To Steel: Spring-tension clamps.
7.
To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
8.
Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces:
Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures,
pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slottedchannel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismicrestraint strength and anchorage requirements.
Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that
avoid reinforcing bars.
INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A.
Comply with installation requirements in Division 5
Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.
B.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location,
alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and
equipment.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
Page 4 of 4
Section
"Metal
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Technical Specifications
3.4
3.5
CONCRETE BASES
A.
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches
(100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be
a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.
B.
Anchor equipment to concrete base.
1.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment
manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and
directions furnished with items to be embedded.
2.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to
supported equipment.
3.
Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written
instructions.
PAINTING
A.
Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed
areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials
as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for
touching up field-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of
2.0 mils (0.05 mm).
B.
Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections Section
"High-Performance Coatings" for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds,
bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.
C.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
** END OF SECTION **
Page 5 of 4
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Technical Specifications
SECTION 16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Identification for raceways.
2.
Identification of power and control cables.
3.
Identification for conductors.
4.
Underground-line warning tape.
5.
Warning labels and signs.
6.
Instruction signs.
7.
Equipment identification labels.
8.
Miscellaneous identification products.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
B.
Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style,
mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.
C.
Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and
system components used in identification signs and labels.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
D.
Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
E.
Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives,
and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
1.5
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with
requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop
Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance
Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use
consistent designations throughout project.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and
painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
C.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and
doors.
Page 1 of 8
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
Technical Specifications
D.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar
concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum
length of color field for each raceway size.
B.
Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:
C.
1.
Black letters on an orange field
2.
Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:
1.
Black letters on an orange field.
2.
Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch(75-mm-) high letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers.
D.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:
Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant
coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
E.
Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit,
pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to
suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
F.
Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or
Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm)
long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to
stay in place by gripping action.
G.
Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits More Than 600 V: 4-inch- (100mm-) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers diagonally over orange
background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm)
wide. Stop stripes at legends.
H.
Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with
stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.
I.
Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick,
with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.
2.2
1.
Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by
tag manufacturer.
2.
Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum
length of color field for each raceway and cable size.
B.
Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less:
C.
1.
Black letters on an orange field
2.
Legend: Indicate voltage
Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:
Page 2 of 8
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
Technical Specifications
1.
Black letters on an orange field.
2.
Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch(75-mm-) high letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers.
D.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear,
weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape
for securing ends of legend label.
E.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches
(50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use.
2.3
POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum
length of color field for each raceway and cable size.
B.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear,
weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape
for securing ends of legend label.
C.
Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with
stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.
D.
Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick,
with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.
1.
Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by
tag manufacturer.
2.
Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
E.
Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretension, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic
sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to
stay in place by gripping action.
F.
Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic
sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or
cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
2.4
CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3
mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.
B.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear,
weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape
for securing ends of legend label.
C.
Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic
sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to
stay in place by gripping action.
D.
Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic
sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or
cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
E.
Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit
identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
F.
Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick,
with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.
Page 3 of 8
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
Technical Specifications
2.5
A.
2.6
A.
B.
2.7
1.
Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by
tag manufacturer.
2.
Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
FLOOR MARKING TAPE
2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, 5-mil (0.125-mm) pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black
and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay.
UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE
Tape:
1.
Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to
identify and locate underground electrical [and communications ]utility lines.
2.
Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial
operations.
3.
Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading
when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly
found in soils.
Color and Printing:
1.
Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.
2.
Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE.
3.
Orange-Colored Tapes:
TELEPHONE CABLE,
COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.
CATV
CABLE,
WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A.
Comply with PEC and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B.
Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive
adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to
equipment unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:
D.
E.
1.
Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors,
legend, and size required for application.
2.
1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.
3.
Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).
Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:
1.
Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs
with 0.0396-inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend,
and size required for application.
2.
1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.
3.
Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm).
Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1.
Page 4 of 8
Multiple Power Source Warning:
"DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK
HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
Technical Specifications
2.
2.8
A.
Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA
IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36
INCHES (915 MM)."
INSTRUCTION SIGNS
Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick
for signs up to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger
sizes.
1.
Engraved legend with black letters on white face
2.
Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
3.
Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at
applicable equipment.
B.
Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent
process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
C.
Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by
thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10
mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
2.9
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A.
Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent
process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
B.
Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by
thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10
mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
C.
Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed,
with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8
inch (10 mm).
D.
Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw
mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be
3/8 inch (10 mm).
E.
Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter
height shall be 1 inch (25 mm)
2.10
A.
B.
CABLE TIES
General-Purpose Cable Ties:
locking, Type 6/6 nylon.
Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self
1.
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).
2.
Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000
psi (82.7 MPa).
3.
Temperature Range:
deg C).
4.
Color: Black except where used for color-coding.
Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85
UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to
exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.
1.
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).
2.
Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 12,000
psi (82.7 MPa).
Page 5 of 8
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
Technical Specifications
C.
2.11
3.
Temperature Range:
deg C).
4.
Color: Black.
Plenum-Rated Cable Ties:
locking.
Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85
Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self
1.
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).
2.
Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi
(48.2 MPa).
3.
UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.
4.
Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 140
deg C).
5.
Color: Black.
MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A.
Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for paint materials
and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material
and location (exterior or interior).
B.
Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainlesssteel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B.
Location:
Install identification materials and devices at locations for most
convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of
equipment.
C.
Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish
work.
D.
Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using
materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
E.
Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical
fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.
F.
System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each colorcoding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of
two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction,
at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight
runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.
G.
Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of
conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
H.
Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:
I.
1.
Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.
2.
In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.
Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous
underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm)
Page 6 of 8
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
Technical Specifications
below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a
common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.
J.
3.2
A.
Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for
surface preparation and paint application.
IDENTIFICATION MODULE
Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and
stencil 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide black stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers over
orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches
(300 mm) wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE
WIRING" with 3-inch- (75-mm-) high black letters on 20-inch (500-mm) centers.
Stop stripes at legends. Apply to the following finished surfaces:
1.
Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches
(300 mm) of a floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above
unexcavated space.
2.
Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall.
3.
Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts,
exposed in the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.
B.
Accessible Raceways, Armored and Metal-Clad Cables, More Than 600 V: Selfadhesive vinyl labels. Install labels at [10-foot (3-m)] [30-foot (10-m)] maximum
intervals.
C.
Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder,
and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 220 V to ground: Identify with selfadhesive vinyl label. Install labels at [10-foot (3-m)] [30-foot (10-m)] maximum
intervals.
D.
Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each
junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with
the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:
E.
1.
Emergency Power.
2.
Power.
3.
UPS.
Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull
and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to
identify the phase.
1.
Color-Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below
for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.
a.
Color shall be factory applied
b.
Colors for 220V, 1Ø Circuits:
c.
Page 7 of 8
1)
Phase:
Red
2)
Neutral:
White
3)
Ground: Green
Colors for 400/230V, 3Ø Circuits:
1)
Phase A:
Red
2)
Phase B:
Yellow
3)
Phase C:
Blue
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
Technical Specifications
d.
4)
Neutral:
White
5)
Ground: Green
Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns
for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and
in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape
with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid
obscuring factory cable markings.
F.
Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults,
pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use write-on tags.
G.
Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded
conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.
H.
Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and
list source.
I.
Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm,
control, and signal connections.
J.
1.
Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions,
terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
2.
Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with
system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
3.
Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring
diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for
power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.
1.
Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.
2.
Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables
in raceway.
K.
Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the
direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and
29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted
panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.
L.
Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting:
Metal-backed, butyrate warning signs.
M.
1.
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
2.
Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
3.
Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
4.
For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover
of equipment including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
Power transfer switches.
b.
Controls with external control power connections.
Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation
and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install
instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or
equipment operation.
Page 8 of 8
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
Technical Specifications
N.
Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend
on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency
instructions at equipment used for power transfer load shedding.
O.
Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique
designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the
Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and
protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations,
terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting,
control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is
provided with its own identification.
1.
2.
Labeling Instructions:
a.
Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label Adhesive film label with clear
protective overlay. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch(13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two
lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.
b.
Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label]
[Stenciled legend 4 inches (100 mm) high.
c.
Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those
appropriate for viewing from the floor.
d.
Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels
with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or
NRTL rating of the enclosure.
Equipment to Be Labeled:
a.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided
by panelboard manufacturer.
Panelboard identification shall be
laminated acrylic or melamine label.
Enclosures and electrical cabinets.
Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
Switchgear.
Switchboards.
Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings
for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by
the secondary.
Substations.
Emergency system boxes and enclosures.
Motor-control centers.
Enclosed switches.
Enclosed circuit breakers.
Enclosed controllers.
Variable-speed controllers.
Push-button stations.
Power transfer equipment.
Contactors.
Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.
Battery-inverter units.
Battery racks.
Power-generating units.
Monitoring and control equipment.
v.
UPS equipment
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Page 9 of 8
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
Technical Specifications
** END OF SECTION **
Page 10 of 8
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
Technical Specifications
SECTION 16080
STARTUP, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL
EQUIPMENT
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
1.2
1.3
This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other
specifications and related Contract Documents to establish the total
requirements for startup testing and commissioning of electrical equipment:
1.
Section 16051
-
Common Work Results For Electrical
2.
Section 16055
-
Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination
3.
Section16060
-
Grounding and Bonding
In the event of conflict regarding startup testing and commissioning of
electrical equipment requirements between this Section and any other
section, the provisions of this Section shall govern.
SUMMARY
A.
The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall engage the services of an approved
testing organization to provide startup testing and commissioning of the
electrical equipment and/or systems listed in Section 16000, Electrical
General Provisions.
B.
Section 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Method. GENERAL
CONTRACTOR refers to electrical contractor engaged for the purposes of
installing and assembling electrical equipment
C.
It is the intent of these test to assure that all electrical equipment, both
GENERAL CONTRACTOR and EMPLOYER-Furnished, is operational within
industry and the manufacturer’s tolerances and is installed in accordance with
design specifications and the manufacturer’s recommendations.
D.
Where applicable, the tests and inspections shall determine the suitability for
energization.
TESTING CRITERIA
A.
General:
1. The testing company shall provide the supervision, material, equipment,
labor and technical personnel to perform all tests and inspections
according to NETA. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall, at his
expense, furnish any personnel necessary to assist in the testing and
inspection.
2. When the tests and inspections have been completed, a label shall be
attached to all devices tested. The label shall provide the name of the
testing company, the date the tests were completed, and the initials of the
person who performed the tests.
B.
Responsibilities:
1. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall clean the equipment, torque down
all accessible bolts according to the equipment manufacturer’s
instructions, perform routine insulation resistance tests on all branch and
Page 1 of 15
START UP, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Technical Specifications
feeder circuits, continuity checks on all branch and control wiring, and
rotation tests for all distribution and utilization equipment.
2. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall furnish a complete set of current
plans and specifications to the testing company prior to commencement of
any testing. At each test site, the GENERAL CONTRATOR shall provide
any test control power necessary to perform the tests specified. The test
organization shall be consulted as to the specific power requirements.
The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall notify the testing organization when
the equipment and systems are ready for their inspection and testing.
After review by the testing engineer, the GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall
correct any deficiencies noted by the testing company.
3. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for having the
manufacturer of each equipment and/or system provide factory-trained
representative(s) that will perform all required functional testing, checkout,
and repairs in order to pronounce the equipment and/or systems meet the
requirements of these specifications and Drawings and it is ready for
startup testing and commissioning by the testing organization as specified
hereafter.
4. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall furnish settings of protective
devices.
5. The testing organization shall notify the EMPLOYER’S RERESENTATIVE
prior to the commencement of any testing. The testing organization shall
set and adjust the protective devices and associated auxiliary timing
devices in accordance with the values furnished by the MEEPF
CONSULTANT.
6. The testing organization shall maintain a written record of all tests and,
upon completion of the tests, include them in a final report. The report
shall detail any deficiencies in the system material, workmanship or
design. The testing company shall, upon identification, report deficiencies
to the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE in written form.
The
EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE will report these deficiencies to the
Contractor or manufacturer to schedule remedies.
7. When directed, the testing organization shall enter “address” codes for
power monitoring devices or similar instrumentation where shown. Test
monitoring instrumentation for accuracy in combination with associated
PTs and CTs.
C.
Safety:
1. Safety practices shall comply with applicable state and local safety orders,
as well as with the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA)
and IEEE Standard 510. Compliance with the National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA) Standard NFPA 70E, and the Accident Prevention
Manual for Industrial Operations of the National Safety Council shall be
observed.
2. Tests shall only be performed on apparatus that is deenergized. The
testing company’s lead test engineer for the project shall be a designated
safety representative and shall supervise testing observations and safety
requirements. Work shall not proceed until he has determined that it is
safe to do so.
3. Power circuits shall have conductors shorted to ground by a hotlinegrounding device approved for the purpose. Warning signs and protective
Page 2 of 15
START UP, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Technical Specifications
barriers shall be provided as necessary to conduct the tests safely.
D.
Reports:
1. General: Provide full documentation of all tests in the form of a report.
2. The test report shall include the following sections:
a. Scope of testing.
b. Equipment tested.
c. Description of test.
d. Test results.
e. Conclusions and recommendations.
f. Appendix, including test forms.
3. Each piece of equipment shall be recorded on a data sheet listing the
condition of the equipment as found and as left. Included shall be
recommendations for any necessary repair and/or replacement parts.
The data sheets shall indicate the name of the engineer who tested the
equipment and the date of the test completion. The EMPLOYER’S
REPRESENTATIVE shall be notified within 24 hours of any defects found
during testing.
4. Record copies of the completed test report shall be submitted to the
EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE no more than 30 days after
completion of the testing and inspection.
5. Test reports for circuit breakers shall be provided at equipment startup.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE, REFERENCES AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
The testing and inspection shall comply with all applicable sections of the
applicable codes and standards listed in Division 1 of the project
specifications.
B.
The inspection and testing shall comply with the project plans and
specifications, as well as with the manufacturer’s drawings, instruction
manuals, and other applicable data that may be provided by the Owner, for
the apparatus tested.
C.
Conform to the following Standards:
1. ANSI/IEEE Standard 43-2000 – IEEE Recommended Practice for Testing
Insulation Resistance of Rotating Machinery.
2. ANSI/IEEE 112-1996 – Test Procedures for Polyphase Induction Motors
and Generators.
3. ANSI/IEEE Standard 400-1991 – IEEE Guide for Making High-DirectVoltage Tests On Power Cable Systems in the Field.
4. ANSI/IEEE C62.45-2002 – IEEE Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment
Connected to Low Voltage AC Power Circuits.
5. ASTM D 877-2004 – Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown
Voltage of Insulating Liquids Using Disk Electrodes.
6. ICEA S-93-639 / NEMA WC74-2000 – Shielded Power Cable 5-46 kV.
7. IEEE Standard 81-1983 – IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity,
Page 3 of 15
START UP, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Technical Specifications
Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potential of a Ground System.
8. IEEE Standard 510-1983 (R1992) – Recommended Practices For Safety
In High-Voltage And High-Power Testing.
9. IEEE Standard 576-2000 – Recommended Practice for Installation,
Termination and Testing of Insulated Power Cables as Used in Industrial
and Commercial Applications.
10. IEEE Standard C57.12.90-1999 – Standard Test Code for LiquidImmersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers.
11. IEEE Standard C57.12.91-2001 – Standard Test Code for Dry-Type
Distribution and Power Transformers.
12. NECA – National Electrical Contractors Association.
13. NETA – International Electrical Testing Association.
14. NETA ATS-2003 – Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electric Power
Distribution Equipment and Systems. A copy of this is in Section
16080_app.
15. NFPA 70E-2004 – Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for
Employee Workplaces.
16. NICET – National Institute of Certification in Engineering Technologies.
1.5
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
The testing organization shall be an independent, third party testing
organization, which will function as an unbiased testing authority,
professionally independent of the manufacturers, suppliers and installers of
equipment or systems evaluated by the testing organization.
B.
Manufacturer’s representative or equally qualified individual shall be present
during all testing to ensure the testing is performed properly and that any
deficiencies discovered are promptly corrected.
C.
The testing organization shall be a full-service company and shall be regularly
engaged in the testing of electrical equipment, devices, installations, and
systems. The testing organization shall utilize factory-trained test engineers
who are regularly employed for testing services and who are capable of
troubleshooting, as well as identifying power equipment problems.
D.
All work outlined shall be performed under the full-time, onsite supervision of
a graduate engineer with a minimum of 5 years of field-testing experience.
Supervisor shall hold a current registered certification in electrical testing
applicable to each type of apparatus to be inspected or tested. Certification in
electrical testing shall be issued by an independent, nationally recognized,
technician certification agency. Acceptable agencies and certifications:
1. NETA: Certified Technician/Level III or Certified Senior Technician/Level
IV.
2. NICET:
Engineering Technician/Level III or Senior Engineering
Technician/Level IV.
E.
1.6
Upon request, the testing company shall submit proof of its qualifications.
CALIBRATION
A.
Page 4 of 15
Any system material or workmanship, which is found defective on the basis of
acceptance tests, shall be reported directly to the EMPLOYER’S
REPRESENTATIVE.
START UP, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Technical Specifications
B.
1.7
1.8
GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall replace the defective material or equipment
and have test repeated until test proves satisfactory without additional cost to
the EMPLOYER.
FAILURE TO MEET TEST
A.
Any system material or workmanship, which is found defective on the basis of
acceptance tests, shall be reported directly to the EMPLOYER’S
REPRESENTATIVE.
B.
Contractor shall replace the defective material or equipment and have test
repeated until test proves satisfactory without additional cost to the
EMPLOYER.
NOTIFICATION OF TESTING
A.
Notify the GENERAL CONTRACTOR, MEEPF CONSULTANT and the
EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE ten (10) working days before any
scheduled testing begins.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not used)
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
EQUIPMENT TO BE TESTED
A.
Section 16140, Wiring Devices:
1. Receptacles or Outlets
a. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCI)
i.
All GFCI outlets and protected outlets will be tested individually to
ensure they all meet protection requirements. A full GFCI test
involves the Test/Reset Button Test, Wiring Test and GFCI Circuit
Challenge.
(a) Test/Reset Button Test:
(1) Ensure the energized circuit can be appropriately deenergized.
(2) It is preferable to have a light, a fan, or a circuit tester
connect to the outlet to ensure the energization status of
the circuit.
(3) Press the Test Button.
(4) The Reset Button should pop out. If it does not, proceed
to step (8).
(5) If the Reset Button pops out, check to ensure the
electrical equipment has become de-energized. If the
electrical equipment has not de-energized, proceed to
step (8).
(6) If the electrical equipment has de-energized, press the
Reset Button. The Reset Button should stay reset and
the electrical equipment should re-energize. If the Reset
Button does not reset or the electrical equipment does
not re-energize, proceed to step (8).
Page 5 of 15
START UP, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Technical Specifications
(7) Repeat steps (3) through (6) with the light, fan, or circuit
tester plugged into the other receptacles.
(8) If the outlet fails any part of the Reset Button test, either
the outlet is miswired or needs to be replaced. If the
repair cannot be accomplished immediately and the
outlet must remain in service, place a caution label over
the outlet to prevent usage until the repairs or
replacement are completed. Once repaired or replaced
the outlet must be fully tested before use is allowed.
(9) When testing slaved outlets, repeat steps (3) through (8)
with a device plugged into the slaved outlet. Use the
Test and Reset Buttons on the GFCI that provides
protection for the outlet to perform the Test/Reset Button
Test.
(b) Wiring Test:
(1) Acquire an accepted wiring test similar to the Greenlee
GFCI Circuit Tester with a wiring tester, catalog number
5708, NAED/DCI# 78-3310/34523.
(2) If using a combination GFCI/Wiring Tester, set the
nominal leakage current knob to zero mA.
(3) Plug the tester into a receptacle on the outlet to be
tested.
(4) Check the tester display to ensure proper wiring.
(5) If the wiring is improper and cannot be immediately
repaired, proceed no further, cover the outlet with a
caution label until the outlet has been properly wired and
then repeat the tests prior to allowing the outlet to be
used.
(c) GFCI Circuit Challenge:
(1)
Test the current that causes the GFCI to trip.
(i)
Turn the current selector knob to the next higher
current setting;
(ii) Wait for the test light to flash;
(iii) If the GFCI trips out;

Reset the knob to zero current;

Press the Reset Button on the GFCI the outlet
the GFCI is wired to or the GFCI circuit;

Check for test lights to indicate the circuit is reenergized;

Remove the tester from the outlet.
(iv) If the circuit does not trip out, repeat steps (i)
through (iv).
(v) If the GFCI fails to trip within 4 to 7 mA and the
GFCI cannot be currently replaced, proceed no
further, place a caution label over the outlet,
Page 6 of 15
START UP, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Technical Specifications
indicate faulty GFCI and once the outlet has been
replaced repeat the tests prior to allowing the outlet
to be used.
(2)
After the GFCI has tripped, repeat the tests in (a), (b)
and (c) for the other receptacle (on a 2-receptacle GFCI
outlet) and all GFCI protected outlets.
(d) Placing a Test Sticker:
(1)
If the outlet passes all of the above tests, place a GFCI
test sticker on the outlet cover with the following
information:
(i)
The test date;
(ii) The tester’s initials and company;
(iii) The current level where the interruption occurred;
(iv) The wiring status;
(v) And the number of the outlet (to distinguish the
GFCI protected outlets from each other for
documentation purposes).
B.
Section 16060, Grounding and Bonding:
1.
Test, in the EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE’S presence, the ground
resistance of the grounding system. Test by means of the [fall-ofpotential][two terminal or direct] method per IEEE Standard 81.
a. Testing Instrument: Battery-powered or hand-cranked AC tester.
i.
Indicates ground resistance in ohms from digital decade switches
when the unit’s self-contained meter indicates a null condition.
ii. Range: 0.01 ohm to 9,990 ohms in four overlapping ranges.
iii. Null condition occurs when no current flows through the potential
electrodes.
iv. Instrument Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 percent or greater.
v. Manufacturer:
Biddle Instruments Model 250241 (battery
powered) or 250220-2 (hand-cranked) Megger Null Balance Earth
Tester.
b. Fall-of-Potential Test (Intersecting Slope Method):
i.
Connect instrument as shown on the Drawings.
ii. Place Rod P2 at various locations in line between the tested
electrode and Probe C2 and plot the results on a graph (distance
versus resistance). Take sufficient readings to yield a portion of
the plotted curve as being constant (rate-of-resistance change
becomes so small with respect to distance as to be insignificant).
c. Two-Terminal Test (Direct Method):
i.
Connect jumper between terminals C1 and P1 and between C2
and P2.
ii. Connect terminal P1 and C1 to the electrode under test. Connect
P2 and C2 to an all metallic water pipe system extensive enough
to have a negligible resistance and metallic throughout, without
Page 7 of 15
START UP, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Technical Specifications
insulating couplings or flanges.
d. Conduct two separate tests on opposite sides of the grounding grid.
e. Report failure to obtain specified ground resistance to the
EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE.
f.
C.
Test report shall be in writing, and shall show temperature, humidity,
and condition of the soil at the time of the tests.
Section 16124, Medium-Voltage Cables:
1. Inspect exposed cable sections for physical damage.
2.
Verify cable is connected according to the Drawings and shield
grounding, cable support, and terminations are properly installed.
3.
DC High-Potential Test:
a. Perform high-potential tests on 5, 15, 25, and 35 kV cable after
installation in accordance with ICEA S-93-639 / NEMA WC74,
ANSI/IEEE Standard 400 and IEEE Standard 576.
b. Perform tests in the presence of the EMPLOYER’S
REPRESENTATIVE. Test each length of each phase of cable in the
system after installation, with splices and terminations in place but
disconnected from equipment.
c. Use the data sheets at the end of this Section to record the results of
DC high-potential test, or if approved by the EMPLOYER’S
REPPRESENTATIVE, use the data sheets provided by the testing
company.
d. The voltage may be increased continuously or in steps to the
maximum test value. If increased continuously, apply the test voltage
at a uniform rate, increasing to maximum voltage in not less than
10 seconds or more than 60 seconds. If applied in steps, increase
the test voltage from one step to the next in approximately five to
eight equal steps. Make the duration of each step long enough for
the absorption current to attain reasonable stabilization (1 minute).
D.
4.
Record current and voltage readings at the end of each step on 5, 15, 25
or 35 kV cable high-potential test data sheets included in this Section;
prepare a written copy of the test data for submission to the
EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE and include in the operations and
maintenance manual. Test company forms may be substituted for the
data sheets in this Section, if they include, at a minimum, the same
information.
5.
Immediately following these tests, ground the conductor to drain any
charge to earth. GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall replace cables and
terminations not passing the test.
Section 16231, Packaged Engine Generators:
1. Test the system per the manufacturer’s recommendation and the
requirements in Section 16231 along with the following:
1. Visual and mechanical inspection:
a. Inspect for physical damage.
b. Compare nameplate information and connection with Drawings and
Specifications.
Page 8 of 15
START UP, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Technical Specifications
c. Inspect for proper anchorage and grounding.
2. Electrical and mechanical tests:
a. Perform an insulation-resistance test on generator winding with
respect to ground in accordance with ANSI/IEEE Standard 43.
Determine polarization index.
b. Test protective relay devices in accordance with applicable portions
of this Section.
c. Perform phase rotation test to determine compatibility with load
requirements.
d. Functionally test engine shutdown for low oil pressure,
overtemperature, overspeed, and other features as applicable
e. Perform vibration base-line test. Plot amplitude versus frequency for
each main bearing cap.
f.
Perform load bank test in accordance with the following schedule:
g. Perform a cooling system test to validate the engine cooling system.
3. Test values:
a. Perform an insulation-resistance test at minimum test voltage of 1,000
volts. Minimum insulation resistance shall be 100 megohms.
b. Vibration levels shall not exceed manufacturer’s recommendations
and specification.
c. Load test results shall demonstrate the ability of the unit to deliver
rated load for the test period.
E.
Section 16264, Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS):
1. Test the system per the manufacturer’s recommendation and the
requirements in Section 16264.
F.
Section 16271, Power Transformers:
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a.
Check primary, secondary, and ground connections.
b.
Clean and inspect bushings.
c.
Check accessory devices for condition and proper operation.
d.
Liquid-Filled Transformers Only:
i.
Inspect bushing clamps and gaskets.
ii. Inspect cover and handhole gasket seals.
iii. Inspect tap changer seals.
iv. Check for oil leaks and external damage to radiators.
v. Check liquid level.
vi. Inspect for damaged insulators and potheads.
2. Electrical Tests:
a.
Page 9 of 15
Perform insulation resistance test by meggering transformer windings
high to low and ground, low to high and ground, and high and low to
ground.
START UP, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Technical Specifications
b.
Perform turns ratio test.
c.
Where cooling fans have been provided, verify proper operation of
same.
d.
Power factor test.
e.
Liquid-Filled Transformers Only:
i.
Test dielectric liquid to ASTM D877, using 25,000 volts minimum
breakdown voltage, after installation and before energizing from
system.
ii. Test transformer to IEEE C57.12.90.
iii. Perform a turns ratio test for each tap position.
f.
Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers Only:
i.
G.
Test transformer to IEEE C57.12.91.
Section 16341, High Tension Switchgear:
1. Switchgear:
a.
Visual and Mechanical Inspections:
i.
Verify enclosure interiors are cleaned and free of accumulated
dust, dirt, films, and other foreign material.
ii. Inspect and clean all bus and support insulators.
iii. Inspect all electrical and mechanical components for condition
and any evidence of defects or failure.
iv. Check for proper travel and alignment of drawout circuit breakers.
v. Check breaker connections to bus.
vi. Inspect bolted connections. The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall
torque wrench tighten or remake any questionable connections.
vii. Inspect for missing or loose hardware or accessories.
viii. Inspect ground bus connections.
ix. Operate key and door interlock devices to ensure proper
operation.
b.
Electrical Tests:
i.
Insulation Resistance Test: Megger main secondary bus and
feeder circuits phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground.
ii. Energize any space heater circuits to ensure proper operation.
c.
Instruments and Meter Tests: Inspect panel-mounted instruments
and meters. Clean and check for calibration accuracy. Make minor
adjustments, as necessary.
2. Circuit Breakers:
a.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
i. Remove drawout circuit breaker from cell.
ii. Clean circuit breaker and inspect for defects or damage.
iii. Inspect and check contact alignment.
Page 10 of 15
START UP, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Technical Specifications
iv. Inspect finger clusters on line and load stabs.
v. Check for
necessary.
proper
mechanical
operation.
Lubricate
where
vi. Check auxiliary devices for proper operation.
vii.Check breaker racking-device (if applicable) for alignment and
friction-free operation. Lubricate if necessary.
b.
Electrical Tests:
i. Insulation Resistance Test: Megger main secondary bus and
feeder circuits phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground.
ii. Energize any space heater circuits to ensure proper operation.
c.
Instruments and Meter Tests: Inspect panel-mounted instruments
and meters. Clean and check for calibration accuracy. Make minor
adjustments, as necessary.
3. Protective Relays:
a.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
i. Remove relay from case. Visually inspect each relay and case for
damaged or broken parts.
ii. Check contact and bearing clearances. Check hardware for
tightness. Check electrical connections for proper contact. Make
minor adjustments, as necessary.
b.
Electrical Tests:
i. Insulation Resistance Test:
frame.
Megger each relay circuit to relay
ii. Operational Tests: Calibrate relays to settings provided by the
fault calculation and protective device coordination study provided
by the Owner.
(a) Time Overcurrent Relays
(1) Test minimum pickup.
(2) Test the minimum timing points at three times tap value
and at five times tap value unless otherwise specified.
(3) Test pickup of
applicable.
instantaneous
trip
attachment,
if
(4) Check operation of target indicator.
(b) Directional Overcurrent Relays:
(1) Test operation of directional units in tripping and
nontripping directions at rated current and voltage.
(2) Test time overcurrent unit as described for time
overcurrent relays above.
(c) Voltage-Controlled Overcurrent Relays:
(1) Test dropout of voltage unit.
(2) Test time overcurrent unit as described for time
overcurrent relays above.
Page 11 of 15
START UP, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Technical Specifications
(d) Instantaneous Overcurrent Relays:
(1) Test pickup of each coil by itself.
(2) Apply equal current to opposing coils to test for balanced
or no-trip condition.
(3) Check operation of target indicator.
(e) Differential Relays:
(1) Test pickup of relay with current in one restraint coil and
operating coil for each set of windings.
(2) Check operation of target indicator.
(3) Test current transformer connections and polarities to
ensure proper operation.
iii. After the relays have been tested, they shall be reinstalled in the
relay cases. Each relay circuit shall be tested for proper operation
by applying control power and manually closing the relay contacts
to trip the breaker.
H.
Section 16410, Disconnect Switches:
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Inspect cover and case, and check for broken or loose terminals.
b. Operate breaker to check operation.
2. Electrical Tests (all breakers with frames rated 600A and above plus
10 percent of breakers with frames rated 250A frame to 600A frame):
a. Insulation Resistance Test: Megger main poles of breaker pole to
pole, from each pole to ground, and across the open contacts of each
pole.
b. Contact Resistance Test: Measure contact resistance in microhms
across main pole contacts with breaker closed and latched to check
for good, low-resistance contact. Investigate any value exceeding
500 microhms or deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent
contacts or similar breakers.
c. Test overcurrent trip device by primary current injection and calibrate
to settings provided on all circuit breakers 600A and larger and 10
percent of circuit breakers 200A-599A and calibrate to settings
provided by A/E.
i. All trip units shall be tested by primary injection.
ii. Static overcurrent trip devices shall be tested per manufacturer’s
instructions.
iii. Test for minimum pickup current.
iv. Apply 300 percent of pickup current and measure time necessary to
trip breaker (long-time delay).
v. Where short-time delay characteristics are provided, test short-time
pickup and delay.
vi. Test instantaneous trip by passing current sufficiently high to trip
breaker instantaneously.
vii.Where ground fault protection is provided, test ground fault pickup
Page 12 of 15
START UP, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Technical Specifications
and delay.
viii. Check reset characteristics of trip unit.
d. For the 10 percent group of breakers tested, if one of these breakers
fails the test, then 10 more breakers shall be tested.
I.
Section 16415, Transfer Switches:
1. Test the system per the manufacturer’s recommendation and the
requirements in Section 16412.
J.
Section 16430, Switchgears:
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Verify enclosure interiors are cleaned and free of accumulated dust,
dirt, oil films, and other foreign material.
b. Inspect all electrical and mechanical components for condition and
any evidence of defect or failure.
c.
Check for proper travel and alignment of any drawout or plug-in circuit
breakers.
d. Check breaker connections to bus.
e. Inspect bolted connections.
The GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall
torque wrench tighten or remake any questionable connections.
f.
Inspect for missing or loose hardware or accessories.
g. Inspect ground bus connections.
h. Operate key and door interlock devices to ensure proper operation.
2. Electrical Tests:
a. Insulation Resistance Test: Megger main secondary bus and feeder
circuits phase to phase and phase to ground.
b. Energize any space heater circuits to ensure proper operations.
3. Circuit Breakers:
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
i. Remove each drawout type circuit breaker.
ii. Inspect arc chutes of power circuit breakers.
iii. Inspect circuit breaker for defects or damage.
iv. Inspect and check contacts.
pressure. Adjust if necessary.
Check alignment, overtravel, and
v. Inspect finger clusters on line and load stabs of drawout circuit
breakers.
vi. Check for proper mechanical operation.
necessary.
Lubricate where
vii.Check auxiliary devices for proper operation.
viii. Check breaker racking-device (if applicable) for alignment and
friction-free operation. Lubricate if necessary.
b. Electrical Tests:
i. Insulation Resistance Test: Megger main poles of breaker pole to
Page 13 of 15
START UP, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Technical Specifications
pole, from each pole to ground, and across the open contacts of
each pole.
ii. Contact Resistance Test:
Measure contact resistance in
microhms across main pole contacts with breaker closed and
latched to check for good, low-resistance contact. Investigate any
value exceeding 500 microhms or deviation of 50 percent or more
from adjacent contacts or similar breakers.
iii. Test overcurrent trip device by primary injection and calibrate to
settings provided by A/E. Static overcurrent trip devices shall be
tested per the manufacturer’s instructions. Test each pole of the
breaker individually. Data shall be compared with manufacturer’s
published data.
(a) Test for minimum pickup current.
(b) Apply 300 percent of pickup current and measure time
necessary to trip breaker (long-time delay).
(c) Where short-time delay characteristics are provided, test shorttime pickup and delay.
(d) Test instantaneous trip by passing current sufficiently high to
trip breaker instantaneously.
(e) Where ground fault protection is provided, test ground fault
pickup and delay.
(f) Check reset characteristics of trip unit.
c.
Electrically test any auxiliary devices, such as shunt trips,
undervoltage trips, alarm contacts, and auxiliary contacts.
Section 16442, Panelboards/Section 16443, Motor Control Centers:
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection - Circuit Breakers:
a. Inspect cover and case, and check for broken or loose terminals.
b. Operate breaker several times to check proper operation.
c. Glastic and phenolic components to be inspected for cracks.
d. Contacts, shunts, etc to be visually inspected for alignment.
2. Electrical Tests - Circuit Breakers (all breakers with frames rated 600A
and above plus 10 percent of breakers with frames rated 200A through
599A). For CPS and emergency power switchboard and panelboards,
test all main circuit breakers regardless of size:
a. Insulation Resistance Test: Megger main poles of breaker pole to
pole, from each pole to ground, and across the open contacts of each
pole.
b. Contact Resistance Test: Measure contact resistance in microhms
across main pole contacts with breaker closed and latched to check
for good, low resistance contact. Investigate any value exceeding
500 microhms or deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent
contacts or similar breakers.
c. For the 10 percent group of breakers tested, if one of these breakers
fails the test, then 10 more breakers shall be tested.
Page 14 of 15
START UP, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Technical Specifications
d. Test overcurrent trip device by primary current injection and calibrate
to settings provided on all circuit breakers 600A and larger and 10
percent of circuit breakers 200A-599A.
3.2
COMMISSIONING
3.3
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory authorized service representative to train EMPLOYER’S
maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the electrical
equipment and systems.
** END OF SECTION **
Page 15 of 15
START UP, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Technical Specifications
SECTION 16100
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - REFERENCE
Requirements of Section 16050 apply to all work under this Section.
PART 2 – GENERAL
A. Furnish and install all conduits, cable troughs, wireways, joint and outlet boxes,
conductor and miscellaneous materials required for wiring, as specified herein
and shown on drawings.
B. Furnish and install all power and control wiring to al equipment, except as
otherwise specified. Equipment includes motor, motor starters,
and
miscellaneous devices.
PART 3 - INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC):
A.
General: NEMA standard trade sizes, UL approved or equivalent to McGill or
approved equal.
B.
Material:
coating.
C.
Size: 15mm (1/2”) minimum.
D.
Coupling, unions and fittings : standard, threaded
E.
Use limitation: as specified in the latest edition of PEC and/or NEC.
F.
Expansion fittings: use for runs spanning expansion joints.
G.
Paint field cuts and repair damaged protected coating with red lead or Zinc
chromate. Conduit threads shall not be painted.
mild steel, hot dipped galvanized with inside enamel or epoxy
PART 4 - POLYVINYL CHLORIDE ( PVC ) CONDUIT
A.
General: Standard trade sizes, heavy wall, manufactured to NEMA TC-2 Type
40, rated 90 deg Celsius cable as
manufactured by Crown, Emerald,
Neltex and Atlanta.
B.
Material: Polyvinylchloride, extruded.
C.
Nominal size: 20 mm ( ½”) minimum.
D.
Couplings and Fittings: Standard joint by solvent weld process.
E.
Use Limitation:
F.
Page 1 of 6
1.
As specified in the latest edition of PEC and/or
NEC.
2.
Not permitted where subject to mechanical damage.
3.
Indicated in the drawings.
Pulling Hardwares: Flat fish tape with ball and flexible leader or
polyethylene or Manila rope. Use of steel pulling cable not
permitted.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Technical Specifications
PART 5 - ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING ( EMT ):
A.
General: Standard sized, UL approved
B.
Material: Steel, zinc coated outside, enamel coated inside.
C.
Nominal Size: 15mm (1/2”) minimum, 50 mm (2”) maximum.
D.
Fittings: Compression type with plastic insert.
E.
Use limitation:
a. As specified in the latest edition of PEC.
b. Only where approved by the CONSULTANT.
F.
Repair damaged protective coating with red lead or zinc
chromate.
PART 6 - FLEXIBLE GALVANIZED STEEL CONDUIT:
A.
General: Standard sized, UL approved or equivalent
B.
Material : Steel, galvanized.
C.
Nominal size: 15 mm ( ½” ) minimum.
D.
Fittings: Standard.
E.
Use Limitation:
a. Between motor terminal boxes or vibration producing devices and rigid
conduit.
b. Short lengths of concealed wiring to lighting fixtures.
c. Other applications: only where approved or where shown on plans.
PART 7 - FLEXIBLE LIQUID TIGHT CONDUIT:
A.
General: Standard trade sizes. UL approved or equivalent.
B.
Material: Galvanized steel with outer liquid-tight plastic jacket.
C.
Size: 15 mm ( ½” ).
D.
Fittings: Liquid-tight.
E.
Use limitation:
1. Short lengths to vibration producing devices situated in wet or potentially wet
locations.
2. Between motor terminal boxes or vibration producing devices and rigid
conduit.
3. Other applications: Only where approved or where shown on plans.
PART 8 - CONDUIT INSTALLATION:
A.
General: Install in accordance with applicable codes and
standards of good practice.
B.
Location: Approximately as shown on drawings; actual routing
approval.
Page 2 of 6
recognized
subject
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
to
Technical Specifications
C.
Wall and floor sleeves:
1. General: Provide passage of conduits through walls, floors, or partitions. Set
sleeves in masonry during construction; set sleeves through concrete before
pouring begins.
2. Material: Galvanized pipe, securely fastened in position.
3. Sleeves through exterior building walls: Install conduit in center of sleeve, fill
annular space with loosely packed oakum. Seal interior and exterior of
packing with hot applied asphalt. Fit the conduit on each side of the wall with
round galvanized steel flange fastened to conduit by two set screws to retain
sealing compound.
4. Sleeves through waterproof constructions: Flanged type.
5. Opening required after footings, walls, floors, or ceilings are constructed shall
be provided and patched at Contractor’s expense in an approved manner.
D.
Embedded Conduit:
1. General: Set before pouring of concrete begins. Route in as direct line as
possible and where a bend is required, turn with a long radius.
2. Underground installation: Encase conduits with concrete, 75mm ( 3” ) from
outer face of conduits.
3. Conduit joints shall be half-wrapped with 3M Scotch wrap #50 PVC tape or
approved equivalent.
E.
Joints: Make with approved couplings and unions to provide
continuous and moisture-tight system.
electrically
F.
Expansion joints: Use expansion fittings and bonding jumpers
conduit spans building expansion joints.
wherever
G.
Drainage: Avoid pockets in conduit runs as much as possible;
provide
suitable fittings at low spots in exposed conduits where
pocket cannot be
avoided. Weep holes not permitted.
H.
Bends: Not more than the equivalent of three 90 deg bends
pulling joints.
between
I.
Wiring of fire related motors shall be embedded or encased in
concrete.
J.
Field cuts and threads:
1. Cut ends of conduit square with hand or power saw and ream to remove
burrs and sharp edges. Do not use wheel cutter.
2. Threads cut on job shall have same effective lengths, thread dimensions, and
taper as factory cut threads.
3. Carefully removed burrs from threads. Conduit threads shall not be painted.
4. Apply coat of protective paint through conduits where protective coating is
damaged.
K.
Supports:
1. Manufacturer: Nova or approved equal.
2. Hangers, supports, or fastenings: Provide at each elbow and at end of every
straight run terminating in a box or cabinet. Rigid fastenings spaced in
accordance with the PEC.
Page 3 of 6
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Technical Specifications
3. Clamps: Galvanized malleable iron one-hole straps, beam clamps, or other
approved device with necessary bolts and expansion shields.
4. Adjustable hangers:
a. Use to support horizontal runs only.
b. Trapeze hangers: For parallel runs of conduits. Install pipe clamps
every third intermediate hanger for each conduit. Paint hangers one
prime coat of red lead or zinc chromate, one finish coat of approved
color. Hangers are not detailed but must be adequate to support the
combined weights or conduit, conductors, and hangers.
5. Submit shop drawings for approval.
L.
Concealing: Conceal conduits in all areas except mechanical
equipment
rooms and areas as specified. Run exposed
conduits parallel with, or
at right angle to, lines of buildings.
M.
Conduit ends:
1. Cap conduit.
2. Open conduit ends terminating in panels for enclosures where exposed to
entrance of foreign material: Plug space around cables with commercial duct
sealing compound.
3. Cap conduit ends during construction to prevent entrance of foreign materials
and moisture before wires or cables are installed.
N.
Cleaning: Clean inside by mechanical means to remove all
materials and moisture before wires or cables are installed.
foreign
O.
Conduit connections at panels and boxes: Double locknuts and
bushings.
PART 9 - JUNCTION BOXES AND OUTLET BOXES:
A.
Manufacturer: Steel City or approved equal.
B.
General: Provide junction boxes for pulling and splicing wires,
and outlet
boxes for installation of wiring devices as required, or
as
shown
on
drawings. As a rule, provide junction boxes in all runs of greater than 30
meters ( 100 ft ) in length. For other lengths, provide boxes as required for
splicing or pulling. Boxes
be in accessible locations.
C.
Construction: Welded sheet steel, galvanized finish. Provide
covers attached with round head machine screws.
removable
D.
Support: Support boxes independently of conduits entering, by
materials described in Section 16100, sub-section 6.0J.
means
E.
Finish: Galvanized.
of
PART 10 - WIREWAY:
A.
General: Furnish and install wireway as indicated on drawings or as
required.
B.
Size and arrangement: As indicated on drawings.
C.
Construction: Minimum 1.519mm ( #16 MSG ) thick galvanized
metal with snap-on cover or as shown on plans.
Page 4 of 6
steel sheet
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Technical Specifications
D.
All screws installed towards the inside shall be guarded to prevent
insulation damage.
E.
Provide all necessary supports, fittings and miscellaneous materials
complete installation.
wire
for
a
PART 11 - CONDUCTOR:
A.
Manufacturer: Philflex, Phelps Dodge or approved equal.
B.
Material : Copper, annealed.
C.
Stranding: Standard stranding for 3.5 sq mm and larger.
D.
Minimum sizes: 3.5 sq mm THW or THHN for lighting and power
the plans.
E.
Standards: ICEA or Philippine Electrical Code.
F.
Color Code:
as noted in
1. Color coding for all ground and neutral conductors shall be as follows in
accordance with the Code:
2. Multi-wire branch circuits, feeders to distribution, lighting, receptacle and
power panels shall be color coded.
3. Color coding shall be maintained all throughout the installation.
G.
600-Volt Class Conductors Insulation:
1. Feeders and general use conductors: THW or THHN insulation as shown in
the plans.
2. Fixture wires: In accordance with Philippine Electrical Code.
3. Wiring in fluorescent fixtures: In accordance with Philippine Electrical Code.
4. Wire insulation in wet or potentially wet locations: TW insulation.
PART 12 - CONDUCTOR INSTALLATION:
A.
Place all wiring, in raceway of type of types indicated. Provide all required and
indicated accessories for proper installation of
all wiring.
B.
Bending radii: Not less than permitted by Philippine Electrical Code.
C.
Supports in vertical runs: As prescribed by Philippine Electrical Code.
D.
Splicing:
1. Permissible only in junction boxes or similar accessible locations. Number of
splices held to absolute minimum.
2. Use solderless, compression-type wire terminators at devices. Use wire nuts
with screws not bearing directly on the wires.
E.
Insulation of splices or taps:
1. Three layers 20mm wide 3M Company “Scotch no.33” or “Scotch no.88”, or
approved equal, electrical tape, half lapped.
2. Use filler compound, “Scothfil”, or approved equal, at sharp edges to provide
smooth surface before taping.
Page 5 of 6
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Technical Specifications
3. Use 3M wire nut for splices in wireways.
F.
Marking: Mark each end of every power or control cable with a
plastic tag
securely fastened to it bearing circuit use identification. Also mark cables
in pull or junction boxes.
G.
Connections:
1. Apparatus lugs: Solderless pressure-type lugs.
Thoroughly clean lug
conductor and coat with suitable oxidation inhibiting compound prior to
connection.
2. Terminal blocks: Use retaining cup washers where solid wire is used. Use
pressure type terminal lugs where stranded wire is used.
3. All feeder cable terminations shall be torqued and properly marked.
PART 13 - NAMEPLATES:
A.
General: Provide and install nameplates wherever indicated as required in
these specifications. Wording shall be approved prior to purchase of
nameplates.
B.
Material: Red Bakelite engraving stock, white core.
C.
Lettering: Engraved, approximately 5.0 mm high. Wording shall identify
function of device to which nameplate is attached, or identify equipment
served by device.
D.
Installation (except for factory-installed nameplates): Attach with sheet metal
screws after painting of equipment is completed.
E.
All receptacle outlets/switches, plates shall be identified with circuit and panel
homerun numbers using “dymo” tape labeler.
PART 14 - FIELD TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS:
A.
Test reports: Typewritten, listing equipment used, person or persons
performing the tests, date tested, circuits tested and results of tests.
B.
Insulation resistance tests, general:
1. Perform insulation resistance tests on wires listed herein.
2. Test equipment: Furnished by Contractor; equal to Megger as manufactured
by James G. Biddle Company, motor driven or rectifier type ranges of 500,
1000, and 2500 volts DC.
3. Resistance measured: Line to ground.
4. Disconnect all solid state equipment before making wire or cable tests.
Contractor is responsible for damage to any such equipment caused by these
tests.
C.
Insulation resistance tests, wires.
1. Test all 600 volt class power and lighting circuits at 1000-volt rating of
“Megger” for one minute duration.
2. Spot test control circuits with “Megger” as directed.
D.
Voltage level test:
1. When performed: After all equipment is installed, ready for operation.
Page 6 of 6
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Technical Specifications
2. Contractor shall measure voltage at five points in the system as directed.
3. Load conditions: No-load and full load, in so far as practicable.
4. Test report: Required, as specified under item “A”.
E.
Continuity test: Test all socket outlet and control circuits to determine
continuity of wiring and connections. Submit written
statement that this
test has been performed.
F.
Correction of defects:
1. If tests disclose any unsatisfactory workmanship, wiring or equipment
furnished under this Contract, Contractor shall repair or replace, at his
expense, such defects in an approved manner.
2. If any wiring or equipment is damaged by tests, Contractor shall repair or
replace, at his expense, such wiring or equipment in an approved manner.
** END OF SECTION *
Page 7 of 6
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
Technical Specifications
SECTION 16123
WIRING AND CABLES FOR 600V CIRCUITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
Provide building wires, power cables, control cables, flexible cords, splices,
taps, and terminations as required for electrical work covered by the Contract
Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
BUILDING WIRES FOR 600 VOLTS AND LESS
A.
B.
C.
2.2
General
1.
Conductors shall be new and shall show the name and trademark of
the manufacturer and shall be tagged showing acceptance by
Underwriter's Laboratories. Conductors shall be identified in
accordance with Philippine Electrical Code color coding. Conductors
shall be 600 volt insulated and shall be 3.5 mm² or larger unless
otherwise noted. Sizes larger than 3.5 mm² are noted on the
drawings.
2.
Conductors shall be stranded copper.
3.
Conductors for motor control shall be 2 mm² stranded type THW.
4.
Conductors for signal and communication systems shall be as
specified under specification section for those systems.
5.
Conductors used in fluorescent fixture channels shall be rated 90°C.
6.
Conductors for power circuits shall be type THWN and THW.
7.
Equipment grounding conductors shall be green or have the ends
taped with green tape and shall be type TW.
Insulation Types shall be as follows:
1.
Type THW conductor insulation shall be moisture and heat-resistant
thermoplastic. Rating shall be 75°C in wet or dry locations.
2.
THHN conductor insulation shall be heat-resistant thermoplastic.
Rating shall be 90°C in dry locations
Approved Product Manufacturers or approved equal.
1.
American Wire & Cable Co.
2.
Phelps Dodge Phils. Corp.
3.
Philflex
FLEXIBLE CORDS
A.
Page 1 of 3
Flexible cords shall be furnished for pendent connections to lighting fixtures
and connections to portable equipment.
WIRING AND CABLES FOR 600V CIRCUITS
Technical Specifications
2.3
CONTROL CABLE
A.
Multiple conductor control cables shall be rated 600 Volts, shall have outer
jacket as specified, and be suitable for installation in open, air, ducts, conduit,
or direct burial.
B.
Conductors: Stranded soft copper or number shown.
C.
Insulation: As specified below with stranded IPCEA Color Coding.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
CONDUCTOR INSTALLATION
A.
Interiors of conduit shall be clean and dry before pulling wire.
moisture has entered conduits contractor shall swab them clean.
if dirt or
B.
Care shall be exercised while installing wire in conduits so as not to injure
conductor insulation. Use UL listed wire pulling lubricants for pulling-in
conductors.
C.
Free ends and loops of wire at boxes and enclosures shall be pushed back in
box and protected by blank covers or other means until the interior painting or
decorating work is completed.
CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION
A.
The conductors of branch circuits for power and lighting shall be color coded
for identification purposes in accordance with Article 5.3 of the Philippine
Electrical Code. Refer to Section 16195 of these specifications.
B.
Power feeders for 600 volts and below shall be color coded by using
permanent-colored, non aging insulating tape.
C.
Branch circuits shall be connected as numbered on drawings. Test and
permanently tag by circuit number each circuit wire, except neutrals, in panel
gutter before connecting to panels, using numbered tapes. For single phase,
3-wire systems, 2 line conductors may be served by a common neutral. In no
case may a common neutral be used when two circuits are connected to the
same phase of a panelboard.
D.
Terminal strips shall be lettered or numbered, and numbered or lettered tapes
shall be attached to conductors connected through terminal strips.
SPLICES, TAPS AND TERMINATIONS
A.
Splices and taps of conductors 5.5 mm² and smaller shall be made using
electrical spring connectors with vinyl insulating caps.
B.
Splices and taps of conductors larger than 5.5 mm² shall all be made by splitbolt type connectors. Finished splice or tap shall be insulated with one layer
of vinyl backed mastic followed by two half-lapped layers of electrical tape or
premolded caps or heat shrinkable tubing.
C.
Feeder conductors shall be terminated with pressure bolt type lugs.
D.
Conductors for other than feeders shall be terminated using pressure bolt
type terminals. Where connections are to be made under screw heads only,
install insulated crimp type spade lugs on stranded wire ends before
connections are made.
E.
Connectors shall contain only one wire unless listed for multiple conductors.
Page 2 of 3
WIRING AND CABLES FOR 600V CIRCUITS
Technical Specifications
F.
3.4
Feeder cables shall be continuous without splices.
TESTING
A.
Continuity shall be checked by means of a DC test device using a bell or
buzzer. Circuit and phase identification tags shall comply with 3.2 above.
B.
Lighting circuit shall be identified and shall pass operational tests to see that
the circuits perform functions for which they are designed.
C.
Cable connections must pass a visual inspection for workmanship and
conformance with standard practice.
D.
Conductors and leads shall be tested for continuity. Feeder and branch
circuits shall be given a megger test using 1000 volt motor driven megger.
1.
Megger tests shall be made between one conductor and ground with
the other conductors grounded. Each conductor shall be tested in the
same manner. Megger readings for cables connected at both ends
shall be recorded.
2.
Each feeder conductor shall be meggered with the cable connected to
the open breaker at the equipment. Connections at the other end of
each of these cables shall be as follows:
a.
Conductors to motor control centers shall be connected to the
motor control center bus with switches in the starters open.
b.
Conductors to motors and other equipment shall be connected
to the motors and equipment with feeder switches open.
** END OF SECTION **
Page 3 of 3
WIRING AND CABLES FOR 600V CIRCUITS
Technical Specifications
SECTION 16130
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor shall furnish and install complete raceway systems as shown on the
Drawings and as hereinafter specified.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
INTERMEDIATE METALLIC CONDUIT
A. All wiring shall be in intermediate metallic conduit unless specified in the Drawings.
B. Metal conduits shall be hot-dipped galvanized with zinc coated threads and shall
conform to ANSI C.80.1
C. All conduits shall be the manufactured by McGill or approved equal but must be
products of only one manufacturer.
D. The metric sizes of conduits quoted on the Drawings are the minimum sizes
acceptable and shall conform to the following trade sizes as listed in the latest
edition of the PEC.
2.2
Metric Size, mm
Trade Size, inches
15
½
20
¾
25
1
32
1¼
40
1½
50
2
65
2½
80
3
90
3½
100
4
FLEXIBLE CONDUIT, COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS
A. Flexible conduits shall be of metallic flexible core with a copper-bonding conductor
between the spiral segments. The flexible core shall be galvanized steel. For wet
locations and for all motor connections, the core shall be covered with abrasion
resistant liquid-tight polyvinyl chloride jacket.
B. Couplings and fittings shall be of a design approved for the above type of flexible
conduit.
2.3
BOXES AND FITTINGS
A. Boxes for metallic raceways shall be of the cast-metal hub type when located in
normally wet locations, when surface mounted on exterior surfaces and in
hazardous areas. They shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication and shall be
provided with cast galvanized covers and corrosion proof screws.
Page 1 of 3
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
Technical Specifications
B. Boxes in other locations shall be constructed of code gage galvanized sheet steel
and shall be furnished with screw-fastened covers.
C. All fittings shall be hot-dipped galvanized.
D. Exposed expansion fittings shall be designed to compensate for expansion,
contraction and deflection in a line of conduit. They shall be of weathertight
corrosion resistant construction and shall have flexible copper bonding jumpers.
E. All boxes and fittings shall be the manufactured by Steel City or approved equal but
must be products of only one manufacturer.
2.4
CONDUIT MOUNTING EQUIPMENT
Hangers, rods, backplates, beam clamps, and other hardware shall be hot-dipped
galvanized steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, RIGID CONDUITS
A. Unless indicated otherwise, conduits shall be concealed within finished walls,
ceiling and floors.
B. All conduits shall be kept at least 100 mm away from parallel runs of flues and
steam or hot water pipes.
C. Conduits shall have no more than three 90-degree bends in any one run.
D. Conduits installed in concrete floor slabs shall be located so as not adversely affect
the structural strength of the slabs. They shall be installed within the middle onethird of the concrete slab and shall be spaced horizontally not closer than three
diameters except at cabinet locations. Curved portion of bend shall not be visible
above the finished slab. Slab thickness shall be increased as necessary to provide
a minimum 25-mm cover over the conduit. Conduit larger than 25 mm shall be
parallel with or at right angles to the main reinforcements.
E. All conduits on exposed works shall be run at right angles to and parallel with the
surrounding walls and shall conform to the form of the ceiling. No diagonal runs will
be allowed. Changes in direction of runs shall be made with symmetrical bends or
cast metal fittings. Bends in parallel conduit runs shall be concentric. Field made
bends (or offsets) shall be made with a hickey or conduit-bending machine.
F. In suspended ceiling construction, conduits shall be run above the ceiling and shall
be supported independently from the ceiling and mechanical equipment.
G. Conduit supports shall be spaced at no more than 2.5 m or as required to obtain
rigid construction.
H. Single conduit shall be supported by means of one-hole pipe strap in combination
with one screw backplate to raise the conduit from the surface.
I.
Multiple runs of conduits shall be supported on trapeze type hangers with steel
horizontal members and threaded hanger rods. The rods shall not be less than 10
mm in diameter.
J. Conduit hangers shall be attached to structural steel by means of beam or channel
clamps.
K. Fastening of conduit supports shall be by wood screws or screw type nails to
wood; by toggle bolts on masonry units, by concrete inserts or expansion bolts on
concrete or brick; and by machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring
tension clamps on steel work. Threaded studs driven in by a powder charge and
provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in lieu of expansion bolts or
Page 2 of 3
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
Technical Specifications
machine or wood screws. The load applied to fasteners shall not exceed one fourth
of the proof test load.
L. Conduit terminating in sheet metal boxes and cabinets shall have double locknuts
and insulating bushings. Locknuts shall be the types with sharp edges for digging
into the wall of metal enclosures. Bushings shall be installed on the ends of all
conduit and shall be of the insulating type where required by the PEC.
M. Conduit terminating in gasket enclosures shall be terminated with conduit hub.
N. Conduit wall seals shall be used for all conduits penetrating walls below grade or at
other locations shown on the Drawings.
O. Expansion and deflection fittings with bonding jumpers shall be used where
conduits cross structural expansion joints.
P. Flexible metal conduits shall be used for all motor terminations and for other
equipment subject to vibration or noise transmission.
Q. No wire shall be pulled into the conduit system until it is complete in all details, in
the case of concealed work, until all rough plastering or masonry has been
completed, and in the case of exposed work, until the conduit system has been
completed in every detail.
R. The ends of all conduits shall be tightly plugged to exclude dust and moisture
during construction. Clogged conduits shall be freed of all obstructions. All conduits
shall be swabbed clean before pulling in wires.
S. Empty conduits which wire is to be provided by others shall have pull wires
installed. The pull wire shall be No. 12 AWG, zinc coated steel or of plastic having
not less than 90 kgs (200 pounds) tensile strength. Not less than 30 mm of slack
should be left at each end of the pull wires.
3.2
INSTALLATION, BOXES
A. Boxes shall be provided in the wiring or raceway system whenever required for
pulling of wires, making connections and mounting of devices or lighting fixtures.
B. Each box shall have the volume required by the PEC for the number of conduits
terminating in the box and the number of conductors enclosed in the box.
C. Boxes shall be at least 35 mm deep. The smallest utility box shall be 50 mm by 100
mm. Lighting fixture and telephone outlet boxes shall be at least 100 mm by 100
mm.
D. Boxes installed for concealed wiring shall be provided with suitable extension rings
or plaster covers.
E. All boxes shall be properly supported to obtain a rigid raceway system.
** END OF SECTION **
Page 3 of 3
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
Technical Specifications
SECTION 16134
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 – REFERENCE
Requirements of Section 16050 apply to all work under this Section.
PART 2 - GENERAL
Furnish and install wiring devices as shown in the electrical plans.
PART 3 - DEVICES AND PLATES
A. Wall Switches: Quiet type, spring operated. The type of switch shall be of tumbler
operation. Rating as shown in the plan.
B. General Purpose Receptacles: Flush mounting, type and rating as shown in the plan.
C. General Purpose Wall Plates: Type, color, plating and appearance of device plates
shall be as selected by the CONSULTANT. Appropriate samples shall be submitted
prior to the purchase of the faceplates.
D. Manufacturers: LEGRAND
PART 4 - INSTALLATION
Connect wiring devices ground terminal to circuit ground wire.
PART 5 - LOCATIONS
Indicated locations are approximate. Determine exact locations at site by reference
to building drawings and in coordination with work of other trades. Receptacles for
appliances shall be so located as to be accessible, but not prominently displayed and
upon coordination with the CONSULTANT.
PART 6 - WARRANTY
A warranty for a period of one (1) year shall be provided against failure of
components resulting from normal use and/or factory defects.
** END OF SECTION **
Page 1 of 1
WIRING DEVICES
Technical Specifications
SECTION 16230
ENGINE GENERATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for emergency
standby power supply with the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of
a parameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a
percentage of the nominal value of the parameter.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the engine generator indicated, include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. In
addition, include the following:
1.
2.
B.
Thermal damage curve for generator.
Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions,
weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components,
and location and size of each field connection.
1.
2.
3.
1.5
Section 16415 "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including
sensors and relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals
for engine-generator sets.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Diesel engine.
Unit-mounted cooling system.
Unit-mounted control panel.
Performance requirements for sensitive loads.
Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine-generator
set and other components specified.
Vibration Isolation Base Details:
Include detail fabrication,
anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.
Include base weights.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that day
tank, engine-generator set, batteries, battery charger, battery racks
accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces. Include the
following:
1.
Page 1 of 13
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of
gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
ENGINE GENERATORS
Technical Specifications
2.
B.
Qualification Data: For installer, manufacturer and testing agency.
C.
Source certified quality-control test reports such as the following:
D.
1.6
1.
Summary of prototype-unit test report.
2.
Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent,
but not identical, to those tested on prototype unit.
3.
Summary of Performance Tests: Certify compliance with specified
requirement to meet performance criteria for sensitive loads.
4.
Report of factory test on units, showing evidence of compliance with
specified requirements.
5.
Report of sound generation.
6.
Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable
regulations.
7.
Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110 (Standard
for Emergency and Standby Power Systems).
Field quality-control test reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to
include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to
items specified in in Section 01700 under “Execution Requirements”
“Operation and Maintenance Data", include the following:
1.
1.7
List of tools and replacement items recommended for storage in the
project for ready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current
unit prices, and source of supply.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.8
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the
certification is based and their installation requirements.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
labels describing contents.
1.
Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but no fewer than
one of each.
2.
Indicator Lamps: Two for every six of each type used, but no fewer
than two of each.
3.
Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion-air filters.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is
trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.
1.
2.
Page 2 of 13
Maintenance Proximity: Not more than four hours' normal travel time
from Installer's place of business to Project site.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for vibration isolators
and seismic restraints of engine skid mounts, including Shop
Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of
ENGINE GENERATORS
Technical Specifications
manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated
for this Project.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. With branch office or
fabrication shop within 321 km from Project site, a service center capable of
providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs.
C.
Retain first paragraph below if Contractor selects testing agency or Contractor
is required to provide services of an independent testing agency in Part 3
"Field Quality Control" Article. Qualification requirements supplement those
specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," which also includes the
definition for "NRTL" (nationally recognized testing laboratory).
D.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience
and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of
the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized
testing laboratory (NRTL), and that is acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.
E.
1.9
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the
InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for
Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing
specified in Part 3.
Source Limitations:
Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary
components through one source from a single manufacturer.
F.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
G.
Comply with ASME B15.1 (Safety Standard For
Transmission Apparatus).
H.
Comply with NFPA 37 (Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary
Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines).
I.
Comply with NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code)
J.
Retain paragraph below for healthcare facilities
K.
Retain first paragraph below if generator is automatically started. See Editing
Instruction No. 4 in the Evaluations.
L.
Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 emergency power supply
system.
M.
Comply with
Assemblies).
N.
Engine Exhaust Emissions:
government requirements.
O.
Noise Emission: Comply with applicable local government requirements for
maximum noise level at adjacent property boundaries due to sound emitted
by generator set including engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling-air intake
and discharge, and other components of installation.
UL 2200
(Standard
for
Stationary
Mechanical Power
Engine
Generator
Comply with applicable state and local
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Page 3 of 13
Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to
facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following
conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical
service according to requirements indicated:
ENGINE GENERATORS
Technical Specifications
B.
1.10
Notify Construction Manager/Owner no fewer than two days in
advance of proposed interruption of electrical service.
2.
Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without
Construction Manager/Owner's written permission.
Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand the
following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or
degradation of performance capability:
1.
Ambient Temperature: 20 to 40 deg C.
2.
Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent.
3.
Altitude: Not more than 3000 m above sea level.
COORDINATION
A.
1.11
1.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for package engine
generators. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement,
and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
agrees to repair or replace components of packaged engine generator and
associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
1.12
Warranty Period: one year from date of Substantial Completion.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12
months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated
service organization. Include quarterly exercising to check for proper starting,
load transfer, and running under load.
Include routine preventive
maintenance as recommended by manufacturer and adjusting as required for
proper operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the
manufacture and installation of original equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Caterpillar
Cummins
Mitsubishi
ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
A.
Factory-assembled and -tested, engine-generator set.
B.
Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without
depending on concrete foundation; and have lifting attachments.
Page 4 of 13
ENGINE GENERATORS
Technical Specifications
1.
C.
D.
E.
Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on metal plate permanently attached to
mounting frame to indicate location and lifting capacity of each lifting
attachment and generator-set center of gravity.
Capacity and Characteristics:
1.
Power Output Rating: Nominal ratings as indicated in plans.
2.
Output Connections: Three-phase, four wire.
3.
Nameplate:
For each major system component to identify
manufacturer's name and address, and model and serial number of
component.
Generator-Set Performance:
1.
Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth:
output voltage from no load to full load.
2.
Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation
for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover
and remain within the steady-state operating band within three
seconds.
3.
Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated
frequency from no load to full load.
4.
Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any
constant load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed
variations outside the steady-state operational band and no hunting or
surging of speed.
5.
Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 5 percent variation for
50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover
and remain within the steady-state operating band within five seconds.
6.
Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line
or line to neutral shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for
single harmonics. Telephone influence factor, determined according
to NEMA MG 1 (Motors and Generators), shall not exceed 50 percent.
7.
Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at
system output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 250
percent of rated full-load current for not less than 10 seconds and then
clear the fault automatically, without damage to generator system
components.
8.
Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110 (Standard for Emergency and
Standby Power Systems), Type 10, system requirements.
Generator-Set Performance for Sensitive Loads:
1.
Oversizing generator compared with the rated power output of the
engine is permissible to meet specified performance.
a.
2.
Page 5 of 13
3 percent of rated
Nameplate Data for Oversized Generator: Show ratings
required by the Contract Documents rather than ratings that
would normally be applied to generator size installed.
Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth:
output voltage from no load to full load.
1 percent of rated
ENGINE GENERATORS
Technical Specifications
3.
Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 10 percent variation
for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover
and remain within the steady-state operating band within 0.5 second.
4.
Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: Plus or minus 0.25
percent of rated frequency from no load to full load.
5.
Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any
constant load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed
variations outside the steady-state operational band and no hunting or
surging of speed.
6.
Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 2-Hz variation for 50
percent step-load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and
remain within the steady-state operating band within three seconds.
7.
Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to
neutral shall not exceed 2 percent total with no slot ripple. Telephone
influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not
exceed 50 percent.
8.
Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at
system output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 300
percent of rated full-load current for not less than 10 seconds and then
clear the fault automatically, without damage to winding insulation or
other generator system components.
9.
Excitation System: Performance shall be unaffected by voltage
distortion caused by nonlinear load.
a.
10.
2.3
Provide permanent magnet excitation for power source to
voltage regulator.
Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements.
ENGINE
A.
Fuel: Fuel oil, Grade DF-2.
B.
Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.
C.
Maximum Piston Speed for Four-Cycle Engines: 11.4 m/s.
D.
Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid:
E.
F.
Page 6 of 13
1.
Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5
micrometers and smaller while passing full flow.
2.
Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain
optimum oil temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is
designed to be fail-safe.
3.
Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily
removable container with no disassembly and without use of pumps,
siphons, special tools, or appliances.
Engine Fuel System:
1.
Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine. Pump ensures adequate
primary fuel flow under starting and load conditions.
2.
Relief-Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and
returns excess fuel to source.
Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing.
ENGINE GENERATORS
Technical Specifications
G.
H.
Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on
engine-generator-set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant
pump.
1.
Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and
50 percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by
engine manufacturer.
2.
Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system
coolant from cold start to 110 percent load condition.
3.
Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to
withstand maximum closed-loop coolant system pressure for engine
used. Equip with gage glass and petcock.
4.
Temperature Control:
Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve
modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant
coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer.
5.
Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous
rubber and outer covering of aging-, ultraviolet-, and abrasionresistant fabric.
a.
Rating: 345-kPa maximum working pressure with coolant at 82
deg C, and noncollapsible under vacuum.
b.
End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit
piping and equipment connections.
Muffler/Silencer:
Critical type, sized as recommended by engine
manufacturer and selected with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine
manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements.
1.
Minimum sound attenuation of 25 dB at 500 Hz.
2.
Sound level measured at a distance of 3 m from exhaust discharge
after installation is complete shall be 85 dBA or less.
I.
Air-Intake Filter: Heavy-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable
dry-filter element and "blocked filter" indicator.
J.
Starting System: 24-V electric, with negative ground.
Page 7 of 13
1.
Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full enginecranking cycle with ambient temperature at maximum specified in
Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article.
2.
Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and
releases from engine flywheel without binding.
3.
Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified.
4.
Battery:
Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range
specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions"
5.
Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for
cable length indicated. Include required interconnecting conductors
and connection accessories.
6.
Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid-resistant
finish and thermal insulation. Thermostatically controlled heater shall
be arranged to maintain battery above 10 deg C regardless of external
ambient temperature within range specified in Part 1 "Project
ENGINE GENERATORS
Technical Specifications
Conditions" Article. Include accessories required to support and
fasten batteries in place.
2.4
7.
Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solidstate voltage regulation and 35-A minimum continuous rating.
8.
Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and floatcharging type. Unit shall comply with UL 1236 and include the
following features:
a.
Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated
automatically after battery has lost charge until an adjustable
equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit shall
then be automatically switched to a lower float-charging mode
and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is
discharged again.
b.
Automatic Temperature Compensation:
Adjust float and
equalize voltages for variations in ambient temperature from
minus 40 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent overcharging at
high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures.
c.
Automatic Voltage Regulation:
Maintain constant output
voltage regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or
minus 10 percent.
d.
Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall
indicate charging rates.
e.
Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and
close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on
control panel. Sense high battery voltage and loss of ac input
or dc output of battery charger. Either condition shall close
contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction indication
at generator control panel.
f.
Enclosure and Mounting:
cabinet.
NEMA 250, Type 1, wall-mounted
FUEL OIL STORAGE
A.
B.
Page 8 of 13
Comply with NFPA 30 (Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code).
Day Tank: Comply with UL 142 (Standard for Steel Aboveground Tanks for
Flammable and Combustible Liquids), freestanding, factory-fabricated fuel
tank assembly, with integral, float-controlled transfer pump and the following
features:
1.
Containment: Integral rupture basin with a capacity of 150 percent of
nominal capacity of day tank.
a.
Leak Detector: Locate in rupture basin and connect to provide audible
and visual alarm in the event of day-tank leak.
2.
Tank Capacity: As indicated on plans (providing 8 hours at full load
capacity).
3.
Pump Capacity: Exceeds maximum flow of fuel drawn by enginemounted fuel supply pump at 110 percent of rated capacity, including
fuel returned from engine.
4.
Low-Level Alarm Sensor: Liquid-level device operates alarm contacts
at 25 percent of normal fuel level.
ENGINE GENERATORS
Technical Specifications
2.5
5.
High-Level Alarm Sensor: Liquid-level device operates alarm and
redundant fuel shutoff contacts at midpoint between overflow level and
100 percent of normal fuel level.
6.
Piping Connections: Factory-installed fuel supply and return lines from
tank to engine; local fuel fill, vent line, overflow line; and tank drain line
with shutoff valve.
7.
Redundant High-Level Fuel Shutoff: Actuated by high-level alarm
sensor in day tank to operate a separate motor device that disconnects
day-tank pump motor. Sensor shall signal solenoid valve, located in
fuel suction line between fuel storage tank and day tank, to close. Both
actions shall remain in shutoff state until manually reset. Shutoff action
shall initiate an alarm signal to genset control panel but shall not shut
down engine-generator set.
CONTROL
A.
Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector
switch on the generator control panel is in the automatic position, remotecontrol contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate
starting and stopping of generator set. When mode-selector switch is
switched to the on position, generator set starts. The off position of same
switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running,
specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut
down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a remote emergencystop switch also shuts down generator set.
B.
Manual Starting System Sequence of Operation: Switching on-off switch on
the generator control panel to the on position starts generator set. The off
position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set
is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements
automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a
remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set.
C.
Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic
system controls, and engine gages shall be grouped in a common control
panel mounted on the generator set. Mounting method shall isolate the
control panel from generator-set vibration.
D.
Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic
system controls, and engine gages shall be grouped in a common wallmounted control panel.
E.
Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic
system controls, engine gages, instrument transformers, generator
disconnect switch or circuit breaker, and other indicated components shall be
grouped in a combination control and power panel. Control section of panel
shall be isolated from power sections by steel barriers. Panel features shall
include the following:
Page 9 of 13
1.
Wall-Mounting Cabinet Construction: Rigid, self-supporting steel unit.
Power bus shall be copper. Bus, bus supports, control wiring, and
temperature rise shall comply with UL 891 (Switchboard).
2.
Switchboard Construction: Freestanding unit
3.
Switchgear Construction: Freestanding unit
4.
Current and Potential Transformers: Instrument accuracy class.
ENGINE GENERATORS
Technical Specifications
F.
Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: As required by NFPA 110,
and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
G.
AC voltmeter.
AC ammeter.
AC frequency meter.
DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging).
Engine-coolant temperature gage.
Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage.
Running-time meter.
Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es).
Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat.
Fuel tank derangement alarm.
Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm.
Generator overload.
Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
AC voltmeter.
AC ammeter.
AC frequency meter.
DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging).
Engine-coolant temperature gage.
Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage.
Running-time meter.
Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es).
Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat.
Start-stop switch.
Overspeed shutdown device.
Coolant high-temperature shutdown device.
Coolant low-level shutdown device.
Oil low-pressure shutdown device.
Fuel tank derangement alarm.
Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm.
Generator overload.
H.
Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other
devices and include wiring required to support specified items. Locate
sensors and other supporting items on engine or generator, unless otherwise
indicated.
I.
Connection to Data Link: A separate terminal block, factory wired to Form C
dry contacts, for each alarm and status indication is reserved for connections
for data-link transmission of indications to remote data terminals.
J.
Common Audible Alarm: Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1
systems. Include necessary contacts and terminals in control panel.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
K.
Page 10 of 13
Overcrank shutdown.
Coolant low-temperature alarm.
Control switch not in auto position.
Battery-charger malfunction alarm.
Battery low-voltage alarm.
Common Audible Alarm: Signal the occurrence of any events listed below
without differentiating between event types. Connect so that after an alarm is
silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing
switch is reset.
ENGINE GENERATORS
Technical Specifications
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.6
Engine high-temperature shutdown.
Lube-oil, low-pressure shutdown.
Overspeed shutdown.
Remote emergency-stop shutdown.
Engine high-temperature prealarm.
Lube-oil, low-pressure prealarm.
Fuel tank, low-fuel level.
Low coolant level.
L.
Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 99. An LED labeled with proper
alarm conditions shall identify each alarm event and a common audible signal
shall sound for each alarm condition. Silencing switch in face of panel shall
silence signal without altering visual indication. Connect so that after an
alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until
silencing switch is reset. Cabinet and faceplate are surface- or flushmounting type to suit mounting conditions indicated.
M.
Emergency-Stop Switch: Flush; wall mounted, unless otherwise indicated;
and labeled. Push button shall be protected from accidental operation.
GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION
A.
Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, thermal-magnetic type; 100 percent
rated; complying with NEMA AB 1 and UL 489.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protection.
Trip Rating: Matched to generator rating.
Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut
down by other protective devices.
Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control panel.
B.
Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, electronic-trip type; 100 percent
rated; complying with UL 489.
1.
Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long-time and short-time delay
and instantaneous.
2.
Trip Settings: Selected to coordinate with generator thermal damage
curve.
3.
Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut
down by other protective devices.
4.
Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control panel.
C.
Generator Circuit Breaker: Insulated-case, electronic-trip type; 100 percent
rated; complying with UL 489.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Generator Disconnect Switch: Molded-case type, 100 percent rated.
1.
2.
E.
Page 11 of 13
Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long-time and short-time delay
and instantaneous.
Trip Settings: Selected to coordinate with generator thermal damage
curve.
Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut
down by other protective devices.
Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control panel.
Rating: Matched to generator output rating.
Shunt Trip: Connected to trip switch when signaled by generator
protector or by other protective devices.
Generator Protector: Microprocessor-based unit shall continuously monitor
current level in each phase of generator output, integrate generator heating
ENGINE GENERATORS
Technical Specifications
effect over time, and predict when thermal damage of alternator will occur.
When signaled by generator protector or other generator-set protective
devices, a shunt-trip device in the generator disconnect switch shall open the
switch to disconnect the generator from load circuits. Protector shall perform
the following functions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
2.7
Initiates a generator overload alarm when generator has operated at
an overload equivalent to 110 percent of full-rated load for 60
seconds. Indication for this alarm is integrated with other generatorset malfunction alarms.
Under single or three-phase fault conditions, regulates generator to
300 percent of rated full-load current for up to 10 seconds.
As overcurrent heating effect on the generator approaches the thermal
damage point of the unit, protector switches the excitation system off,
opens the generator disconnect device, and shuts down the generator
set.
Senses clearing of a fault by other overcurrent devices and controls
recovery of rated voltage to avoid overshoot.
Ground-Fault Indication: Comply with NFPA 70, "Emergency System" signals
for ground-fault. Integrate ground-fault alarm indication with other generatorset alarm indications.
GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR
A.
B.
Comply with NEMA MG 1.
Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter
shall be rotated integrally with generator rotor.
C.
Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F.
D.
Stator-Winding Leads:
Brought out to terminal box to permit future
reconnection for other voltages if required.
E.
Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to
vibration, overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at
110 percent of rated capacity.
F.
Enclosure: Drip-proof.
G.
Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure.
H.
Voltage Regulator:
Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing
performance as specified.
1.
Adjusting rheostat on control panel shall provide plus or minus 5
percent adjustment of output-voltage operating band.
I.
Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator
windings above dew point.
J.
Windings:
winding.
K.
Sub-transient Reactance: 12 percent, maximum.
Page 12 of 13
Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur
ENGINE GENERATORS
Technical Specifications
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting
packaged engine-generator performance.
B.
Examine roughing-in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify
actual locations of connections before packaged engine-generator
installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
INSTALLATION
A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation
and alignment instructions and with NFPA 110.
B.
Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing
connections or accessories, for periodic maintenance.
C.
Install packaged engine generator with restrained spring isolators having a
minimum deflection of 25 mm on 100-mm high concrete base.
D.
Install Schedule 40, black steel piping with welded joints and connect to
engine muffler. Install thimble at wall. Piping shall be same diameter as
muffler outlet.
1.
E.
3.3
3.4
Electrical Wiring:
Install electrical devices furnished by equipment
manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.
B.
Connect fuel, cooling-system, and exhaust-system piping adjacent to
packaged engine generator to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector.
D.
Ground equipment according to Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding"
E.
Connect wiring according to Section 16120 " Conductors and Cables."
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.5
Install condensate drain piping to muffler drain outlet full size of drain
connection with a shutoff valve, stainless-steel flexible connector, and
Schedule 40, black steel pipe with welded joints.
Identify system
Identification”.
components
according
to
Section 16075
"Electrical
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform
tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service:
Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and
equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.
Page 13 of 13
ENGINE GENERATORS
Technical Specifications
C.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1.
D.
Page 14 of 13
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment
installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each electrical test
and visual and mechanical inspection for "AC Generators and for
Emergency Systems" specified in NETA Acceptance Testing
Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2.
NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110
that are additional to those specified here including, but not limited to,
single-step full-load pickup test.
3.
Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual cell voltages.
a.
Measure charging voltage and voltages between available
battery terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions.
Check electrolyte level and specific gravity under both
conditions.
b.
Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity
load test and a capacity load test for the battery.
c.
Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery
after discharge.
d.
Verify that measurements
specifications.
are
within
manufacturer's
4.
Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both
equalizing and float-charging conditions.
5.
System Integrity Tests:
Methodically verify proper installation,
connection, and integrity of each element of engine-generator system
before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid
leaks.
6.
Exhaust-System Back-Pressure Test: Use a manometer with a scale
exceeding 120 kPa. Connect to exhaust line close to engine exhaust
manifold. Verify that back pressure at full-rated load is within
manufacturer's written allowable limits for the engine.
7.
Exhaust Emissions Test:
criteria.
8.
Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording
oscilloscope to measure voltage and frequency transients for 50 and
100 percent step-load increases and decreases, and verify that
performance is as specified.
9.
Harmonic-Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage
under 25 percent and at 100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that
harmonic content is within specified limits.
10.
Noise Level Tests: Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating
from generator-set installation, including engine exhaust and coolingair intake and discharge, at four locations on the property line, and
compare measured levels with required values.
Comply with applicable government test
ENGINE GENERATORS
Technical Specifications
3.6
E.
Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.
F.
Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months,
traceable to standards of NIST, and adequate for making positive observation
of test results. Make calibration records available for examination on request.
G.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks
and retest until no leaks exist.
H.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
I.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
J.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and re-test as specified above.
K.
Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest
until specified requirements are met.
L.
Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay
settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values
and observations. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating
satisfactory completion of tests.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's
maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain engine generator.
**END OF SECTION**
Page 15 of 13
ENGINE GENERATORS
Technical Specifications
SECTION 16301
UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 16011, "Electrical General Requirements" applies to this section with additions
and modifications specified herein.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
Submit the following information for approval:
1.2.1
Manufacturer's Data and Shop Drawings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
1.2.2
Conduit;
Insulating Tape;
Splice kits, medium and low voltage;
Cable lubricants;
Sealing Material for Manhole and Handhole Joints;
Poured in Place Manholes;
Handhole/Manhole Frame and Cover;
Manufacturer’s Instructions:
a. Manufacturer’s directions for use of ground megger with proposed method
indicated;
b. Terminator manufacturer’s installation instructions
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
Materials and equipment shall conform to the respective specifications and standards
and to the specifications herein. Electrical ratings shall be as indicated.
2.1.1
Conduit
a. Rigid Plastic Conduit: PVC conduit shall be thick wall, “CROWN PIPES”,
"NELTEX" or “MOLDEX” brand.
2.1.2
Tape
Plastic insulating tape shall be capable of performing in a continuous
temperature environment of 80C.
2.1.3
Power Wire and Cable
a. Wire and Cable Conductor Sizes: Wire and cable conductor sizes are
designated by Square Millimeter (mm²). Conductors shall be copper.
Page 1 of 6
UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL WORKS
Technical Specifications
Insulated conductors shall bear the date of manufacture imprinted on the
wire insulation with other identification. Wire and cable manufactured more
than 6 months before deliver to the job site shall not be used. Provide
conductor identification within each enclosure where a tap, a splice or a
termination is made.
b. 600 Volt Wires and Cables: Conductor sizes are indicated by Square
Millimeter (mm2) for copper conductors. Insulated wires and cables
manufactured more than six months prior to delivery shall not be used.
Wires and cables shall be “Phelps Dodge” or “Philflex”.
c. Wire Conformation: Provide wires with type THW designation. Only wires
with "W" in the type designation shall be used in wet or damp locations.
d. 600 Volt Wire Connector and Terminals: Shall provide a uniform
compression over the entire contact surface. Solderless terminal lugs shall
be used on stranded conductors.
e. 600 Volt Splices: Provide splices with a compression connector on the
conductor and by insulating and waterproofing using one of the following
methods, which are suitable for continuous submersion in water and
comply ANSI C119.1.
1. Provide cast-type splice insulation by means of molded casting
process employing a thermosetting epoxy resin insulating material
applied by a gravity poured method or by a pressure injected method.
Provide component materials of the resin insulation in a packaged
form ready for convenient mixing without removing from the package.
2. Gravity poured method shall employ materials and equipment
contained in an approved commercial splicing kit, which includes a
mold suitable for the cables to be spliced. When the mold is in place
around the joined conductors, prepare the resin mix and pour into the
mold.
3. Provide heavy wall heat shrinkable splice insulation by means of a
thermoplastic adhesive sealant material, which shall be applied by a
clean burning propane gas torch.
4. Provide a cold-shrink rubber splice, which consists of an EPDM rubber
tube, which has been factory stretched onto a spiraled core, which is
removed during splice installation. The installation shall not require
heat or flame, or any additional materials such as covering or
adhesive. It shall be designed for use with inline compression type
connectors, or indoor, outdoor, direct-burial or submerged locations.
2.1.4
Medium Voltage Outdoor Terminations: Outdoor-type terminators shall be cold
shrink type or porcelain insulator, in conformance to IEEE 48 Class 1.
a. Cold-Shrink Type: Terminator shall be a one-piece design, where highdielectric constant (capacitive) stress control is integrated within a skirted
insulator made of silicone rubber, munsel gray in color. Termination shall
not require heat or flame for installation. Termination kit shall contain all
necessary materials (except for the lugs). Termination shall be designed
for installation in low or highly contaminated indoor and outdoor locations
and shall be rated for continuous operation at 90 degree C, with an
emergency overload temperature rating of 130 degree C.
b. Porcelain Insulator Type Terminator shall comply with requirements of
IEEE 48 Class 1, except that the requirements of design tightness test
need not be met. However, the terminator shall not exude any insulating
filler compound under either test or service. Terminator shall consist of a
Page 2 of 6
UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL WORKS
Technical Specifications
porcelain insulator, copper cable connector-hood nut assembly and
copper aerial lug as required, metal body and supporting bracket, sealed
cable entrance, internal stress relief device for shielded cable, and
insulating filler compound or material.
2.1.5
Indoor Terminations/Terminations Within Equipment Enclosures: Refer to
equipment specifications.
2.1.6
Medium Voltage Cable Joints: Provide joints in accordance with IEEE 404
suitable for the rated voltage, insulation level, and insulation type of the cable.
Upon request, supply manufacturer's design qualification test report in
accordance with IEEE 404. Connectors for joint shall be tin-plated electrolytic
copper, having ends tapered and having center stops to equalize cable
insertion. Connectors shall be rated for voltage of 35 kV, minimum.
a. Heat-shrinkable joint: Consists of a uniform cross-section heat-shrinkable
polymeric construction with a linear stress relief system, a high dielectric
strength insulating material, and an integrally bonded outer conductor
layer for shielding. Replace original cable jacket with a heavy-wall heatshrinkable sleeve with waterproof mastic seal on both ends.
b. Watertight taped-type joint: Consists of an approved connector, self-fusing
or self-bonding insulating tape, self-fusing semi-conducting tape, tinned
copper shielding tape or braid, and plastic tape.
2.1.7
Pull Wire: Pull wire shall be 2.0 mm² hot-dip galvanized steel or plastic having a
minimum tensile strength of 91 kgs in each empty duct. Minimum 305 mm of
slack shall be left at each end of pull wires.
2.1.8
Buried Warning and Identification Tape: Provide detectable aluminum foil
plastic-backed tape or detectable magnetic plastic tape manufactured
specifically for warning and identification of buried cable and conduit. Tape
shall be detectable by an electronic detection instrument. Provide tape in rolls,
50 mm minimum width, color coded for the utility involved with warning and
identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously and repeatedly over
entire tape length. Warning and identification shall be CAUTION BURIED
ELECTRIC.
2.1.9
Grounding and Bonding Equipment: Shall conform to UL.
2.1.10 Underground Structures: Cast-in-place trenches and handholes. Cast-in-place
concrete handholes shall have a smooth trowel finish for floors and horizontal
surfaces. Construct walls on a footing of cast-in-place concrete. Top, walls, and
bottom shall consist of reinforced concrete. Walls and bottom shall be of
monolithic concrete construction. Duct entrances and windows shall be located
near the corners of structures to facilities cable racking. Covers shall fit the
frames without undue play. Steel and iron shall be formed to shape and size
with sharp lines and angles. Castings shall be free from warp and blowholes
that may impair their strength or appearance. Exposed metal shall have a
smooth finish and sharp lines and arises. Provide all necessary lugs, rabbets,
and brackets. Set pulling-in irons and other built-in items in place before
depositing concrete. A pulling-in iron shall be installed in the wall opposite each
duct line entrance. The word "ELECTRICAL" and “TELECOM” shall be cast in
the top face of all power and telephone/CATV handhole covers, respectively.
Cable racks, including rack arms and insulators, shall be adequate to
Page 3 of 6
UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL WORKS
Technical Specifications
accommodate the cable.
2.1.11 Drainage Pipe and Fittings: Cast-iron, extra strength. Drain shall be cast-iron,
coated or uncoated, plain pattern, bottom outlet with perforated or slotted
hinged cover.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
Underground cable installation shall conform to Philippine Electrical Code.
3.1.1
Concrete: Unless indicated on plans, concrete for electrical requirements shall
be at least 211 kg per square centimeter concrete with 2.54 cm maximum
aggregate.
3.1.2
Earthwork:
Excavation, backfilling, and pavement repairs for electrical
requirements shall conform to the requirements of existing Civil Works
specifications.
3.1.3
Underground Duct With Concrete Encasement: Construct underground duct
lines of individual conduits encased in concrete.
Except where rigid
galvanized steel conduit is indicated or specified, the conduit shall be of
Schedule 40 PVC. Do not mix the kind of conduit used in any one duct bank.
Ducts shall not be smaller than 102 mm in diameter unless otherwise indicated.
The concrete encasement surrounding the bank shall be rectangular in crosssection and shall provide at least 76 mm of concrete cover for ducts. Separate
conduits by a minimum concrete thickness of 50 mm, except separate light and
power conduits from control and signal/telecomm, conduits by a minimum
concrete thickness of 76 mm.
3.1.3.1 The top of the concrete envelope shall not be less than 0.46 m below
grade except that under roads and pavement it shall be not less than
0.60 m below grade.
3.1.3.2 Duct lines shall have a continuous slope downward toward
manholes/handholes and away from buildings with a pitch of not less
than 76 mm in 30 m. Except at conduit risers, accomplish changes in
direction of runs exceeding a total of 10 degrees, either vertical or
horizontal, by long sweep bends having a minimum radius of curvature
of 7.6 m. Sweep bends may be made up of one or more curved or
straight sections or combinations thereof. Manufactured bends shall
have a minimum radius of 0.46 m for use with conduits of less than 76
mm in diameter and a minimum radius of 0.91 m for ducts of 76 mm in
diameter and larger.
3.1.3.3 Terminate conduits in end-bells where duct lines
manholes/handholes. Separators shall be of pre-cast concrete.
enter
Stagger the joints of the conduits by rows and layers so as to provide a
duct line having the maximum strength. During construction, protect
partially completed duct lines from the entrance of debris such as mud,
sand and dirt by means of suitable conduit plugs. As each section of a
duct line is completed from manholes/handhole to manholes/handhole,
draw a brush through having the diameter of the duct, and having stiff
bristles until the conduit is clear of all particles of earth, sand, and
gravel; then immediately install conduit plugs.
3.1.4
Page 4 of 6
Cast-in-Place Service Boxes: Provide cast-in-place service boxes as indicated.
UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL WORKS
Technical Specifications
3.1.5
Ground Rods: In each electric manhole, at a convenient point close to the wall,
a 20 mm by 3048 mm copper-clad steel ground rod shall be driven into the
earth before the floor is poured so that approximately 100 mm of the ground
rod will extend above the trench manhole and handhole floor. When precast
concrete manholes and handholes are used, the top of the ground rod may be
below the floor and a 50 mm tinned ground conductor brought into the
handhole through a watertight sleeve in the handhole wall.
3.1.6
Cable Pulling: Test duct lines with a mandrel and thoroughly swab out to
remove foreign material before the pulling of cables. Pull cables down grade
with the feed-in-point at the junction box or buildings of the highest elevation.
Use flexible cable feeds to convey cables through the manholes/handholes
opening and into the duct runs. Cable slack shall be accumulated at each
manholes/handhole or junction box where space permits by training the cable
around the interior to form one complete loop. Minimum allowable bending
radii shall be maintained in forming such loops.
3.1.6.1 Lubricants for assisting in the pulling of jacketed cables shall be those
specifically recommended by the cable manufacturer. Cable lubricants
shall be soapstone, graphite, or talk for rubber or plastic jacketed
cables. The lubricant shall not be deleterious to the jacket or outer
coverings.
3.1.6.2 Cable pulling tensions shall not exceed the maximum pulling tension
recommended by the cable manufacturer.
3.1.7
Grounding: Non-current carrying metallic parts associated with electrical
equipment shall have a maximum resistance to “solid” earth ground not
exceeding the following values:
a. Generating and control equipment 1000 volts and over: 1 ohm
b. Main substations, distribution substations, switching stations, primary
distribution stations enclosed by fences:
1. 500 kVA or less: 5 ohms;
2. 500 kVA to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms;
3. 1000 kVA or over: 3 ohms;
c. Pad-mounted transformers without protective fences: 5 ohms;
d. Ground in manholes, handholes, and vaults: 5 ohms;
e. Grounding other metal enclosures of primary voltage electrical and
electrically-operated equipment: 5 ohms;
f.
Grounded secondary distribution system neutral and noncurrent-carrying
metal parts associated with distribution systems and grounds not
otherwise covered: 5 ohms;
When work in addition to that indicated or specified is directed in order to obtain
the specified ground resistance, the provisions of the contract covering
“Changes” shall apply.
Grounding electrodes: Provide cone pointed driven ground rods driven full
depth plus 150 mm, installed to provide an earth ground of the appropriate
value for the particular equipment being grounded.
3.1.7.1 Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally
inaccessible, and excepting specifically those connections for which
Page 5 of 6
UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL WORKS
Technical Specifications
access for periodic testing is required by exothermic type process.
Make fusion-welding process strictly in accordance with the weld
manufacturer’s written recommendations. Welds which have “puffed
up” or which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning is not
acceptable.
No mechanical connector is required at thermic
weldments.
3.1.7.2 In lieu fusion-welding process, a compression ground grid connector of
a type, which uses hydraulic compression tool to provide the correct
circumferential pressure, may be used. Tools and dies shall be as
recommended by the manufacturer. An embossing die code or other
standard method shall provide visible indication that a connector has
been adequately compressed on the ground wire.
3.1.7.3 Grounding conductors shall be bare soft-drawn copper wire 14 mm
minimum unless otherwise indicated or specified.
3.1.7.4 Connect copper-clad steel ground rods only to insulated THW copper
ground conductor and weld the connection. Insulate the entire area of
the rod in the vicinity of the weld and the connecting wire and seal
against moisture penetration.
3.1.8
3.2
Provide all empty conduits with a 2.0 mm zinc coated steel wire or a plastic
rope having a breaking strength of at least 90 kgs. Leave 610 mm of spare at
each end of the pull.
FIELD TESTS
As an exception to requirements that may be stated elsewhere in the contract, the
Owner shall be given 4 working days notice prior to each test.
3.2.1
Distribution Conductors 600 Volt Class: Test all 600-volt class conductors to
verify that no short circuits or accidental grounds exist. Make tests using an
instrument, which applies a voltage of approximately 500 volts to provide a
direct reading in resistance.
3.2.2
Ground Rods: Test ground rods for ground resistance value before any wire is
connected. Use a portable ground testing megger to test each ground or group
of grounds. The instrument shall be equipped with a meter reading directly in
ohms or fractions thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground electrode
under test. Provide one copy of the megger manufacturer's directions for use
of the ground megger indicating the method to be used.
3.2.3
Test Report:
600-volt cables (identify each cable & test result).
Grounding Electrodes & Systems (identify electrodes and systems, each test).
*** END OF SECTION ***
Page 6 of 6
UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL WORKS
Technical Specifications
SECTION 16410
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
Section Includes:
1.
Disconnect Switches
2.
Individually mounted, enclosed circuit breakers.
3.
Molded-case switches.
DEFINITIONS
A.
NC: Normally closed.
B.
NO: Normally open.
C.
SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory,
and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights,
and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical
characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.
1.
Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
2.
Current and voltage ratings.
3.
Short-circuit current
appropriate).
4.
Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.
5.
Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of
individual overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary
components.
6.
Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type
and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges
for each type of overcurrent protective device.
ratings
(interrupting
withstand,
as
Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans,
elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
D.
Field quality-control reports.
Page 1 of 4
and
1.
Test procedures used.
2.
Test results that comply with requirements.
3.
Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test
results that comply with requirements.
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES
Technical Specifications
1.5
E.
Manufacturer's field service report.
F.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers
to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to
items specified in Division 1 Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance
Data," include the following:
1.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed
switches and circuit breakers.
2.
Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and
rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for
each type of overcurrent protective device.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1.
1.6
Source Limitations:
Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers,
overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same
product category, from single source from single manufacturer.
C.
Product Selection for Restricted Space:
Drawings indicate maximum
dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances
between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with
indicated maximum dimensions.
D.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended
location and application.
E.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under
the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30
deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).
2.
Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m).
COORDINATION
A.
1.8
Currently certified by NETA to
B.
A.
1.7
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor:
supervise on-site testing.
Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and
components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required
workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Page 2 of 4
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.
Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and
type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.
2.
Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES
Technical Specifications
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
MOLDED-CASE SWITCHES
A.
General Requirements: MCCB with fixed, high-set instantaneous trip only,
and short-circuit withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size
interrupting rating.
B.
Features and Accessories:
1.
Standard frame sizes and number of poles.
2.
Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and
conductor material.
3.
Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; remote-mounted and
powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with
adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature,
internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence
current transformer/sensor.
4.
Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing
contact.
5.
Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage
without intentional time delay.
6.
Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a"
contacts mimic switch contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of
switch contacts.
7.
Alarm Switch: One NC contact that operates only when switch has
tripped.
8.
Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit switch operation; key
shall be removable only when switch is in off position.
9.
Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with ground-fault shunt trip unit;
for interlocking ground-fault protection function.
10.
Electrical Operator:
operations.
11.
Accessory Control Power Voltage: Integrally mounted, self-powered
240-V ac.
Provide remote control for on, off, and reset
ENCLOSURES
A.
Page 3 of 4
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers:
NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1,
NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed
location.
1.
Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
2.
Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
3.
Kitchen and Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.
4.
Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
5.
Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping
Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.
6.
Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, Type 9.
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES
Technical Specifications
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit
breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at
uniform height unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 16
Section 16074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and
brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and
components.
D.
Install fuses in fusible devices.
E.
Comply with NECA 1.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.4
Comply with requirements
Identification."
in
Division 16
Section
16075
interconnecting
"Electrical
1.
Identify field-installed conductors,
components; provide warning signs.
wiring,
and
2.
Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic
nameplate.
FILED QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency:
inspections.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service:
Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and
equipment installations, including connections.
C.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
D.
E.
Page 4 of 4
Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment
installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit
breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test
stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance
with test parameters.
2.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES
Technical Specifications
3.
4.
3.5
Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare
reports:
a.
Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not
more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared
scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front
panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable
scanner.
b.
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up
infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11
months after date of Substantial Completion.
c.
Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device
designed to measure temperature or to detect significant
deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for
device.
Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace
damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
F.
Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do
not pass tests and inspections.
G.
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies
enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results.
Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and
observations after remedial action.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and
lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 16
Section 16055 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination".
**END OF SECTION**
Page 5 of 4
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES
Technical Specifications
SECTION 16415
TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
Related Documents
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
Summary
A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Automatic transfer switches.
Bypass/isolation switches.
Non-automatic transfer switches.
Remote annunciation systems.
Remote annunciation and control systems.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Division 13 Section 13921 "Electric-Drive, Centrifugal Fire
Pumps" for automatic transfer switches for fire pumps.
Submittals
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated
capacities, weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties,
and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details
showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter
space, installed features and devices, and material lists for each
switch specified.
1.
C.
Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification
that transfer switches accessories, and components will withstand
seismic forces defined in Division 16 Section 16073 and 16074
"Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems and Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" Include the following:
1.
Page 1 of 9
Single-Line Diagram:
Show connections between transfer
switch, bypass/isolation switch, power sources, and load; and
show interlocking provisions for each combined transfer switch
and bypass/isolation switch.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is
based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
a.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place
without separation of any parts from the device when
subjected to the seismic forces specified."
b.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place
without separation of any parts from the device when
subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will
be fully operational after the seismic event."
TRANSFER SWITCHES
Technical Specifications
2.
3.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify
center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and
anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which
the certification is based and their installation requirements.
D.
Qualification Data: For manufacturer and testing agency.
E.
Field quality-control test reports.
F.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include
in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to
items specified in Division 1 Section 01782 "Operation and
Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual.
2.
List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and
calibration instructions, including software, where applicable.
1.4
Quality Assurance
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of
providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs within a
response period of less than eight hours from time of notification.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the
experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a
member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or
is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by
OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
A.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by
the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National
Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise
on-site testing specified in Part 3.
C.
Source Limitations:
Obtain automatic transfer switches,
bypass/isolation switches, nonautomatic transfer switches, remote
annunciators and remote annunciator and control panels through one
source from a single manufacturer.
D.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled
as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
E.
Comply with NEMA ICS 1.
F.
Comply with PEC.
G.
Comply with NFPA 99.
H.
Comply with NFPA 110.
Page 2 of 9
TRANSFER SWITCHES
Technical Specifications
I.
1.6
Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are
stricter.
Coordination
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt
inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
requirements are specified in Division 3.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
1.6
General Transfer-Switch Product Requirements
A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous
loading and total system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not
exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty
imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the
fault conditions indicated, based on testing according to UL 1008.
C. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or
minus 2 percent or better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to
plus 70 deg C.
D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or
exceed voltage-surge withstand capability requirements when tested
according to IEEE C62.41. Components shall meet or exceed voltageimpulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.
E. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized
solenoid or electric-motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically
interlocked in both directions.
F. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of
full-rated current between active power sources.
1.
2.
3.
Limitation: Switches using molded-case switches or circuit
breakers or insulated-case circuit-breaker components are not
acceptable.
Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both
directions.
Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current
switching. Conventional automatic transfer-switch units, rated
225 A and higher, shall have separate arcing contacts.
G. Neutral Switching. Where four-pole switches are indicated, provide neutral
pole switched simultaneously with phase poles.
H. Oversize Neutral: Ampacity and switch rating of neutral path through units
indicated for oversize neutral shall be double the nominal rating of circuit in
which switch is installed.
Page 3 of 9
TRANSFER SWITCHES
Technical Specifications
I.
Annunciation, Control, and Programming Interface Components: Devices at
transfer switches for communicating with remote programming devices,
annunciators, or annunciator and control panels shall have communication
capability matched with remote device.
J. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with
Shop Drawings, either by color-code or by numbered or lettered wire and
cable tape markers at terminations. Color-coding and wire and cable tape
markers are specified in Division 16 Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."
1.
2.
3.
Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and
sizes of field wiring indicated.
Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space:
Suitable for top, side, or bottom entrance of feeder conductors
as indicated.
Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to
terminal strips.
K. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 1, 3R, 12, complying with
NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3
Automatic Transfer Switches
A.
Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.
B.
Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or
intermediate position stops during normal functioning, unless
otherwise indicated.
C.
Manual Switch Operation: Under load, with door closed and with
either or both sources energized. Transfer time is same as for
electrical operation. Control circuit automatically disconnects from
electrical operator during manual operation.
D.
Manual Switch Operation: Unloaded. Control circuit automatically
disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation.
E.
Signal-Before-Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally
closed dry contacts operates in advance of retransfer to normal
source. Interval is adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds.
F.
Digital Communication Interface: Matched to capability of remote
annunciator or annunciator and control panel.
G.
Transfer Switches Based on Molded-Case-Switch Components:
Comply with NEMA AB 1, UL 489, and UL 869A.
H.
Motor Disconnect and Timing Relay: Controls designate starters so
they disconnect motors before transfer and reconnect them selectively
at an adjustable time interval after transfer. Control connection to
motor starters is through wiring external to automatic transfer switch.
Time delay for reconnecting individual motor loads is adjustable
between 1 and 60 seconds, and settings are as indicated. Relay
contacts handling motor-control circuit inrush and seal currents are
rated for actual currents to be encountered.
Page 4 of 9
TRANSFER SWITCHES
Technical Specifications
I.
Automatic Transfer-Switch Features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Page 5 of 9
Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense
low phase-to-ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage
shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal, and
dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup
value. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85
percent.
Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage
sensing to delay transfer and engine start signals. Adjustable
from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one second.
Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer
to generator. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100
percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent. Pickup
frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal.
Factory set for pickup at 95 percent.
Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0
to 30 minutes, and factory set for 10 minutes to automatically
defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage of
emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored.
Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure.
Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is
connected.
Source-Available Indicating Lights:
Supervise sources via
transfer-switch normal- and emergency-source sensing circuits.
a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate
engraved "Normal Source Available."
b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate
engraved "Emergency Source Available."
Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole,
double-throw contacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at
240-V ac.
Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control
so automatic transfer switch will remain connected to emergency
power source regardless of condition of normal source. Pilot
light indicates override status.
Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed,
and one isolated and normally open; rated 10 A at 32-V dc
minimum.
Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to
five minutes, and factory set for five minutes. Contacts shall
initiate shutdown at remote engine-generator controls after
retransfer of load to normal source.
Engine-Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable-time
switch starts engine generator and transfers load to it from
normal source for a preset time, then retransfers and shuts down
engine after a preset cool-down period. Initiates exercise cycle
at preset intervals adjustable from 7 to 30 days. Running
periods are adjustable from 10 to 30 minutes. Factory settings
are for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-minute running period, and 5minute cool-down period.
Exerciser features include the
following:
TRANSFER SWITCHES
Technical Specifications
a.
b.
c.
2.4
Bypass/Isolation Switches
A.
Comply with requirements for Level 1 equipment according to
NFPA 110.
B.
Description: Manual type, arranged to select and connect either
source of power directly to load, isolating transfer switch from load and
from both power sources. Include the following features for each
combined automatic transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
2.6
Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of
exercise with and without load transfer.
Push-button programming control with digital display of
settings.
Integral battery operation of time switch when normal
control power is not available.
Means to lock bypass/isolation switch in the position that
isolates transfer switch with an arrangement that permits
complete electrical testing of transfer switch while isolated.
While isolated, interlocks prevent transfer-switch operation,
except for testing or maintenance.
Drawout Arrangement for Transfer Switch: Provide physical
separation from live parts and accessibility for testing and
maintenance operations.
Bypass/Isolation Switch Current, Voltage, Closing, and ShortCircuit Withstand Ratings: Equal to or greater than those of
associated automatic transfer switch, and with same phase
arrangement and number of poles.
Contact temperatures of bypass/isolation switches shall not
exceed those of automatic transfer-switch contacts when they
are carrying rated load.
Operability: Constructed so load bypass and transfer-switch
isolation can be performed by 1 person in no more than 2
operations in 15 seconds or less.
Legend: Manufacturer's standard legend for control labels and
instruction signs shall describe operating instructions.
Maintainability: Fabricate to allow convenient removal of major
components from front without removing other parts or main
power conductors.
Interconnection of Bypass/Isolation Switches with Automatic Transfer
Switches: Factory-installed copper bus bars; plated at connection
points and braced for the indicated available short-circuit current.
Remote Annunciator System
A.
Functional Description: Remote annunciator panel shall annunciate
conditions for indicated transfer switches. Annunciation shall include
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Page 6 of 9
Sources available, as defined by actual pickup and dropout
settings of transfer-switch controls.
Switch position.
Switch in test mode.
Failure of communication link.
TRANSFER SWITCHES
Technical Specifications
B.
Annunciator Panel: LED-lamp type with audible signal and silencing
switch.
1. Indicating Lights: Grouped for each transfer switch monitored.
2.
Label each group, indicating transfer switch it monitors,
location of switch, and identity of load it serves.
3.
Mounting: Flush, modular, steel cabinet, unless otherwise
indicated.
4.
Lamp Test: Push-to-test or lamp-test switch on front panel.
2.7
Remote Annunciator and Control System
A.
Functional Description: Include the following functions for indicated
transfer switches:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
2.8
Indication of sources available, as defined by actual pickup
and dropout settings of transfer-switch controls.
Indication of switch position.
Indication of switch in test mode.
Indication of failure of digital communication link.
Key-switch or user-code access to control functions of panel.
Control of switch-test initiation.
Malfunction of annunciator, annunciation and control panel, or
communication link shall not affect functions of automatic transfer
switch. In the event of failure of communication link, automatic
transfer switch automatically reverts to stand-alone, self-contained
operation. Automatic transfer-switch sensing, controlling, or operating
function shall not depend on remote panel for proper operation.
Source Quality Control
A.
Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and
associated equipment. Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time
and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for compliance with
specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying
with NEMA ICS 1.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
Installation
A.
Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic
requirements and according to seismic-restraint details.
See
Division 16 Section 16073 and 16074 "Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems and Vibration and Seismic controls for Electrical
Systems" respectively.
B.
Floor-Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting.
1.
Page 7 of 9
Concrete Bases: 4 inches (100 mm) high, reinforced, with
chamfered edges. Extend base no more than 4 inches (100
mm) in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of
switch, unless otherwise indicated or unless required for
TRANSFER SWITCHES
Technical Specifications
seismic support. Construct concrete bases according to
Division 16 Section 16073 and 16074 "Hangers and Supports
for Electrical Systems and Vibration and Seismic controls for
Electrical Systems" respectively.
3.2
3.3
C.
Annunciator and Control Panel Mounting:
otherwise indicated.
Flush in wall, unless
D.
Identify components according to Division 16 Section "Electrical
Identification."
E.
Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser
clock.
Connections
A.
Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables
and conductors to control and communication requirements of transfer
switches as recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes
at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required
wiring.
B.
Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section 16060 "Grounding
and Bonding."
C.
Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section 16120 "Conductors
and Cables."
Field Quality Control
A.
Testing Agency:
Engage a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test
reports.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies,
and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in
writing.
C.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Page 8 of 9
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized
service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and
equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in
testing.
After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical
test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify
compliance with test parameters.
Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-toground with insulation-resistance tester. Include external
annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and
TRANSFER SWITCHES
Technical Specifications
5.
6.
D.
Page 9 of 9
procedure recommended by manufacturer.
Comply with
manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.
a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short
circuits.
b.
Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and
connection, and integrity of barriers, covers, and safety
features.
c.
Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.
d.
Perform manual transfer operation.
After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence
and operational function for each switch at least three times.
a.
Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic
transfer switches and of emergency source with normal
source available.
b.
Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase
of normal source.
c.
Verify time-delay settings.
d.
Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or
inspection of control settings.
e.
Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related
automatic transfer-switch operations.
f.
Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and
correct values exceeding 500 microhms and values for 1
pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles.
g.
Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic
engine starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay
on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down
and shutdown.
Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault
protective devices for power delivery from both sources.
a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of
sensors.
Testing Agency's Tests and Inspections:
1.
After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical
test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify
compliance with test parameters.
3.
Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-toground with insulation-resistance tester. Include external
annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and
procedure recommended by manufacturer.
Comply with
manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.
a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short
circuits.
b.
Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and
connection, and integrity of barriers, covers, and safety
features.
c.
Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.
d.
Perform manual transfer operation.
TRANSFER SWITCHES
Technical Specifications
4.
After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence
and operational function for each switch at least three times.
a.
Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic
transfer switches and of emergency source with normal
source available.
b.
Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase
of normal source.
c.
Verify time-delay settings.
d.
Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or
inspection of control settings.
e.
Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related
automatic transfer-switch operations.
f.
Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and
correct values exceeding 500 microhms and values for 1
pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles.
g.
Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic
engine starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay
on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down
and shutdown.
5.
Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault
protective devices for power delivery from both sources.
a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of
sensors.
E.
Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.
F.
Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable
relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and
time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating
satisfactory completion of tests.
G.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified
above.
H.
Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60
days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switch.
Remove all access panels so joints and connections are accessible to
portable scanner.
1.
2.
3.
3.4
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up
infrared scan of each switch 11 months after date of
Substantial Completion.
Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to
measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from
normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that
identifies switches checked and that describes scanning
results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial
action taken and observations after remedial action.
Demonstration
A.
Page 10 of 9
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train
EMPLOYER’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and
TRANSFER SWITCHES
Technical Specifications
maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below.
B.
Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.
** END OF SECTION *
Page 11 of 9
TRANSFER SWITCHES
Technical Specifications
SECTION 16442
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor shall furnish and install distribution and lighting panelboards as
hereinafter specified or as shown on the Drawings.
1.2
SUBMITTALS:
A. Catalog for circuit breakers.
B. Shop drawing for panelboards.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
RATING
Panelboard ratings shall be as shown on the Drawings. All panelboards shall be rated
for the intended voltage.
2.2
STANDARDS
Panelboards shall be in accordance with the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. “Standard
for Panelboards” and “Standard for Cabinets and Boxes” and shall be so labeled where
procedures exist. Panelboards shall also comply with NEMA Standards for
Panelboards, and the PEC.
2.3
CONSTRUCTION
A. Interiors

All interiors shall be completely factory assembled with circuit breakers, wire
connectors, etc. All wire connectors, except screw terminals, shall be of the
anti-turn solderless type and shall be suitable for copper or aluminum wire of
the sizes indicated.

Interiors shall be designed that circuit breakers can be replaced without
disturbing adjacent units and without removing the main bus connectors and
shall be so designed that circuit may be changed without machining, drilling or
tapping.

Branch circuits shall be arranged using double row construction. Branch circuits
shall be numbered by the manufacturer.

A nameplate shall be provided with a listing panel type, number of circuit
breakers and ratings.
B. Buses

Page 1 of 2
Bus bars for the main shall be copper. Full size neutral bars shall be included.
Bus bar taps for panels with single pole branches shall be arranged for
sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. Busing shall be braced
throughout to conform to industry standard practice governing short circuit
stresses in panelboards. Phase busing shall be full height without reduction.
Cross connectors shall be copper.
PANELBOARDS
Technical Specifications

Neutral busing shall have a suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a
neutral connection.

Spaces for future circuit breakers shall be bussed for the maximum device that
can be fitted into them.
C. Boxes

Boxes shall be made from galvanized code gauge steel having multiple
knockouts unless otherwise noted. Surface mounted boxes shall be painted to
match the trim. Boxes shall be of sufficient size to provide a minimum gutter
space of 100 mm on all sides.

At least four interior mounting studs shall be provided.
D. Trim

Hinged doors covering all circuit breakers handles shall be included in all panel
trims.

Doors shall have semi-flush type cylinder lock and catch except that doors over
1.25 m in height shall have a vault handle and 3-point catch complete with lock,
arranged to fasten door at top, bottom and center. Door hinges shall be
concealed. Two keys shall be supplied for each lock. All locks shall be keyed
alike; directory frame and card having a transparent cover shall be furnished on
each door.

The trim shall be fabricated from standard gauge sheet steel.

All interior and exterior steel surfaces of the panelboards shall be properly
cleaned and finished with light gray enamel paint over rust inhibiting
phosphatized coating. The finished paint shall be of a type to which field applied
paint will adhere.

Trim for flush mounted panels shall overlap the box by at least 20 mm all
around. Surface trim shall have the same width and height as the box. Trim
shall be fastened with quarter turn clamps.
E. Circuit Breakers

Panelboards shall be equipped with circuit breakers with frame size and trip
settings shown on the Drawings.

Branch circuit breakers shall be molded case, bolt-on type.

Circuit breakers used in 240/120-volt panelboards shall have an interrupting
capacity of not less than 10,000 amperes, RMS, symmetrical.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Surface mounted boxes shall be mounted so there is at least 15 mm air space
between the box and the wall.
B. Mount panelboards so the height of the operating handle at its highest position will
not exceed two (2) meters from the floor.
3.2
TESTING:
A. Operate circuit breakers three times, demonstrating satisfactory operation each
time.
** END OF SECTION **
Page 2 of 2
PANELBOARDS
Technical Specifications
SECTION 16450
GROUNDING SYSTEM
PART 1 – REFERENCE
Requirements of Section 16050 apply to all work under this Section.
PART 2 - GENERAL
Furnish all materials and labor required to ground the panelboards, motor frames,
conduit systems, and all other electrical equipment.
PART 3 - MATERIALS
A. Ground Rods: Copper clad, 20mm dia. X 3000 mm, brand shall be KUMWELL or
approved equal. Detail as shown on drawings.
B. Ground Cable: Stranded soft-drawn copper.
C. Insulators and miscellaneous installation materials: As shown on drawings.
PART 4 - INSTALLATION:
A. Raceway Grounding: Ground all conduit systems. Use double locknuts at all panels;
use bonding jumpers if conduits are installed in concentric knockouts.
B. Equipment Grounding
1. Ground separately-mounted motor controllers, motor frames, distribution
boards, switches and outlets through grounded conductor.
2. Connect all receptacles to grounding conductor.
3. Ground transformer cases and neutrals as required.
4. All conduit systems shall be provided with a ground wire sized as per PEC.
PART 5 - TESTS
A. Ground rod-earth resistance test:
1. Test each ground rod by single test “Megger” method.
2. Test equipment: To be furnished by CONTRACTOR, equal to “Megger”.
B. Test report: Submit typewritten report, equipment used, person or persons
performing the tests, date tested, circuits or equipment tested, and results of tests.
END OF SECTION
Page 1 of 1
GROUNDING SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
SECTION 16510
INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor shall furnish and install lighting fixtures, photocell switches, contactors,
and battery-powered units and systems for interior use, including lighting fixtures and
accessories mounted on the exterior surfaces of the building.
1.2
STANDARDS
All lighting fixtures shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the PEC and shall
be constructed in accordance with the latest edition of the Underwriters Laboratories
“Standards for Safety, Electric Lighting Fixtures” and shall be labeled where
procedures exist. All lighting fixtures are for operation on a nominal 230 volts power
supply.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Catalog for lighting fixtures, including lamps and ballasts.
B. Shop Drawing/Samples of proposed lighting fixtures might be required by the
Engineer for approval prior to installation.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
Lighting Fixtures
Provide lighting fixtures as indicated in the drawings:
A. Fluorescent Lighting fixture

2.2
Fluorescent ballast shall be UL listed, high power factor type and shall be
designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected.
Ballast shall be Class P and shall have sound rating “A” unless otherwise
noted. Fixtures and ballast shall be designed and constructed to limit the
ballast case temperature to 900 C when installed in an ambient temperature of
400 C.
Emergency Lighting Units

Emergency lighting units shall be fully automatic with 2 x PAR 36 W lamps and
12 volts sealed nickel cadmium, calcium-alloy grid batteries. Each unit shall be
designed for 230 volts, 60 Hz input and have an automatic two-rate solid state
charger, ready/off switch, press-to-test switch, amber “ready” light, red “charge”
light, and front mounted voltmeter.

Each emergency lighting unit shall be equipped with a time delay relay to
maintain emergency lighting on for three (3) minutes after return of normal
power.
Page 1 of 2
INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Install lighting fixtures plumb, square, and level with ceiling walls, in alignment with
adjacent lighting fixture, and secure in accordance with manufacturer’s directions
and approved shop drawings.
B. The installation shall meet with the requirements of the Philippine Electrical Code
(PEC).
C. Mounting heights specified or indicated shall be to bottom of fixture for ceilingmounted fixtures and to center of fixture for wall-mounted fixtures.
D. Obtain approval of the exact mounting for lighting fixtures on the job before
installation is commenced and where applicable, after coordinating with the type,
style, and pattern of the ceiling being installed.
E. Recessed and semi-recessed fixtures may be supported from suspended ceiling
support system ceiling tees if the ceiling system support rods or wires are provided
at a minimum of four rods of wires per fixture and located not more than 152 mm
from each corner of each fixture. Four round fixtures or fixtures smaller in size than
the ceiling acoustical panels, support such fixtures independently or with at least
two 19 mm metal channels spanning, and secured to, the ceiling tees. Provide
rods or wires for lighting fixture support under this section of the specifications.
Additionally, for recessed fixtures, provide support clips securely fastened to ceiling
grid members, a minimum of one at one at or near each corner of each fixture.
F. Emergency Lights: Wire emergency lights ahead of the switch to the normal
lighting circuit located in the same room or area.
3.2
GROUNDING: Ground noncurrent-carrying part of equipment as specified in Section
16450, “Grounding System”. Where the copper-grounding conductor is connected to a
metal other than copper, provide specially treated or lined connectors suitable for this
purpose.
3.3
FIELD TESTS:
The Contractor will provide electric power required for field tests:
A. Operating Test: Upon completion of the installation, conduct an operating test to
show that the equipment operates in accordance with the requirements of this
section.
** END OF SECTION **
Page 2 of 2
INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
SECTION 16690
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section includes lightning protection for structure using early streamer emission
type (ESE air terminal.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For air terminals and mounting accessories.
1.
Layout of the lightning protection system, along with details of the
components to be used in the installation.
2.
Include indications for use of raceway, data on how concealment
requirements will be met, and method of bonding of grounded and isolated
metal bodies.
C.
Field quality-control reports.
D.
Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of
grounding features, including the following:
E.
1.4
A.
1.5
1.
Ground rods.
2.
Ground loop conductor.
Certificate of approving authorities
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The system to be provided shall be the standard product of a manufacturer
regularly engaged in the production of lightning protection systems and shall be the
manufacturers latest approved design.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of lightning protection with installation of other building
systems and components, including electrical wiring, supporting structures and
building materials, metal bodies requiring bonding to lightning protection
components, and building finishes.
B.
Coordinate installation of air terminals attached to roof systems with roofing
manufacturer and Installer.
C.
Flashings of through-roof assemblies shall comply with roofing manufacturers'
specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
LIGHTING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Acceptable Manufacturers: See Section 16007 “Alternative Equipment and Suppliers”.
Page 1 of 3
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
Technical Specifications
B.
The air termination shall be of the type that responds dynamically to the appearance
of a lightning downleader by creating free electrons and photo-ionization between a
spherical surface and an earthed central finial.
C.
Arcing is not to be continuous and shall only occur during the progress of the lightning
leader. Arcing shall not occur solely due to electro-static field when a thunderstorm is
overhead except when there is leader activity in the region.
D.
The air termination shall not cause high frequency radio interference except during the
millisecond intervals associated with the progress of the lightning leader and during
the main return strike of lightning levels in the region.
E.
The air termination shall be non radioactive and require no special licensing.
F.
The external shape of the terminal shall be such as to significantly reduce the buildup
of sharp point corona discharge under static field thunderstorm conditions.
G.
The air termination shall not be dependent on batteries or external power supplies for
any part of its operation. It shall have no moving parts.
H.
The materials of the air terminations shall be non corroding in normal atmosphere.
The center earthed finial shall be at least 300 mm2 in cross section and be made of
electric grade non ferrous material. The outer metallic surfaces of the terminal shall be
manufactured of anodized aluminum.
I.
The air termination shall be insulated from the protected structure under all conditions.
J.
The size of the collection volume and attractive radius of the air termination shall be
traceable to known and acceptable lighting research and statistics.
K.
The termination shall be mounted a minimum of 10 meters from the ground.
L.
The air termination shall be installed strictly to the manufacturer’s instructions. It shall
not be installed in corrosive environments or atmospheres without written approval
from the manufacturer.
M.
The protective zone provided by the air termination shall be such that it becomes the
preferred strike point for all discharges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install lightning protection components and systems according to Manufacturer’s
recommendation.
B.
Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections. Avoid
sharp bends.
C.
Conceal the following conductors:
1.
System conductors.
2.
Down conductors.
3.
Interior conductors.
4.
Conductors within normal view of exterior locations at grade within 200 feet
(60 m) of building.
D.
Cable Connections: Use crimped or bolted connections for all conductor splices
and connections between conductors and other components. Use exothermicwelded connections in underground portions of the system.
E.
Cable Connections: Use exothermic-welded connections for all conductor splices
and connections between conductors and other components.
Page 2 of 3
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
Technical Specifications
1.
Exception: In single-ply membrane roofing, exothermic-welded connections
may be used only below the roof level.
F.
Bond extremities of vertical metal bodies exceeding 20 m in length to lightning
protection components.
G.
Ground Loop: Install ground-level, potential equalization conductor and extend
around the perimeter of structure.
H.
3.2
1.
Bury ground ring not less than (600 mm) from building foundation.
2.
Bond ground terminals to the ground loop.
3.
Bond grounded building systems to the ground loop conductor within 3.6 m of
grade level.
Bond lightning protection components with intermediate-level interconnection loop
conductors to grounded metal bodies of building at 60-foot (18-m) intervals.
CORROSION PROTECTION
A.
Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate
corrosion in the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from
junction of such materials.
B.
Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions cause deterioration or
corrosion of conductors.
3.3
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Notify EMPLOYER’S REPRESENTATIVE at least 48 hours in advance of
inspection before concealing lightning protection components.
** END OF SECTION **
Page 3 of 3
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
Technical Specifications
SECTION 16711
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTI0N OF WORK
The Contractor shall furnish and install the complete structure cabling system as
detailed on the drawings and described in this specification.
1.2 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only:
1.2.1
American National Standard Institute (ANSI);
1.2.2
Electronics Industry Association/Telecommunications Industry Association
(EIA/TIA)
1.2.3
National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA);
1.2.4
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE);
1.2.5
International Standards Organizations (ISO/IEC 11801);
1.2.6
Rural Electrification Administration (REA);
1.2.7
Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)U;
1.2.8
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL);
1.2.9
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA);
1.2.10 Philippine Electrical Code (PEC); and
1.2.11 National Electrical Code (NEC).
1.3 RELATED SECTION:
1.3.1
Section 16402: Interior Wiring System
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
1.4.1
The Contractor shall submit the following for approval.
a. Technical data of system components;
b. Work station outlet, cable and related accessories; c.
System layout.
1.4.2
The Contractor shall provide three (3) sets of the following, upon turn-over:
a. Operation Manual;
b. Test Reports; and
c. As-Built Plans.
1.5 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE
The Contractor shall provide system performance guarantee and product warranty
for fifteen-year from the date of final acceptance.
1.6 SYSTEM OPERATION:
1.6.1
Page 1 of 4
The system shall support voice USOC, AT&T, Northern Telecom, NEC,
IC6, 15DN, MITEC, and to support current application such as TP-PMD,
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
100Base-T, ATM 622Mbps, and 1000Base-T.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1 GENERAL
Specifications are intended to describe the requirements of Structured Cabling
System.
2.2 HORIZONTAL SYSTEM:
2.2.1
Horizontal cable: Horizontal cable shall be 100Ω, 4 pairs, Category 6,
Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP), 0.51mm (AWG 24), solid bare copper
wire, polyethylene insulated, PVC jacketed, and CMR flame rated. Cable
shall have the following transmission characteristics:
Frequency
(MHz)
100
2.2.2
Attenuation
Maximum
(dB/100m)
18.6
Minimum PSNEXT (dB)
Minimum PS-EL
FEXT (dB)
41.8
25
WORK STATION OUTLET
Workstation outlet shall be Category 6, UTP, 568A, RJ45, with the
following electrical characteristics at 200MHz.
a.
b.
c.
NEXT
FEXT
Attenuation
-
≥ 48dB
37dB; and
0.2dB.
Constructed from high impact, flame retardant thermoplastic with colorcoded snap-in identification
2.3 MAIN & INTERMEDIATE DISTRIBTUTION FRAME (MDF & IDF)
The distribution frame shall link the horizontal system & backbone system together.
Shall be composed of floor mounted rack, patch panels, terminal block, cross
connection wires, patch cord, and cable management system.
2.3.1
Cable Management Rack
Cable management rack shall be standard EIA 19” X 7 ft floor mounted rack.
Rack shall include vertical cable managers mounted on the channels with
removable covers that can handle large quantities of cables and patch cords.
2.3.2
Copper Patch Panel
Path panel shall have Category 6 electrical performance. Path panel shall
be made of black anodized aluminum 24/48 ports, TIA 568A configuration.
2.3.3
Telephone/EPABX terminal Block
Terminal block shall be rack mounted with number pair as indicated on the
plans. Terminal block shall be color coded to TIA 568B.2-1.
Mechanical Characteristic jack connector
Operating life
-
200 cycles punches down
Contact materials
-
Grade A copper alloy
Contact plating
-
Tin/Lead
Wire accommodation Page 2 of 4
Top contact
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
2 x 22-26 AWG solid/stranded
Bottom contact
1 x 22-26 AWG solid/stranded
2.3.4
Pitch
-
3.81 mm
NEXT
-
better than –53dB @ 100 MHz
Attenuation
-
<0.001 dB @ 100 MHz
Termination type
Resistance
-
Gas
Insulation
-
500 megaohms
Termination
-
<0.5 milliohms
-Tight
insulation
displacement
Cross Wire & Patch Cord
Cross connection wire and patch cord shall meet or exceed the same
category rating of connecting hardware.
2.4 BACKBONE CABLING:
2.4.1
TELEPHONE CABLE
Telephone cable shall conform to REA-PE-39 for underground installation
and REA-PE-22 for above ground installation, sizes shall be as indicated
on the plans.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION:
3.1.1
Horizontal cable
All horizontal cables shall not exceed ninety 90 meters from the
Main/Intermediate Distribution Frame.
3.1.2
Cord and Equipment Cable: The total length of patch cord and equipment
cable shall not exceed ten (10) meters.
3.1.3
Work Area Termination: All UTP cables wired to the telecommunications
outlet/connector should have 4-pairs terminated in eight-position modular
outlets in the work area. All pairs shall be terminated. The
telecommunications outlet/connector shall be securely mounted at planned
locations. The height of the telecommunications faceplates shall be to
applicable codes and regulations.
3.1.4
Pulling Tension: The maximum cable pulling tensions shall not exceed
manufacturer’s specifications.
3.1.5
Bend Radius: The maximum cable bend radii shall not exceed
manufacturer’s specifications. In spaces with UTP cable terminations, the
maximum bend radius for 4-pair cable shall not exceed four times the
outside diameter of the cable and ten times for multi-pair cable. This shall
be done unless this violates manufacturer specifications. During the
actual installation, bend radius on 4-pair cable shall not exceed eight
times the outside diameter of the cable and ten times for multi-pair cable.
This shall be done unless this violates manufacturer specifications.
Page 3 of 4
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
3.1.6
Slack: In the work area, a minimum of 300 mm should be left for UTP,
while 1 m (3 ft) be left for fiber cables. In telecommunications
room/closets a minimum of 3 m (10 ft) of slack should be left for all cable
types. This slack must be neatly managed on trays or other support
types.
3.1.7
Cable Tie Wraps: Tie wraps shall be used at appropriate intervals to
secure cable and to provide strain relief at termination points. These
wraps shall not be over tightened to the point of deforming or crimping the
cable sheath. Hook and loop cable managers should be used in the closet
where reconfiguration of cables and terminations may be frequent.
3.1.8
Grounding: The system shall be properly grounded.
3.1.9
Label: All system components shall be properly labeled and coordinated
with the plans.
3.1.10 Workmanship: All work shall be done in a workman like fashion of the
highest standards in the telecommunications industry. All equipment and
materials are to be installed in a neat and secure manner, while cables
are to be properly dressed. Workers must clean any debris and trash at
the close of each workday.
3.2
TESTING:
3.2.1
Testing Procedures: Testing of cable channels shall be performed prior to
system cut over.
3.2.2
Copper Testing: All proposed Category 6 field-testing should be performed
with an approved level III UTP field test device.
All installed channels
shall perform equal to or better than the minimum requirements as
specified by the table below.
Worst Case Channel Performance at Highest Frequency
Parameters
Category 6
Insertion Loss
1-250 MHz
NEXT Loss
33.7 dB Power Sum
NEXT Loss
33.1 dB ELFEXT
30.2 dB Power Sum ELFEXT
15.3 dB Return
Loss
8.0 dB Propagation Delay
480 ns Delay Skew
30 ns ACR
0 dB Power Sum ACR
0 dB.
--------------- END OF SECTION --------------
Page 4 of 4
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
SECTION 16720
ADDRESSABLE FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The requirements of the Contract Documents, including the General and
Supplementary General Condition and Division 1 - General Requirements shall apply
to the work of this section.
At the time of bid, all exceptions taken to these Specifications, all variances from these
Specification and all substitutions of operating capabilities or equipment called for in
these Specification shall be listed in writing and forwarded to the Engineer. Any such
exception, variances or substitutions which were not listed at the time of bid and are
identified in the submittal, shall be grounds for immediate disapproval without
comment.
1.2
SCOPE
The work covered by this Section of the Specification shall include all labor, equipment,
materials and services to furnish and install a complete fire alarm system of the zoned,
non-coded type. It shall be complete with all necessary hardware, software and
memory specifically tailored for this installation. It shall be possible to permanently
modify the software on site by using a plug-in programmer. The Addressable system
shall consist of, but not be limited to, the following:
a) Fire alarm control panel.
b) Manual fire alarm stations.
c) Smoke detectors.
d) Heat detectors.
e) Audible notification appliances; bells, horns, chimes.
f)
Visual notification appliances; strobes.
g) Stair pressurization system startup control.
h) Battery standby.
1.3
APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARD
All equipment shall be UL listed for its intended use.
NFPA Standards 72
The National Electric Code.
All other local codes and authorities having jurisdiction
1.4
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Secure permits and approvals prior to installation.
Prior to commencement and after completion of work notify Authorities
Jurisdiction.
Having
Submit letter of approval for installation before requesting acceptance
of system.
Page 1 of 7
ADDRESSABLE FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
1.5
RELATED WORK
The Contractor shall coordinate work in this Section with all related trades.
Work
and/or equipment provided in other Sections and related
to the fire alarm system
shall include, but not be limited to:
a) Sprinkler waterflow and supervisory switches shall be furnished and installed
by the fire protection contractor.
b) Elevator recall control circuits to be provided by the elevator control
equipment.
1.6
SUBMITTALS
Provide list of all types of equipment and components provided.
Provide description of operation of the system, similar to that provided
in Part 2 of
this Section of the Specifications, to include any and all
exceptions, variances or
substitutions listed at the time of bid.
Provide manufacturer's printed product data, catalog cuts and
special installation procedures.
description of any
Provide samples of various items when requested.
Provide shop drawings as follows:
a) Drawing of the fire alarm control panel.
b) Single line riser diagram showing all equipment and type, number and size
of all conductors.
1.7
WARRANTY
Manufacturer shall guarantee the system equipment for a period of one (1) year from
date of final acceptance of the system.
The contractor shall guarantee all wiring and raceways to be free from inherent
mechanical or electrical defects for one (1) year from date of final acceptance of the
system.
Upon completion of the installation of fire alarm system equipment, the electrical
contractor shall provide to the architect a signed written statement, substantially in form
as follows: "The undersigned, having engaged as the Electrical Contractor on the
____________________ confirms that the fire alarm system equipment was installed
in accordance with the wiring diagrams, instructions and directions provided to us by
the manufacturer."
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
The catalog numbers used are those of Edwards Systems Technology (EST), Cooper,
or approved equal, and constitute the type and quality of equipment to be furnished.
2.2
CIRCUITING GUIDELINES
Each addressable analog loop shall be circuited as shown on the drawings but device
loading is not to exceed 80% of loop capacity in order to leave for space for future
devices. The loop shall have Class B operation.
Where it is necessary to interface Addressable initiating devices provide intelligent
input modules to supervise Class B zone wiring.
Page 2 of 7
ADDRESSABLE FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
For Addressable zone annunciation at the control panel zones shall be as shown on
the zoning schedule, but shall be typically as follows:
a) Manual Fire Alarm Stations : Provide one (1) alarm zone for each floor.
b) Smoke Detectors: Provide one (1) alarm zone for each wing
Each of the following types of alarm notification appliances shall be circuited as shown
on the drawings but shall be typically as follows:
a) Audible Signals: Provide one (1) notification appliance circuit for each floor,
each NAC connected to a remote signal module.
b) Visual Signals: Provide one (1) notification appliance circuit for each 3.4 A of
signal load connected direct to the control panel NACs, and 1.7A of signal
load for each NAC connected to a remote signal module.
Each of the following types of remote equipment associated with the fire alarm system
shall be provided with a form ‘C’ control relay contact as shown on the drawings, but
shall be typically as follows:
a) Pressurization Fans:
pressurization fan.
2.3
Provide one control relay contact for each
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
The system shall identify any off normal condition and log each condition into the
system database as an event.
a) The system shall automatically display on the control panel Liquid Crystal
Display the first event of the highest priority by type. The priorities and types
shall be alarm, supervisory, trouble, and monitor.
b) The system shall have a Queue operation, and shall not require event
acknowledgment by the system operator. The system shall have a labeled
color coded indicator for each type of event; alarm - red, supervisory - yellow,
trouble - yellow, monitor - green. When an unseen event exists for a given
type, the indicator shall flash. When all events of a given type have been
displayed, the indicator shall change from flashing to steady.
c) For each event, the display shall include the current time, the total number of
events, the type of event, the time the event occurred and up to a 40
character custom user description.
d) The user shall be able to review each event by simply selecting scrolling keys
(up-down) for each event type.
e) New alarm, supervisory, or trouble events shall sound a silence able audible
signal at the control panel.
Operation of any alarm initiating device shall automatically:
a) Update the control/display as described above. Visually annunciate the zone
of alarm on the panel’s LCD display. The visual indication shall remain on
until the alarm condition is reset to normal.
b) Sound alarm signals in the area of alarm at the evacuation rate and the floor
directly above and below. Operation of a general alarm key station shall
cause all signals to sound evacuation.
c) Turn on strobe lights in the area of alarm and the floor directly above and
below.
d) Operate control relay contacts to start the stairwell pressurization fan system.
Page 3 of 7
ADDRESSABLE FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
e) Operate control relay contacts to return all elevators that serve the floor of
alarm initiation to the ground floor. If the alarm originates from the ground
floor, operate control circuits contacts to return all elevators to the floor above
or to a level as directed by the local fire department.
2.4
SUPPORT FOR INSTALLER AND OWNER MAINTENANCE
Provide a coded one man walk test feature. Allow audible or silent testing. Signal
alarms and troubles during test. Allow receipt of alarms and programmed operations
for alarms from areas not under test.
Provide internal system diagnostics and maintenance user interface controls to
display/report the power, communication, and general status of specific panel
components, detectors, and modules.
Provide loop controller diagnostics to identify common alarm, trouble, ground fault,
Class A fault, and map faults. Map faults include wire changes, device type changes
by location, device additions/deletions and Addressable open, short, and ground
conditions. Ground faults on the circuit wiring of remote module shall be identified by
device address.
Allow the user to disable/enable devices, zones, actions, timers and sequences.
Protect the disable function with a password.
Allow the user to activate/restore outputs, actions, sequences, and simulate detector
smoke levels.
Allow the service user to enter time and date, reconfigure an external port for download
programming, initiate auto programming and change passwords. Protect these
functions with a password.
2.5
EQUIPMENT
A.
Fire Alarm Control Panel
The fire alarm control panels shall be “Quick Start” series and shall incorporate all
control electronics, relays, and necessary modules and components in a semiflush mounted cabinet. All control modules shall be labeled, and all zone
locations shall be identified. The cabinet shall be steel, with a gray finish. The
assembly shall contain a base panel, system power supply and battery charger
with optional modules suitable to meet the requirements of these specifications.
System circuits shall be configured as follows: Addressable analog loops Class
B; Initiating Device Circuits Class B; Notification Appliance Circuits Class B.
The system shall be supervised, site programmable, and of modular design with
expansion modules to serve up to 125 detectors and 125 remote modules, and
two notification appliance circuits (NACs) convertible to power risers to serve
remote multiple NAC modules for zoned signal applications.
The system shall store all basic system functionality and job specific data in nonvolatile memory. The system shall survive a complete power failure intact.
The system shall have built-in automatic system programming to automatically
address and map all system devices and provide a minimum default single stage
alarm system operation with support of alarm silence, trouble silence, drill, lamp
test, and reset common controls.
The system shall allow down loading of a job specific custom program created by
system application software. It shall support programming of any input point to
any output point. The system shall support the use of Bar Code readers to assist
Page 4 of 7
ADDRESSABLE FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
custom programming functions. It shall allow authorized customization of
fundamental system operations using initiating events to start actions, timers,
sequences and logical algorithms.
The system shall support distributed processor intelligent detectors with the
following operational attributes; integral multiple differential sensors, automatic
device mapping, electronic addressing, environmental compensation, pre-alarm,
dirty detector identification, automatic day/night sensitivity adjustment, dual
normal/alarm LEDs, relay bases, and isolator bases.
The system shall use full digital communications to supervise all addressable
loop devices for placement, correct location, and operation. It shall allow
swapping of “same type” devices without the need of addressing and impose the
“location” parameters on replacement device. It shall initiate and maintain a
trouble if a device is added to a loop and clear the trouble when the new device is
mapped and defined into the system.
All panel modules shall be supervised for placement and return trouble if
damaged or removed.
The system shall have a CPU watchdog circuit to initiate trouble should the CPU
fail.
The system evacuation signal rate shall be continuous.
The system program shall meet the requirements of this project, current codes
and standards, and satisfy the local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
Passwords shall protect any changes to system operations.
The power supply shall be a high efficiency switch mode type with line monitoring
to automatically switch to batteries for power failure or brown out conditions. The
automatic battery charger shall have low battery discharge protection. The power
supply shall provide internal power and 24 Vdc at 4A continuous for notification
appliance circuits. The power supply shall be capable of providing 10A to output
circuits for a maximum period of 50 ms. Auxiliary power shall be 24 Vdc at 500
mA. All outputs shall be power limited. The battery shall be sized to support the
system for 24 hours of supervisory and trouble signal current plus general alarm
for 5 minutes.
The LCD Display Module shall be of membrane style construction with a 14 line
224 character Liquid Crystal Display. The LCD shall use supertwist technology
and backlighting for high contrast visual clarity. In the normal mode display the
time, the total number of active events and the total number of disable points. In
the alarm mode display the total number of events and the type of event on
display. Reserve 40 characters of display space for user custom messages. The
module shall have visual indicators for the following common control functions;
AC Power, alarm, supervisory, monitor, trouble, disable, ground fault, CPU fail,
and test. There shall be common control keys and visual indicators for; reset,
alarm silence, trouble silence, drill, and one custom programmable key/indicator.
Allow the first event of the highest priority to capture the LCD for display so that
arriving fire fighters can view the first alarm event “hands free”. Provide system
function keys; status, reports, enable, disable, activate, restore, program, and
test. The module shall have a numeric keypad, zero through nine with delete and
enter keys.
Page 5 of 7
ADDRESSABLE FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
2.6
COMPONENTS
2.6.1
Intelligent Devices – General
Each remote device shall have a microprocessor with non-volatile memory to
support its functionality and serviceability. Each device shall store as
required for its functionality the following data: device serial number, device
address, device type, personality code, date of manufacture, hours in use,
number of alarms and troubles, time and date of last alarm, amount of
environmental compensation left/used, last maintenance date, job/project
number, current detector sensitivity values, diagnostic information (trouble
codes) and algorithms required to process sensor data and perform
communications with the loop controller.
Each device shall be capable of electronic addressing, either automatically or
application programmed assigned, to support physical/electrical mapping and
supervision by location. Setting a device’s address by physical means thru
dip switch 0r rotary switch shall not be acceptable.
2.6.2
SINGLE INPUT MODULE, SIGA-CT1
Provide intelligent single input modules SIGA-CT1. The Single Input Module
shall provide one (1) supervised Class B input circuit capable of a minimum of
4 personalities, each with a distinct operation. Normally-Open Alarm Latching
(Manual Stations, Heat Detectors, etc.)
2.06.c.4 Waterflow/Tamper Module, SIGA-WTM
Provide
intelligent
waterflow/tamper
modules
SIGA-WTM.
The
Waterflow/Tamper Module shall be factory set to support two (2) supervised
Class B input circuits. Channel A shall support a Normally-Open Alarm
Delayed Latching Waterflow Switch circuit. Channel B shall support a
Normally-Open Active Latching Tamper Switch.
2.06.c.5 Single Input Signal Module, SIGA-CC1
Provide intelligent single input signal modules SIGA-CC1. The Single Input
(Single Riser Select) Signal Module shall provide one (1) supervised Class B
output circuit capable of a minimum of 2 personalities, each with a distinct
operation (Audible or Visible Signal Power Selector)
2.06.c.7 Control Relay Module, SIGA-CR
Provide intelligent control relay modules SIGA-CR. The Control Relay
Module shall provide one form “C” dry relay contact rated at 2 amps @ 24
Vdc to control external appliances or equipment shutdown. The control relay
shall be rated for pilot duty and releasing systems. The position of the relay
contact shall be confirmed by the system firmware.
2.6.3
FIRE ALARM INITIATING DEVICES – GENERAL
All initiating devices shall be UL Listed for Fire Protective Service.
All initiating devices shall be of the same manufacturer as the Fire Alarm
Control Panel specified to assure absolute compatibility between the devices
and the control panels, and to assure that the application of the initiating
devices is done in accordance with the single manufacturer’s instructions.
Any devices that do not meet the above requirements, and are submitted for
use must show written proof of their compatibility for the purposes intended.
Such proof shall be in the form of documentation from all manufacturers that
Page 6 of 7
ADDRESSABLE FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
clearly states that their equipment (as submitted) is 100% compatible with
each other for the purposes intended.
2.6.4
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES – GENERAL
All appliances shall be UL Listed for Fire Protective Service.
All strobe appliances or combination appliances with strobes shall be capable
of providing the “Equivalent Facilitation” which is allowed under the
Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibilities Guidelines (ADA(AG)), and
shall be UL 1971, and ULC S526 Listed.
All appliances shall be of the same manufacturer as the Fire Alarm Control
Panel specified to insure absolute compatibility between the appliances and
the control panels, and to insure that the application of the appliances are
done in accordance with the single manufacturers’ instructions.
Temporal Horn/Strobes, 757 Series
Provide electronic horn/strobes manufactured by EST, Cat. No. 757 Series.
In - Out screw terminals shall be provided for wiring. The horn/strobe shall
have a red plastic housing. Horn/strobes shall be selectable for high or low
dBA output. Selection of low or high output shall be reversible. Horns shall be
selectable for steady or temporal output. Selection of steady or temporal
output shall be reversible. A synchronized temporal pattern sound output level
of 97 dBA average shall be provided.
The strobe shall provide 15/75 cd synchronized flash outputs. The strobe
shall have lens markings oriented for wall mounting. Removal of a installed
Horn/Strobe to change the lens markings shall not be acceptable.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
The entire system shall be installed in a workmanlike manner, in accordance with
approved manufacturer's wiring diagram. The contractor shall furnish all conduit,
wiring, outlet boxes, junction boxes, cabinets and similar devices necessary for the
complete installation.
All wiring shall be of the type recommended by the
manufacturer, approved by the local Fire Department, and shall be installed in rigid,
threaded conduit throughout.
All penetration of floor slabs and fire walls shall be fire stopped in accordance with all
local fire codes.
End of Line Resistors shall be furnished as required for mounting as directed by the
manufacturer.
The system shall be arranged to receive power from one three wire 220 Vac, 15 A
supply. All low voltage operation shall be provided from the fire alarm control panel.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
The system shall be installed and fully tested under the supervision of a trained
manufacturer's representative. The system shall be demonstrated to perform all of the
function as specified.
3.3
TESTS
Reports of any field testing during installation shall be forwarded to the Engineer.
Page 7 of 7
ADDRESSABLE FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
Each individual system operation on a circuit by circuit basis shall be tested for its
complete operation. The procedure for testing the entire fire alarm system shall be set
forth with the consent of the code enforcement official, the Engineer and the
manufacturer.
3.4
DOCUMENTATION AND TRAINING
The contractor shall compile and provide to the owners three (3) complete manual on
the completed system to include operating and maintenance instruction, catalog cuts of
all equipment and components, as-built wiring diagrams and a manufacturer's
suggested spare parts list.
In addition to the above manuals, the contractor shall provide the services of the
manufacturer's trained representative for a period of four (4) hours to instruct the
owners' designated personnel on the operation and maintenance of the entire system.
--------------- END OF SECTION --------------
Page 8 of 7
ADDRESSABLE FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
SECTION 16726
PUBLIC ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
1.2
Furnish and install a complete and functional Public Address (PA)
System with EVAC System integrated to the Fire Alarm System.
RELATED WORK
A.
All work specified in this Section is subject to the provisions of Section
16010 - General Provisions.
B.
Refer to the following Sections for related work in connection with the
Paging System.
Section 16075 - Firestopping
Materials Section 16110 Raceways and Boxes Section
16450 - Grounding System
Section 16720 - Fire Detection and Alarm System
1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
The work covered in this Section of the Specification includes the
furnishing of all labor, equipment, materials and performance of all
operations associated with the installation of the background music and
paging system as shown on the drawings and as herein specified.
B.
The Contractor shall be capable of providing comprehensive sound
distribution via computer-operated matrix zone set-up and control.
C.
All works shall be in accordance with governing Codes and Standards,
Drawings, Specifications and all related Bid Documents. If a discrepancy
is noted between the documents, this shall be notified to the Project
Manager in writing and further clarification shall be given.
D.
Any equipment/components not specifically mentioned in the
specifications or not shown on the Contract Drawings but deemed
necessary for the satisfactory operation of the system shall be provided.
All cost for such shall be included in the bid price.
E.
All major equipment and materials used for the installation shall be of the
same make and type to ensure uniformly of standard and composition.
All equipment and components shall be new and the manufacturer’s
current model.
F.
All materials, appliances, equipment, and devices shall be tested, used,
and listed by Underwriters Laboratory (UL).
G.
All equipment shall be mounted on standard equipment racks.
H.
The system shall be provided to perform the following functions:
Page 1 of 13
PUBLIC ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.4
1.5
Distribute paging system or announcement that is selectable per
zone from the paging microphones. Each floor is treated as a
single zone.
Composed of a minimum three (3) PA network capable of
providing separate and/or different PA distribution but under a
single matrix controlled unit.
Provide paging to car park area.
Distribute background music to any combination or individual
speaker, either in a single or multiple channels that could be
selected locally.
Override distributed background music to some areas with the
public address & emergency announcement and automatically
return to the background music after the announcement.
Distribute program material from a radio tuner as part of the
multiple channel distribution to selected areas only.
Permit distribution of an emergency announcement to select all
zones regardless of the volume controller, program selector or
source selector settings.
Sound pressure level of music shall be 6dB above background
noise level and paging system shall be 10dB above background
noise level.
I.
The Contractor shall submit a detailed schematic wiring diagram showing
all component units with type references, gain or loss, designed to
operate to give the system performance as specified.
J.
The Contractor shall submit a fully technical and mechanical description
of every piece of equipment and cables used, including manufacturer’s
technical literature.
K.
The work specified herein shall be coordinated with other trades involved
in the construction. All work shall be carefully laid out in advance,
coordinating system feature with Electrical, Mechanical, Architectural and
Structural features of construction.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electronic Components: Comply with latest applicable standards of EIA;
PEC; standard industry grade; types and ratings commonly available in
local distributor without prior written approval from the Project Manager.
B.
Entire system, including mounting, installing, connecting, aligning,
testing, and adjusting, to be the responsibility of one Contractor.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
The complete background music and paging system shall be from one of
the following manufacturers.
1.
2.
3.
Page 2 of 13
As per existing brand
Installer: company specializing in sound system installation with 5
years documented experience.
Alternative brand: TOA, Honeywell, BOSCH, BOSE
PUBLIC ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
1.6
SUBMITTALS
A.
Make submittals for public address system in accordance with the
requirements of Section 16010.
B.
The Contractor shall submit a fully technical and mechanical description
of every piece of equipment and cables to be used, including
manufacturer’s technical literature.
C.
The Contractor shall provide a description of the methods proposed to
show that the actual performance will be in accordance with the
specifications for technical performance, including necessary test
methods, procedures, and equipment that will be used.
D.
Submit shop drawings to include the following:
1.
2.
E.
Submit samples of cables and other components as required.
F.
Submit as-built drawings to include the following
1.
2.
3.
G.
1.7
System diagram
Floor plan layouts, sectional view and installation details.
Floor plan layouts, sectional view and installation details.
List of major components and their place in the system
Synopsis of the numbering scheme and cross connect log.
Submit O&M manuals, including test results.
TRAINING
The Contractor shall provide appropriate training for the operation and
maintenance of the background music and paging system in accordance with
the requirements of Section 16010.
1.8
PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A.
Deliver and store background music & public address system equipment
in undamaged factory packaging according to the requirements of
Section 16010.
B.
Store public address system equipment on elevated platforms in a clean,
dry location. Protect from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
RADIO TUNER
A.
Page 3 of 13
Radio tuners shall have digitally synthesized tuning system and can
receive both AM and FM signals. The tuner shall meet or exceed the
following characteristics:
Frequency Range
:
Useable Sensitivity
:
520-1610 Khz (AM)
88-108 MHz (FM)
10.8 dBf (mono)
Signal strength required
:
15.9 dBf (mono)
PUBLIC ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
50 dB quieting
2.2
Capture Ratio
AM Suppression
Alternate Channel
Selectivity
Stereo Separation
:
1.0 dB
65 dB
:
80 dB
60 dB at 1 KHz
Total Harmonic Distortion
:
0.05 % (mono)
0.08 % (stereo) At 1
KHz
Signal to Noise Ratio
:
85 dB (mono)
81 dB (stereo)
COMPACT DISC PLAYER
A.
The Compact Disc Player at least 10 units shall have magazine, or
separate tray to hold at least 5 disc at a time.
B.
It shall have at least 18-bit, 8 x over sampling rate D/A converter and 3beam laser pick-up.
C.
The disc player shall include, but not limited to the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
2.3
2.4
37.3 dBf (stereo)
Disc play mode (single disc play/5-disc play) switch
Shuffle play (shuffle with 1 disc, shuffle with next random selected
disc, etc).
32-Random music selection (from 1-5 discs)
5-way repeat mode (all disc/one disc/one selection/RMS/shuffle)
6 mode time
The compact disc player shall meet or exceed the following electrical
characteristics:
Frequency Response (Hz)
Signal-to-noise ratio (dB)
Harmonic Distortion (% at 1 KHz)
Dynamic Range (dB)
Channel Separation (dB at 1 KHz)
:
:
:
:
:
Output Level
:
20-20,000 (+ 0.5
dB)
100 min.
0.05 max.
88 min.
90 min.
2 Vrms at 50K
ohm
MICROPHONES
A.
Microphone shall be of the unidirectional dynamic type with assembly
consisting of momentary DPDT spring return switch with self-wiping silver
plated contact.
B.
It shall be sensitive and rugged with a frequency response of 100 to
10,000 Hz and an output level of 58 dB.
C.
The base shall be fitted with a locking type receptacle to accept a locking
type microphone cable connector.
REMOTE PAGING MICROPHONES
A.
Page 4 of 13
Remote Paging Microphone shall be a free-standing unit with a high
PUBLIC ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
quality phantom powered electric/condenser microphone.
Nominal input level
:
84dB
SPL
124dB
SPL
Maximum input level
:
Nominal output level with 3mV
SPL in &
Maximum gain setting 1Veff (0 dBV) 3dB
:
Vo=0.1dBV
Signal-to-noise ratio at nom.
Output level typical :
:
2.5
2.6
62dB
64dB (signal 0dBV, noise A-weighted)
B.
There shall be numeric keypad for the selection of loudspeaker zones
and press-to-talk key.
C.
Busy and Wait/Talk LED’s shall be available to advise the user as to
whether a call may be activated, the status of the call and whether any
other calls are active.
PRE-AMP MODULES
A.
The pre-amp shall be fully solid state of modular detail with volume and
separate bass/treble control and accepts input from microphone, tuner or
CD player and chime inputs.
B.
Electronic switching for line remote control to be incorporated. Built-in
priority circuit for microphone circuits shall be provided.
C.
A test tone generator module shall be incorporated to provide test zone
to power amplifier for calibration purpose.
POWER AMPLIFIER
A.
Amplifiers shall be solid-state high-power amplifiers and operate on 220V
power supply.
B.
The power amplifiers shall each have a minimum rated power output
rating in RMS as required.
C.
They shall be capable of producing their rated power output at less than
1% distortion over the frequency range of 40 Hz to 16,000 Hz and
capable of producing full rated sine wave power output on a continuous
basis with no undue heating of any component.
D.
They shall have a frequency response of within
2 dB from 40 Hz to
16,000 Hz and a noise level at least 80 dB below rated output.
E.
The output of the amplifier shall be suitable to feed a “constant voltage”
distribution line system of 100V.
F.
The amplifier shall be provided with separate volume controls for the
input channels, separate high and low tone controls, supply on/off switch
and pilot light and other necessary switches and controls.
G.
The amplifier shall be complete with a power supply unit comprising of all
Page 5 of 13
PUBLIC ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
necessary transformer, rectifier, filter etc. suitable for rated electricity
supply.
2.7
H.
The complete amplifier shall be housed in a sheet metal cabinet for rack
mounting and all controls and switches shall be fixed in the front panel of
the cabinet.
I.
The Contractor shall provide the amplifier with all flexible cords, sockets,
plugs, including electricity supply for the system.
J.
The amplifier shall also include an automatic and self-restoring protective
circuit to protect against damage from prolonged or extreme overloads
such as a shorted output line. This circuit shall be of the electrically
controlled type, which is not subject to instantaneous overloads. It shall
automatically remove power from the amplifier when damage is
threatened and automatically restore the amplifier to operation when
danger is past.
LIMITER AMPLIFIER
1.
2.8
Technical Specification shall be as follows:
1.
Frequency
response
: 20 Hz to 20 KHz
2.
Threshold
: + 4 dBm to + 12 dBm by 2 dB steps
3.
Attack
: Auto-nominal 5 m-sec at 12 dB of control
4.
Release
: 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2 sec and auto
5.
Noise
: 85 dBm
6.
Output
: Adjustable up to + 20 dBm into 600 ohm
MATRIX CONTROLLER
A.
The Matrix Controller shall be microprocessor controlled and
incorporating interface circuitry for the comprehensive range of system
input and output modules.
B.
It shall be modular in design to provide a wide range of system
configurations and capacity.
C.
The Matrix Controller shall be field programmable via the units graphic
LCD and function key, and 320 x 240 dot LCD Display.
D.
The unit shall have minimum expansion capacity of 64 inputs/128 output.
E.
The required configuration as to the number of sound input sources and
loudspeaker zones shall be as shown on the single line diagram drawing.
F.
All data entered shall be retained in the event of a power failure and
when switching off.
G.
Capable of handling other multimedia/auxiliary services such as IPOD,
MP3’s, etc.
H.
Standalone but software driven.
Technical Specifications
2.9
TERMINAL BLOCKS
A.
2.10
POWER SUPPLY
A.
2.11
2.12
Cable terminal blocks shall be arranged in accordance with the group of
speakers, areas and function. These shall be capable of terminating
1.5mm copper wires and shall be conveniently located in the upper or
lower portion of the rack.
The main power supply provided to the Equipment Rack for use of the
Public Address and Background Music System shall be as follows:
Voltage
:
Power Supply
Frequency
Characteristics
:
220V 6% single phase 2
wire
4 No 13A switched socket
outlets
:
20 – 20,000Hz
B.
The Contractor shall make due allowance by providing all necessary
power supply units, voltage regulators, spike eliminators, step down
transformers, rectifiers, relays, radio suppresser, converters, etc. to
ensure that all his equipment will perform completely and satisfactorily.
C.
All necessary power supply required for the operation of amplifiers,
speaker, sound equipment, devices, controls etc. after the main power
supply point, shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor.
EQUIPMENT RACK
A.
All equipment such as power amplifiers, tape deck, tuner, etc. shall be
mounted onto a standard equipment rack.
B.
All inputs shall be of an interchangeable modular type such that the
individual modules can be mounted in mixer frames, or in mixed power
amplifiers.
C.
All system and peripheral units shall be properly matched with the
equipment rack and provided compact neat installation.
D.
Forced ventilation fans shall be incorporated for the equipment rack.
E.
All wiring within the rack shall be fixed securely without strain. For the
purpose of certification, all wires shall be numbered and/or color-coded.
The wiring shall be formed in a neat and systematic manner, with cable
supported clear of panels and without crossovers.
F.
All incoming and outgoing signal sources from the equipment racks to the
microphone station and speaker zone shall be inter-connected via
approved type of plugs and sockets.
CEILING MOUNTED LOUDSPEAKERS
A.
Page 7 of 13
All ceiling mounted loudspeakers shall be suitable for both voice and
music broadcasting and shall be recess mounted in the false ceiling.
Where there is no false ceiling, surface type shall be provided.
PUBLIC ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
2.13
2.14
B.
The loudspeakers shall be 150mm diameter in public areas having
viscous-damped cone and ceramic magnet.
C.
They shall have at least a frequency range of 100 Hz to 16,000 Hz at
rated output.
D.
Flux density shall be at least 10,000 gauss.
E.
The loudspeakers shall have an output impedance of 8 ohms and power
output tappings of 1.5, 3 and 6 watts (max.)
F.
The sound pressure level shall be at least 90 dB at 1w, 1m.
G.
Each loudspeaker shall be equipped with a line-matching transformer.
Transformer shall be provided for each speaker with power tap settings
for 100V lines. Insertion loss of the transformers shall not exceed 1 dB.
H.
Circular and recessed baffle grilles with torsion spring mounted shall be
provided for each loudspeaker in public areas. Construction shall be a
minimum of 2mm steel with a white finish trim, matt black baffle grilles
and acoustic enclosure. A sample shall be submitted to the Project
Manager for the approval of the Consultant.
WALL MOUNTED BOX SPEAKER
A.
The wall mounted box speaker shall come complete with matching
transformer, connector and necessary mounting brackets. All metal parts
shall be protected against rust and corrosion.
B.
The finishing color of the box speaker shall be able to match with the wall
and shall be approved by the Engineer.
C.
The technical performance of the speaker shall meet the following:
91 dB Sound Pressure
Level
Coverage Angle
:
:
Frequency Response
Power Output (max.)
Output Voltage
:
:
:
1 Watt, 1 Meter
1800
100 Hz - 10,000
Hz
6W
100V
HORN SPEAKER
A.
Horn speakers shall be strong, dust proof and water protected.
B.
It shall come complete with matching transformer, connector and
necessary mounting brackets. All metal parts shall be protected against
rust and corrosion.
C.
The technical performance of the horn speaker shall meet the following
specification:
Page 8 of 13
112 Db Sound Pressure
Level
Coverage Angle
:
:
Frequency Response
Power Output (max.)
:
:
1 Watt, 1 Meter
100o / 65o
280 Hz - 12,500
Hz
15W
PUBLIC ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
Output Voltage
2.15
100V
COLUMN SPEAKER
A.
The column speaker shall come complete with matching transformer,
connector and necessary mounting brackets. All metal parts shall be
protected against rust and corrosion.
B.
The finishing color of the column speaker shall be able to match with the
column or wall finish and shall be approved by the Engineer.
C.
The technical performance of the column speaker shall meet the
following specification:
Sound Pressure Level
Coverage Angle
Frequency Response
Power Output (max.)
Output Voltage
2.16
:
90 dB at 1 Watt, 1
Meter
180o / 30o
150 Hz - 10,000 Hz
20W
100V
:
:
:
:
:
AUTOMATIC MESSAGE ANNOUNCER
The system shall be a fully automatic unit which repeats recorded messages at
predetermined interval during background music broadcast and emergency. The
unit shall accept CD and shall be front loading. All controls shall be front
accessible including power ON/OFF, CD loading, track selection and, message
selection buttons and indication etc. The unit shall have automatic gain control
(AGC) circuit, message skipping, built in timer, announcement priority and live
announcement features. Interval timer shall be switched selectable including
OFF.
2.17
VOICE LOGGING MACHINE
A.
The unit shall be an automatic Digital Audio Recorder which
automatically records all alarm signals and voice traffic over the
loudspeakers on one track and voice traffic over the fireman’s intercom
on the other track. The capacity shall be 12 hours recording.
B.
All controls shall be front accessible including power ON/OFF, start/stop
button and indication track selection button.
C.
The unit shall be complete with ‘DOLBY Noise Reduction’ system.
D.
Technical Specification shall be as follows:
Page 9 of 13
1.
E.Frequency
Response
:
2.
Wow and Flutter
: Less than 0.35% WRMS
3.
Output Impedance
:
4.
S/N Ratio
: Better than 50 dB
E.
100 – 8 kHz +/3dB
Balance 600 ohms
PUBLIC ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
2.18
2.19
2.20
CHIME/TONE SIGNAL GENERATOR
A.
The unit shall be modular type and suitable for rack mounting.
B.
Two chime modules and two alarms signal modules shall be provided.
C.
Signals shall be programmed to precede an announcement from a call
station or either used as an independently alarm for hazardous events.
D.
Adjustable output level and sounding time features shall be provided for
the chime and alarm signal modules.
MONITORING UNIT
A.
A monitoring unit shall be provided to monitor the output of various input
sources by push-button type selector.
B.
A dB meter with adjustable sensitivity shall be incorporated.
C.
The output shall be connected to a 1 W speaker with volume control.
D.
Headphone jack with speaker mute function and headphone shall be
provided.
CALL STATION
A.
Call station shall be provided in the control room.
B.
The call station shall be constructed of hairline stainless steel panels and
built into custom made console complete with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Page 10 of 13
Condenser microphone on a gooseneck stem of high quality with
a built-in bass roll-off filter giving a clear voice reproduction, even
in difficult acoustic environments.
100 pre-select loudspeaker zone illuminated push buttons.
10 different call tones, chimes and alarm signals selection
illuminated push buttons.
Press-to-talk and all-call illuminated buttons.
4 levels of priority/talk selections.
10 illuminated user function keys for selections of pre-recorded
messages, routing of a low priority call preceded by an attention
tone to pre-programmed selection of zones, routing of an alarm
tone followed by a pre-recorded evacuation message to all
loudspeaker zones, toggling a control relay on and off which
switches a warning lamp, etc., selecting a music source, turning
the music volume up/down, muting the music and resetting the
system.
Busy LED to advise the operator whether a call may be activated.
Red busy LED flashing means that another call is in progress.
Red busy LED lights up continuously indicates that the call has
been blocked by another call with a higher priority.
Wait/Talk LED to advise the operator whether a call is accepted.
Green wait LED flashing indicates that the call is accepted and the
attention tone or pre-recorded message is being transmitted.
Green talk LED lights up continuously when the attention tone or
message finishes and the microphone is switched on to enable
speech broadcast.
PUBLIC ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
2.21
2.22
LED intensity preset to compensate for various local lighting
conditions. The illumination intensity of the LED shall be
adjustable.
Built-in compressor to keep the signal output level of the call
stations constant even in situations where the operator’s speech
volume level changes radically. The degree of compression shall
be preset over a range of 30 dB from 84 to 114 dB (SPL).
Balanced line level output allowing call stations to be located up to
1000 m from the control centre using only standard 2-core
screened cables.
Loudspeaker zone template onto which the name of the
loudspeaker zones can be written.
Built-in monitor loudspeaker complete with volume control.
Key switch protection to prevent unauthorised access.
EMERGENCY VOICE EVACUATION PANEL (EVAC) PANEL
A.
A fully automatic combination voice communication and fire fighters
intercom system which provides automatic and alarm signaling per the
NFPA 72.
B.
One or two-way communications system for relocation/evacuation of
building personnel and assisting fire-fighting efforts in controlling smoke
and fire.
C.
“ALL-CALL” tone and Voice Signaling.
D.
Selective Tone and Voice Signaling with Redundant tone generators.
E.
Module removal supervision
F.
Service Diagnostic Center.
G.
“ALARM/RESOUND/RESTORE” Feature
H.
Short Circuit Speaker Disconnect
I.
“On/Normal/Off” Auxiliary controls
J.
Local annunciation with Time-out of selective alarm signal to general
alarm “ALL-CALL”
K.
Fully integratable with any Public Address system
WIRING
A.
Wiring shall be in accordance with National Codes and as recommended
by the manufacturer of the system. All wires and cables shall comply with
the requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories, the ASTM and ICEA
or local agencies responsible. The size of conductor shall not be less
than 1.25 mm2 as indicated on the plans.
B.
Wiring and terminals cabinets shall be permanently tagged and identified
with metal phenolic tags attached by nylon ties.
Page 11 of 13
PUBLIC ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. General
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Electrical Power
1.
2.
C.
2.
Provide identical conductor color coding for all cables furnishing
identical functions throughout the systems, isolate all audio and
video lines from the conduit systems. Insulate shield drain wires
with insulating heat-sink tubing.
All cables shall be run in conduits. The space factor for cables
installed in conduit shall not exceed 40%.
Labeling:
1.
2.
3.
Page 12 of 13
Fabricate and install 3-wire isolated ground AC power strips in all
floor mounted equipment racks, each with an adequate number of
receptacles for all equipment served plus two additional utility
receptacles. Provide separate 20A circuits for signal processing
equipment and power amplifiers, distributing power amplifier loads
such that no circuit draws more than 12A maximum under full
power conditions.
Provide isolated ground receptacles for all power strips. Isolate AC
power grounds from the power strip ducting and equipment racks,
gather all grounds to a common 8mm2 bus, and terminate the
ground bus to the equipment rack unipoint ground busbar with an
8mm2 minimum insulated cable.
Cabling:
1.
D.
An authorized representative of the manufacturer of the system
shall install and be responsible for the satisfactory operation and
certification of the complete system
Properly coordinate services of the various trades, carefully coordinate levels, work sequence, accessibility of various services.
All works shall be conducted under the supervision of company
trained personnel, and shall be responsible for supervising the
installation to the endorsement of the Project Manager.
All wirings inside panels and trunkings are to be properly grouped,
strapped and fixed in location by endorsed type cable strap.
All wiring to be labeled with numbering markers on both ends
which correspond to the numbering scheme of the shop drawings.
All edges of the panel, support, frame etc. to be properly rounded
off to prevent damage to the insulation. All wiring shall be
terminated.
Proper segregation shall be maintained throughout for cable wiring
carrying different voltage range. All signal and power cables shall
be furnished with cable markers for distinguishing from other
cables.
Labels in general shall be made from white “Traffolite” laminated
white/black/white and suitably engraved with black lettering in
English.
Labels shall be fixed by screws.
Each of the sound rack, wall plate and interfacing termination
cabinet shall be labeled on the front cover indicating the field
PUBLIC ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
4.
5.
E.
Equipment Racks
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.2
equipment controlled by the unit.
Cables shall be labeled at appropriate locations for identification.
All equipment items, device plates, equipment rack panels,
devices, controls, receptacles, and cables shall be labeled as to
the function performed and the area served. Exact dimension of
the lettering shall suit particular item of the equipment and shall be
submitted to the Project Manager for approval.
Arrange equipment to prevent temperatures form rising above
37.7oC with ambient room temperature of 21oC. Mount perforated
ventilation panels above, below and between each power amplifier
and at top and bottom of each equipment rack.
Locate equipment having operator employed controls and
indicators centered at 150mm above the floor. Locate patch
panels at least 75cm above the floor.
Install equipment to provide free access to all equipment
terminations. Installation requiring the de-mounting or deenergizing of equipment for access to terminations is not
acceptable.
Install hinges on any chassis over which mounts wired
components for contractor fabricated equipment items. Dress and
secure associated wiring.
Ventilation slots covered by vermin proof mesh shall be provided
between each equipment for adequate ventilation.
Allow sufficient space for cooling of power amplifier heat sink.
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
A.
Perform loop continuity test and megger test on all single core and
multicore cable with electronic components and equipment removed.
B.
Test all equipment and
recommended procedure.
C.
Check proper connection and labeling of all system wiring.
D.
For main background music equipment rack, adjust the system to proper
condition and output levels. Check operation of all equipment. Check and
adjust output levels of all pre-amp and amplifiers so that they are not
operated in saturation conditions.
E.
Check that all connectors and plugs are compatible and the complete
microphone cassette player, amplifier and speaker can operate in
harmony without mismatch.
F.
Check zoning operation of speaker system under emergency override
conditions.
G.
At the final inspection, a factory-trained representative of the
manufacturer of the major equipment shall repeat all the above tests. In
addition, the representative shall demonstrate that the systems function
properly in every respect. The demonstration shall be made in the
presence of the Project Manager.
system
according
to
manufacturer’s
--------------- END OF SECTION --------------
Page 13 of 13
PUBLIC ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
SECTION 16760
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 16011, “Electrical General Requirements”, applies to this section, with the
additions and modifications specified herein.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
The work includes supply and installation of complete paging system but not limited to
power amplifiers, preamplifiers, speakers and related accessories.
1.3
SUBMITTALS:
1.3.1
Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's data for all materials and
equipment to be incorporated in the work, as follows:
a.
Power Amplifier;
b.
Pre Amplifier; c.
Radio AM/FM, d.
CD
player,
e.
Selector Switches;
f.
Ceiling Speaker;
g.
Wall Type Speaker;
h.
Desk Top Microphone; and
i.
Other equipment necessary to complete the paging system
1.3.2
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for the overall system and for each
major component. Drawings shall illustrate how each item of equipment
will function in the system and shall include an overall system schematic
indicating relationship of intercommunication units on one diagram.
1.3.3
Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Six bound sets of instructions for
operating and maintenance shall be furnished.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENTS
Equipment and components of program distribution and paging systems shall
conform to applicable requirements of Article 810, NFPA 70. The system shall be an
integrated design of a single manufacturer and shall consist of amplifier, pre-amplifier,
control panel, speakers, microphone, and interconnecting cables complete with rack
and supports. All speakers shall operate from a 70-volt distribution system.
2.1.1
Page 1 of 4
Provide pre-amplifier/mixer either separately or as an integral part of
power amplifier. If separate, it shall be completely self-contained, requiring
only a 240 VAC power source. Pre-amplifier shall employ only solid-state
devices. Performance characteristics.
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.1.2
Inputs: microphone-low impedance, 150 ohms nominal auxiliary - high
impedance, 500,000 ohms or greater;
Frequency Response: 20-20,000 Hz ± 2db.
Total Harmonic Distortion: 1 percent or less at rated output.
Output Noise Level: minimum 60 db below rated output.
Output: shall be sufficient to drive power amplifier to rated output.
Controls: On/Off switch with “Power On” indicator lamp or LED Master
Gain (Rotary)
Individual gain per input (Rotary);
All controls shall be front panel mounted.
Power a m p l i f i e r shall employ only solid-state devices.
characteristics are as follows:
Performance
a.
Power Output: As indicated.
b.
Frequency Response: 100-10,000 Hz, + 3db.
c.
Signal to Noise Ratio: 60 db or greater at rated output.
d.
Total Harmonic Distortion: less than 3 percent at rated output.
e.
Controls: On/Off switch with “Power On” indicator lamp or LED
Volume (Rotary). All controls shall be panel-mounted.
f.
Power requirements: 240 VAC, 60 Hz.
2.1.3
Provide ceiling and wall type speakers with the following ratings and
features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Sensitivity (Sound Pressure): 92db minimum, measured at 1-watt
input, 1.2 meters on axis.
Frequency Response: 80 to 12,000 Hz ± 3 db.
Dispersion: 90 .
Transformer with 4-level taps: 1.5, 5, 10 watts.
Minimum 20 gauge steel or aluminum back boxes of acoustically
damped construction. Provide for relief of back-pressure. Assembly
shall be rust proofed.
Suitable speaker grille for recessed mounting to provide a flush
appearance; shall be made of minimum 20-gauge steel or aluminum.
One-inch voice coil.
2.1.4
Provide horn type speakers with ratings as indicated.
2.1.5
AM/FM Equipment: AM/FM tuner shall be rack-mounted and shall as a
minimum, conform to the following characteristics:
Tuning Range:
AM- 540 to 1605 kHz
FM- 8 8 to 108 MHz
Selectivity:
60 dB on FM
40 db on AM
Sensitivity:
FM- 1.5 microvolts
AM- 2.0 microvolts
Capture ratio:
1.0 dB
Power requirement:
240 VAC, 60 Hz.
2.1.6
Compact Disc Player: Player shall have three beam laser pickup, dual digital
to analog converter, ramdom access and ramdom mode programmable playback.
Page 2 of 4
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
Player shall have as a minimum conformed to the following:
Frequency:
10-20kHz 1 dB Signal-to
Noise:
100 dB minimum Dynamic Range:
96 dB minimum
THD:
0.007% maximum at 1 kHz
Channel Separation:
90 dB minimum at 1 kHz
Quantization:
16 bits minimum linear per channel
Conversion rate:
4 minimum x over-sampling
Disc size:
5 and 3-inch
2.1.7
Provide microphone
characteristics:
suitable
for
desk
mounting.
Performance
a.
Type: Dynamic
b.
Impedance: Low impedance, 150 ohms nominal. c.
Frequency Response: 60 to 12,000 Hz.
d.
Output Level: 58db minimum.
e.
Four zones selector switches with indicating lights.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION:
3.1.1
Power Wiring:
Provide power wiring, raceway, and outlet boxes for
intercommunications system as specified in Section 16402, "Interior Wiring
Systems."
3.1.2
Control Circuit Wiring: Install control circuits in accordance with PEC 2000
and as indicated.
Provide type of control circuit wire and number of
conductors as recommended by intercommunication system manufacturer.
3.1.3
Signal Wiring: Wire speakers with 1.5mm² twisted pair wire. Provide
shielding if required by manufacturer.
Microphone wiring shall be as
recommended by equipment manufacturer.
3.1.4
Backboxes: Provide backboxes having characteristics suitable for speakers
mounted in them.
3.1.5
Mobility: System sub-assemblies shall be capable of relocation by running
new cables to applicable junction box, patch-board or control unit.
3.1.6
Weatherproofing: Weatherproof all units mounted outdoors or subject to
increment conditions.
FIELD TESTS
Conduct testing specified herein in the presence of the Owner.
3.2.1
Page 3 of 4
Intercommunication System Tests: An operational system test shall be
performed to verify conformance of intercommunication system to this
specification. The Contractor shall notify the Owner two (2) weeks prior to
when tests are to be performed so that Owner shall witness tests. These
tests shall include originating and receiving messages at specified stations,
at proper volume levels, without cross talk or noise from other links or nonPUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
designated units.
3.2.2
3.3
Re-testing: Rectify deficiencies indicated by tests and completely re-test
work affected by such deficiencies at Contractor's expense.
INSPECTION
Make observation to verify that units and controls are properly labeled, and
interconnecting wires and terminals identified. Owner shall observe system features
specified.
PART 4 – MEASUREMENT & PAYMENTS
Measurement shall be based on the actual quantity consumed/ installed and in
accordance with the units specified hereunder:
Pay Item No.
Measurement
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Description
Unit
Conduit (specify size and type)
Wires and cables (specify size and type of insulation)
Octagonal boxes
Public address equipment (please provide equipment
breakdown)
Ceiling speaker, 1.5watt
Ceiling speaker, 3watt
Horn type, 10watt
Miscellaneous consumables
Fittings and supports
Testing and commissioning
Others (please specify)
of
lm
lm
ea.
set/s
set/s
set/s
set/s
lot
lot
lot
Payments shall be based on the actual quantity consumed/ installed times the contract
unit price which price constitutes full compensation including materials, labor, tools,
installation equipment and incidentals necessary to complete this work.
*** END OF SECTION ***
Page 4 of 4
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
SECTION 16762
CLOSED CIRCUIT TV SYSTEM
PART I – GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall install a complete CCTV system as shown in the plans and
drawings.
1.2
1.3
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Furnish all labor, materials, supplies, equipment, devices, appliances and
perform all operations necessary for the installation of the complete IP
based CCTV System.
B.
Any equipment not specifically mentioned in the Specifications or not shown
on the Contract Drawings, but deemed necessary for the satisfactory
operation of the system, shall be provided. All cost of such equipment shall
be included in the bid price.
C.
Minimum of Cat5e or Cat6 cable shall be used for IP CCTV camera,
otherwise noted and shall be provided.
SUBMITTALS:
1.3.1
Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's data for all materials and
equipment to be incorporated in the work.
1.3.2
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for the overall system and each
major components. Drawing shall illustrate how each item of equipment will
function, system schematic diagram, one line diagram and equipment
layout.
1.3.3
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit three copies of operating and
maintenance manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
General requirements are as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Page 1 of 8
The system shall be capable of capturing all camera pictures and
shall provide a multi-screen camera display.
The Network Video Recorder (NVR) provided shall operate the
recording process when the system is on the machine command
mode.
System operation and programming shall be accomplished using a
full function keyboard.
Permanent record of system status shall always be available showing
time and dated of changes such as: incoming alarms,
acknowledgement of alarms, loading of sequences, user log-on to
keyboard and a power-up reset message.
All devices equipment and enclosure shall be UL listed or equivalent.
The CCTV system shall utilize PoE (Power-over-Ethernet) technology
based IEEE 802.3af standard Relay Servers (Integrated Security
Switch) which shall serve as power supply for IP-based cameras.
CLOSED CIRCUIT TV SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
7.
8.
2.2
Each Camera and each Relay Server shall have an IP address on a
Network (i.e. LAN, WAN, VPN).
All control commands shall be transmitted over the network using
TCP/IP protocol.
CCTV Camera
A.
Video cameras shall comply with the following minimum requirement:
1.
The IP-cameras utilizing CCD or CMOS shall be of fixed,
pan/tilt/zoom type as indicated in the Drawings.
2.
The Contractor shall propose the suitable lenses appropriate to the
viewing areas and the sensor elements. Automatic aperture control
shall be provided. Where zoom lenses are specified, these shall be
motorized and shall also have an auto-iris and spot filter. The zoom
lens shall be rated at 10:1.
3.
The IP-cameras shall have RJ-45 port for integrated signal and
power over Ethernet, optional 24 VAC socket, mounting holes;
with
built-in local memory storage (micro or mini-SD) for alarm
capturing.
4.
Cameras shall be supplied from the manufacturer with a case to
house the electronics and shall be UL listed. Cameras supplied as
printed circuit board (PCB) assemblies without a case shall not be
acceptable.
5.
Where the lens is inbuilt into the camera (i.e. not interchangeable) a
number of different focal length lens shall be available.
6.
Video cameras shall comply with the following technical data:
Image Sensor
Resolution
Illumination (min)
:
:
:
Video Compression :
Power Supply
:
Environmental
:
Standard
:
Power Over Ethernet :
Capability
:
9.
10.
Page 2 of 8
Refer to floor plan layout for specific
details
min. 30/25 IPS, 1280 x 1024 pixels.
1 lux (color) and/or 0.05 lux (B/W). LUX
reflected light
Motion Jpeg; Mpeg4;
H.264
Power-over-Ethernet or 24VAC
10oC to + 50oC 95% autoRH;
back
focus
during
relatively
high
temperature
Open-IP
IEEE 802.3af compliant
Color and Day/Night
Universal mounting bracket for wall, ceiling and support mounting
plate shall be used for the installation of cameras. The proprietary
bracket shall be compatible to the camera and housing. All brackets
mounts, housing and accessories, used both internally and externally,
shall be suitably manufactured and installed to prevent corrosion,
rusting and deterioration.
Cabling to all cameras shall be neatly loomed, and where housings
are installed contained within a flexible conduit or similar. Flexible
steel conduit shall be used for all external cameras. Sufficient, but
not excessive, slack shall be provided to allow camera alignment
and minimize mechanical stress on both the cable and associated
connectors.
CLOSED CIRCUIT TV SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
11.
2.3
Monitor
A.
Monitors shall comply with the following requirements:
1.
2.
2.4
The camera housing shall be proprietary and shall suit the needs of
the application. Cameras that will be used outdoor shall have a
weatherproof type enclosure. In some areas, where aesthetics
are a concern or camera concealment is necessary, a decorative
enclosure shall be provided. The camera and lens package shall
be suitably installed in
the
housing. The Contractor shall
include full details of camera housings with the bid.
High resolution color video LCD monitors confirming with NTSC,
PAL/SECAM, and HDMI standards shall be provided. Monitor size
shall be as indicated in the drawings and can be used as desktop
units or rack or console mounted.
The equipment shall meet or
exceed the following standard:
TV Standard
Power supply
Power
Consumption
:
:
EIA, 525/625 lines, 60 Hz, 720/1080p
220 Vac 10%, 60 Hz
:
Input
:
Resolution
Deflection
Linearity
:
approx. 30W
1 Vpp can be looped through or
terminated
with 75 ohm by a switch
700 lines in center of picture;
720/1080p
:
10% (horizontal and vertical)
The monitor wall shall be installed within the visual angle view of the
operators. The space below the monitors shall be built as 19” frame
racks for installation for the video alarm units.
NVR
Network Video Recorders (NVR)
and requirements:
Page 3 of 8
shall comply with
the following features
1.
Remote Image through Network (i.e. LAN, WAN, VPN).
password protection for viewing.
with
2.
High compression ratio supporting Mpeg4, H.264, and Motion Jpeg.
3.
Watermarks video protection to avoid video tampering.
4.
Scheduled recording: once daily, weekly, monthly.
5.
Integrated video capture, Video and Audio Recording over TCP/IP
Networks.
6.
Image enhancement, zoom & scaling up to any size on screen.
7.
Easy-to-use user friendly icon-based interface.
8.
On-line context-sensitive help.
9.
Video monitoring and recording on both server site and client site.
10.
Instant retrieval of the specified video segment according to time and
date.
CLOSED CIRCUIT TV SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
11.
Worldwide video standard: NTSC, PAL
12.
Supports up to 16, 32, or 64 Devices
13.
Video and Audio Recording over TCP/IP Networks.
14.
Multitasking simultaneously record, playback,
transmission, schedules, alarm trigger etc.
15.
Can support minimum Terabyte (TB) capacity
16.
Duplex Operation: Simultaneous Recording and Playback
17.
Continuous and Alarm-Based Recording
18.
Full-Featured Search Capabilities: Search Based on Camera, Time, or
Date
19.
Video recording
search,
Period – 90 days of motion detect
Recording at 25 to 30 frames per second (fps).
2.5
20.
Playback control, speed playback, frame by frame, fast forward,
reverse etc.
21.
Video output – VGA or composite.
Network Switches
1.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide or comparable product by one of the following:
1.1
1.2
HP
Cisco
2.
Device Performance: Provides Gigabit Uplink Connectivity and IEEE
802.3af compliant for PoE camera availability.
3.
Ports:
3.1
Auto-sensing 10/100 ports (IEEE 802.3 Type 10Base-T, IEEE
802.3u Type 100Base-TX); Media Type; Auto-MDIX; Duplex, half
or full only.
3.2
3.3
RJ45 serial console.
Auto-sensing 10/100/1000 ports (IEEE 802.3 Type 10Base-T,
IEEE 802.3u Type 100Base-TX, IEEE 802.3ab Type 1000Base); Duplex: 10Base-T/100Base-TX: half or full; 1000Base-T: full
only.Open mini-GBIC (SFP) slots.
Processor: 300 MHz, 16MB flash, 128MB SDRAM; packet
buffer size: 1 MB.
Performance: Up to 13.0 million pps throughput, 17.6 Gbps
routing/switching capacity, table size for 8000 entries.
Mounting: Standard 19-inch (483-mm) rack.
3.4
3.5
3.6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
All work shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
3.1.1
Page 4 of 8
Wiring System:
Provide power wiring, raceway, and outlet boxes for
intercommunications system as specified in Section 16402, "Interior Wiring
Systems."
CLOSED CIRCUIT TV SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
3.2
COMMISSIONING AND TESTING
Commissioning and testing shall be carried out on the entire installation, fully carried
out in part or as whole in accordance with the requirements of this specification.
3.3
TRAINING
Training shall be provided of the Owner's staff until they are familiar with the operation
and maintenance of the complete installation.
--------------- END OF SECTION --------------
Page 5 of 8
CLOSED CIRCUIT TV SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
SECTION 34005
MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor shall furnish and install all materials and miscellaneous equipment as
hereinafter specified or shown on the Drawings.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Circuit breakers shall be molded case with current and voltage ratings as indicated
in the Drawings. Symmetrical RMS amperes interrupting capacity for 230/400 volt
breakers shall not be less than 10,000. An external handle that can be locked in
either “ON” or “OFF” position shall be provided.
B. Enclosure type shall be NEMA 1 in dry locations and NEMA 4 in wet locations.
C. NEMA Type 4 enclosures shall be cast iron or stainless steel.
2.2
WIRING DEVICES
A. Switches
Switches shall be rated at 15 amperes with voltage rating as required. Switches
shall be of the silent type, spring operated, toggle action and flush mounting. The
color, plating and appearance of wall plates shall be as selected by the Engineer
and appropriate samples shall be submitted prior to the purchase of switches and
faceplates.
B. Receptacles
Receptacles outlets in general, shall be for flush mounting, duplex-grounding type
rated at 15 ampere, 125/250 volts connection parallel and tandem slots with
grounding slots unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
C. Device Plates
Plates for flush mounted devices shall be of the required number of gangs for the
application involved and shall be Type 302 (18-8) high nickel stainless steel of the
same manufacturer as the device.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
All miscellaneous equipment shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings.
3.2
TESTS AND CHECKS
The following minimum tests and checks shall be made before energizing the circuit
breakers:
A. Inspect and test all systems and repair or replace defective parts of works and
make all necessary adjustments to the system.
B. Megger terminals for grounds after disconnecting devices sensitive to megger
voltage.
** END OF SECTION **
Page 1 of 1
MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
Part 4-0
Plumbing
Technical Specifications
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
1.02
A.
The General Conditions apply to all work under this section of the
Specifications.
SCOPE OF WORK:
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor or his sub-contractor shall furnish all
materials, tools, equipment, apparatus, appliances, accessories, transportation,
labor and supervision required for the complete installation and testing of the
Plumbing System ready for use in accordance with the best practice of the
Plumbing Trade as listed herein but not limited to the following:
a. The Plumbing Contractor is required to refer to all architectural, structural,
mechanical, fire protection, electrical and interior designs plus landscape
plans and investigate all possible interference and conditions affecting his
work.
b. All work shall comply with the pertinent provisions of the National Building
Code of the Philippines, the Code on Sanitation of the Philippines, the
Uniform Plumbing Code of the Philippines, the National Plumbing Code of the
Philippines, the International Plumbing Code, NFPA, ASHRAE, ASPE and/or
the Local Ordinances of the concered city.
c. Tapping from an existing public water main of the site distribution to include
supply & installation of main water meter and sub-water meters.
d. Water supply and distribution system for the building and ground, including
supply and installation of water tank and accessories and pump piping.
e. Sanitary drainage including soil drainage, waste drainage, aircon drainage
and vent system, within the building.
g. Sewage collection and private disposal system including building sanitary
sewer, sanitary sewer junction boxes, sump pits up to proposed private
sewage disposal system.
h. Building storm drainage system including deck and gutter drains, canopy
drains, plant boxes drains, peripheral drains and building area drains.
i. Site drainage system including parking drains, trench drains, storm sewer
junction boxes, and storm drainage manholes up to the tapping point to the
existing storm sewer system.
j. Installation of owner’s supplied plumbing fixtures, fittings, trims and
accessories.
k. Testing for leakage of all water supply and distribution system, AC drains,
soil, waste and vent system plus pressure testing and disinfections of the
water supply and distribution system.
l. Testing for leakage and disinfections of all water tanks.
m. Supply and installation, test run and start-up of equipments, transfer pumps,
booster pumping systems, sump pumps, circulating pumps and other
equipment under Plumbing/Sanitary Works.
n. Securing of all permits and licenses as required including water connection.
Page 1 of 18
Plumbing
Technical Specifications
o. Excavation and backfilling in connection with the work shall be included.
p. Preparation and submittal of two (2) sets of as-built plans.
q. Furnishing of written, one (1) year warranty on the plumbing system.
1.03
WORK NOT INCLUDED
A.
Construction of oil interceptor tank shall be by Civil Works.
B.
All electrical power wirings, except that furnished as an integral part of factory
assembled equipment except as otherwise specified herein.
C.
Painting except as required by the Plumbing Code and as specified herein.
1.04
NOTES ON DRAWINGS:
A.
The Drawings show the general arrangement all piping. However, where local
and/or actual conditions at the jobsite necessitate a deviation or rearrangement;
the Contractor shall prepare and submit the new arrangement for the Architect's
approval.
B.
Small scale Drawings do not possibly indicate all offsets, fittings and other parts
of the system required. The Contractor shall arrange such work accordingly,
furnishing such fittings, traps valves and accessories as may be required to meet
such conditions.
1.05
A.
APPLICABLE SPECIFICATION, CODES, ORDINANCES, PERMITS & FEES
The work covered in this contract is to be installed according to the specs,
codes, ordinances and requirements of the following:
1. National Plumbing Code of the Philippines
2. Uniform Plumbing Code of the Philippines
3. International Plumbing Code
4. National Building Code of the Philippines
5. NFPA 101 – Life Safety
6. The Code on Sanitation of the Philippines
7. Dept. of Environment & Natural Resources
8. Ordinances of concerned city or municipality
9. Philippine Society of Sanitary Engineers Manuals
B.
Page 2 of 18
10.
American Society of Plumbing Engineers Manuals
11.
American Society of Sanitary Engineers Manuals
All construction permits and fees required for the work shall be obtained by and
at the expense of the contractor. The contractor shall furnish the Owner final
certificates of inspection after the completion of the work.
Plumbing
Technical Specifications
1.06
WORKMANSHIP & COORDINATION WITH TRADES:
A.
All works shall be performed in first class and neat workmanship by mechanics
skilled in their trades and such mechanics and their work shall be satisfactory to
the Engineer.
B.
The Plumbing Contractor is required to refer to the General Conditions and to all
architectural, structural, electrical, mechanical and fire protection plans and
specifications and shall investigate all possible interferences and conditions
affecting his work.
PART 2
PRODUCT
2.01
GENERAL
A.
Except as specified, the Contractor shall submit for the Engineer's approval, four
(4) copies of a complete list of manufacturer's names of all equipment and
materials he proposes to use, within thirty (30) days after award of contract.
B.
The Contractor shall assume the cost of and the entire responsibility for any
change in the work as shown on contract drawings, which may be occasioned by
approval of materials other than, those specified.
2.02
A.
PIPES AND FITTINGS SCHEDULE
Potable and Non Potable Water Lines – from tapping point to water meter to
tank and pump assemblies and risers and down-feeds shall be galvanized steel
iron (G.I.) pipe, schedule 40, conforming to ASTM A 53 - Grade A, ASTM A-12080, "SUPERIOR", “SUPREME” brand or approved equal. Fittings shall be
malleable iron, class 150. Jointing shall be screwed connection. Provide
corrosion protection, coated with petroleum based paste and wrapped with
petrolatum tape “DENSO” brand or equal.
For risers, down feeds, distribution line & roughing- in of toilets shall be
polypropylene pipes & fittings , PN 20, conforming to ASTM F - 2389-15, ASTM
D 1238, ASTM D 1505. Jointing shall be by socket fusion. “AMICO”, "ECOTEC"
, “GEORGE FISHER” brand or approved equal
B.
Soil and Waste Lines – shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipes and fittings
conforming to ASTM D2729, Series 1000 with izod impact test of joules
(minimum) and tensile strength of 48MPa (minimum). Pipes shall be made of
virgin PVC resin and compound with cell #12454D. Fittings shall conform to
ASTM 3311. Pipe and fittings shall be lead free. Jointing shall be by solvent
cement. “NELTEX SANIGUARD”, “EMERALD ULTIMA” or approved equal.
C.
Vent System - shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipes and fittings conforming to
ASTM D2729, Series 1000 or Series 600 II or recommended series as per
manufacturer with izod impact test of joules (minimum) and tensile strength of
48MPa (minimum). Pipes shall be made of virgin PVC resin and compound with
cell #12454D. Fittings shall conform to ASTM 3311. Pipe and fittings shall be lead
free. Jointing shall be by solvent cement. “NELTEX SANIGUARD”, “EMERALD
ULTIMA” or approved equal.
Page 3 of 18
Plumbing
Technical Specifications
E.
FCU/AHU/AC Drain lines – shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipes and fittings,
series 1000 II for 50 mm dia and above, “NELTEX”, “EMERALD” brand or
approved equal.
For 40 mm. dia and below shall be PVC Blue, “NELTEX”, “EMERALD” brand or
approved equal. Jointing shall be solvent cement jointing conforming to ASTM
D2564
Provide 40 mm dia and below shall be PVC Blue, “NELTEX”, “EMERALD” brand
or approved equal. Jointing shall be by solvent cement jointing conforming to
ASTM D564. Provide fiberglass insulation, “ARMAFLEX” brand or approved
equal.
All should be covered with an approved insulation material. Refer mechanical
specifations.
F.
Storm Leaders (Downspouts) – shall be High Density Polyethelyne (HDPE)
pipes and fittings conforming to ASTM F714, SDR 17 with izod impact test of
joules (minimum) and tensile strength of 16 bar (minimum). Fittings shall conform
to ASTM D 3350. Pipe and fittings shall be lead free. Jointing shall be as per
manufacturer's recommendations using buttweld or electro fusion joints.
“"VALSIR" , "VESBO" , "WAVIN" or approved equal. All through out to the Catch
Basins/Area Drains.
G.
Storm Drainage Collector – shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipes and fittings
conforming to ASTM D2729, Series 1000 with izod impact test of joules
(minimum) and tensile strength of 48MPa (minimum). Pipes shall be made of
virgin PVC resin and compound with cell #12454D. Fittings shall conform to
ASTM 3311. Pipe and fittings shall be lead free. Jointing shall be by solvent
cement. “NELTEX SANIGUARD”, “EMERALD ULTIMA” or approved equal.
Concrete drainage pipe (CDP), tongue & groove, mortar joints, reinforced for 300
mm. dia. & larger.
2.03
VALVES
A.
Gate valve - 50 mm. dia. & larger, shall be rising stem, iron body with bronze
trim, flanged connection, min. of 150 psig working pressure. 65 mm. dia. &
smaller, shall be rising stem, all bronze, female threaded, min. of 150 psig
working connection, "Matco”, “Kitz”, “Honeywell” or approved equal.
B.
Check Valve - for booster pumps, 50 mm. dia. & larger shall be iron body with
bronze trim, flanged connection, min. of 150 psig working pressure. 65 mm. dia.
& smaller, same except female threaded connection. "Bermad" brand or
approved equal.
C.
Float Valve - shall be hydraulically operated, diaphragm actuated valve with the
pilot control and float mechanism mounted on the cover of the main valve. The
float positions the pilot control to close the valves when float contacts the upper
stop and to open the valve when the float contacts the lower stop, "Bermad"
brand or approved equal.
D.
Pressure Reducing & Pressure Sustaining Valve - shall be double
chambered, hydraulically operated pilot controlled, diaphragm type globe valve.
The control system shall consist of a reducing control sensitive to diaphragm
pressure changes and pressure sustaining control that is sensed to the main
valve inlet, similar to "Bermad" brand Model 723 (Y-Pattern) or approved equal.
Page 4 of 18
Plumbing
Technical Specifications
E.
2.04
A.
Pressure Relief Valve - shall be a diaphragm type valve to maintain constants
upstream pressure to close limits. The valve shall be hydraulically-operated, pilot
controlled modulating type, main body at cover to Cast Iron ASTM-A1 with
adjustment ranges, 20 to 200 PSIG similar to "Bermad" brand Model 730-Q.
OTHER MATERIALS
Drains – “Jaman by Eurobrass” or approved equal.
1. Roof / Gutter
2. Floor/ Shower
3. Deck
4. Canopy
5. Area Drain
6. Floor cleanout
7. Planters Drain
8. Trench Drain
9. Scupper Drain
10. Gutter Drain
11. Parking Drains
B.
Water Meter – “ROCKWELL” “BADGER” or MWSI approved
C.
Hose Bibbs - 20 mm. dia. standard hose connection, male tapered threads,
polished chromium plated. “Price Pfister”
D.
Outdoor Pipe Lines, Appurtenances:
E.
Drainage Junction Boxes - 140 kg/sq. c. m. reinforced concrete with pre-cast
reinforced concrete cover.
1. Thrust Blocks - 140 kg/sq. c. m. plain concrete
2. Sewer Junction Boxes - 140 kg/sq. c. m. reinforced concrete with C.I. grating
cover.
3. Area-Drain/Catch Basin - 140 kg/sq. reinforced concrete with C.I. grating
cover.
6. Cistern - 210 kg/sq. c.m. reinforced concrete.
2.05
JOINTING
A.
Flanged Joint Gasket - GARLOCK or equal.
B.
Screwed Joints - U.S. Federal Specifications GG-P-251.
C.
PVC Pipes and Fittings - PVC cement or as per the Manufacturer's
recommendations.
D.
Polyethylene/Polypropylene pipes and brass fittings or by fusion welding.
E.
Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipes - sleeve type coupling & gasket for hubless
Page 5 of 18
Plumbing
Technical Specifications
pipes, conforming to ASTM Standard C-26.
F.
Centrifugal Gray cast Iron – Bell and Spigot, gasketed sliptite joint
G.
Dissimilar Pipes – Adaptor fittings shall be used.
H.
Concrete Drain Pipe – Cement mortar
PART 3
IDENTIFICATION & APPROVAL OF MATERIALS :
A.
Each length of pipe, fittings, traps, fixtures, and device used in the Plumbing
System shall have cast, tamped or marked on it, the manufacturer's trade mark
or name, weight, type and classes of product when so required by the Standard.
C.
Within thirty (30) days after award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit for
the
D.
Architect's approval, the names of suppliers and materials proposed including
trade names and/or samples of the materials if deemed necessary.
E.
Brand names mentioned in this Specification are only for the purposes of
indicating the desired quality and design.
PART 4
A.
SUBSTITUTION & TESTING OF MATERIALS :
Intended materials substituted from those originally specified shall be accepted
only after a formal request for substitution, accompanied by:
1.
Reasons for substitutions;
2.
Certificate of test indicating quality, compared to those originally specified.
3.
Cost comparisons with material originally specified. Requests shall be
submitted to the Architect for evaluation at least 15 working days before
installation of subject material is due, or at least 7 days before opening of
bids.
B.
Cost of testing of materials, whether on originally specified items or on
substitution, shall be to the account of the Contractor.
F.
Results of tests shall be submitted to the Architect for evaluation at least 15 days
before the material is due for installation on the job.
PART 5
SOIL, WASTE, AND VENT PIPES :
5.01
GENERAL
A.
Soil, waste and vent pipes and fittings shall be as stated under Part 2 of this
Specification.
B.
All sewer and drainage pipes shall be pitched 6 mm. per 300 mm. but in no case
flatter than 3 mm. per 300 mm.
5.02
A.
Page 6 of 18
SUPPORTS
Horizontal lines shall be supported by well secured length heavy-duty
straphangers or floor chairs as required. Hooks to the building frame shall secure
vertical lines strongly and a suitable bracket or chairs shall be provided at the
Plumbing
Technical Specifications
floors from which they start.
B.
Cast iron soil pipes in trenches under the ground shall be laid true the line and
grade on a stable and suitably prepared foundation, each section of the pipe
being properly bedded.
C.
In soft ground liable to settlement, a gravel base 300 mm. deep and twice the
width of the pipe shall be rolled or tamped. Backfilling shall be carefully placed
and tamped for the purpose, in such a manner that the pipe lines or connections
are not disturbed.
5.03
TRAPS
A. Every plumbing fixture shall be separately trapped by a vented water sealed trap as
close to the fixture outlets as the conditions allow, but in no case at a distance greater
than 600 mm. In case of the upper or the only fixture on a soil pipe extended full size
through the roof, a vent shall not be required when said fixture has its center stack.
Traps shall be of the same diameter as the waste pipes from the fixtures that they
shall serve, all traps shall have a water seal of at least 32 mm. with a brass
thumbscrew cleanout at the bottom of the seal.
5.04
VENTS
A.
Vent shall be taken from the crown of the fixtures, except for water closet traps,
in which case, the branch line shall be vented below and trap and above all small
waste inlets, so connected as to prevent obstructions. Each vent pipe shall be
run separately above the fixtures into the adjacent soil pipes, a distance not
more than 1.50 meters. If more than this distance, the vent shall run
independently through the roof.
B.
A vent line shall be wherever practicable, direct extension of a soil or waste line.
C.
Main vent risers at 4.5 meters along or more shall be connected at the foot with
the main waste or soil pipes below the lowest vent outlet with a forty-five degree
(45) connection.
D.
All vertical soil or vent pipes shall be carried up at least 600 mm above the roof
of the building and the open side ends are to be entirely and securely covered
with ga.16 mesh copper cloth.
E.
Vent pipes in roof spaces shall be run as close as possible to the underside of
roof with horizontal piping pitched down to stacks without forming traps. Where
an end or circuit vent pipes from fixtures it shall be connected into the main vent
or vent stack.
5.05
A.
Page 7 of 18
ROUGHING - IN
Roughing - in for pipes and fixtures shall be carried along with the building
construction. Correctly located openings of proper sizes shall be provided where
required in the walls and floors for the passage of pipes all items to be
embedded in concrete shall be thoroughly clean and free from all rust, scale and
paint.
Plumbing
Technical Specifications
5.06
FITTINGS
All changes in pipes sizes on soil, waste and storm lines shall be made with
reducing fittings or reducers. All changes in direction shall be made by the
appropriated use of forty-five degrees (45) wyes, or long sweep bends, except
that sanitary toes may be used on vertical stacks. Short quarter bends or elbows
may be used in soil and waste lines where the change in direction is from the
horizontal to the vertical and on the discharge from the water closet.
5.07
A.
JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS
All joints shall be air and watertight. For joining pipes, the following shall be used:
1. Cast iron soil and waste pipes & fittings, hubless sleeve type joints.
2. Centrifugal gray cast iron – Bell and spigot, gasketed sliptite joint
3. Cast iron - Bell and spigot, lead and oakum
4. Galvanized wrought iron or steel piped; screwed or threaded joint; use
sealant.
5. Lead to cast iron pipes; Adaptor fittings, screwed and hubless coupling gasket
joints.
6. Concrete pipes; bell and spigot or tongue and groove.
7. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipes, socket type with PVC cement.
8. Polyethylene/Polypropylene pipes, brass fittings and electro fusion or socket
fusion joints.
PART 6
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
6.01
METER
A.
Water meters shall be furnished by the Contractor and installed with the proper
and complete piping arrangements for the system.
B.
The exact dimensions for setting the meter shall be as per requirements of the
MWSI.
6.02
INSTALLATION
A.
The piping shall be extended to all fixtures, outlets and equipment from the gate
valves installed in the branch near the riser.
B.
Unions shall be provided where required for disconnection.
C.
All pipes shall be cut accurately to measurements and shall be worked into place
without springing or facing. Care shall be taken so as not to weaken the
structural portions of the building.
D.
All service pipes valves and fittings shall be kept at sufficient distance from work
to permit finished covering not less than 15 mm from such work or from finished
Page 8 of 18
Plumbing
Technical Specifications
covering on the different service.
E.
Changes in pipes shall be made with reducing fittings.
F. Accessible Contraction - Expansion joints shall be made wherein necessary.
Horizontal runs of pipe over 15 m. in length shall be anchored to wall or the
supporting structure about midway on the run to force expansion and contraction
equally towards the ends.
PART 7
EXCAVATING, PIPE LAYING AND BACKFILLING :
7.01
TRENCHES
Trenches for all underground pipelines shall be excavated to the required depths
and grades. Bell holes shall be provided so that pipe will rest on well-tamped
solid ground for its entire length. Where rock is encountered, excavation shall
extend to a depth 150 mm below the pipe bottom and other approved filling
materials.
7.02
CONCRETE PROTECTION
All pipes except concrete pipes and cast iron soil pipes that will run underground
shall be protected with Class B concrete casing, a minimum or 100 mm around
the pipe perimeter and 250 mm below the finish grade.
7.03
MATERIALS
Materials for backfilling shall be free of debris or big rocks. Backfill shall be
placed in horizontal layers, properly moistened and compacted to an optimum
density that will prevent excessive settlement and shrinkage.
PART 8
MISCELLANEOUS
8.01
CLEANOUTS
Cleanout shall be of the same size as the pipe, the location of which is extended
to an easily accessible place.
8.02
TRAPS
A.
Every plumbing fixture of equipment requiring connections to the drainage
system shall be equipped with a trap.
B.
Each trap shall be placed as near as possible to the fixture. No fixture shall be
double trapped.
8.03
VALVES AND HOSE BIBBS
A.
Valves shall be provided on all water supplies to fixtures as specified.
B.
Hose bibbs shall be made of brass with 15 mm. dia. make male inlet threads
hexagon shoulders and 20 mm. dia. connections.
8.04
A.
Page 9 of 18
PIPE HANGERS INSERTS AND SUPPORTS
Horizontal runs of pipe shall be hung with adjustable wrought iron or malleable
iron pipe hangers spaced not over 3 m. apart, except hub and spigot soil pipes
which shall have hangers spaced not over 1.52 m. apart and located near the
hub.
Plumbing
Technical Specifications
B.
Hangers shall have short turnbuckles or other approved means of adjustment.
C.
Inserts shall be of cast steel and shall be of type to receive a machine bolt or nut
after installation.
D. Wrought iron clamps shall be use to support vertical pipe runs or collars
spaced not more than 9 m. apart.
E.
8.05
Water and Vent Pipes - 65 mm. dia. and larger; band type 6.1 mm x 25 mm flat
mild steel or black iron with 15 mm. dia. round rod with plates and nuts; 50 mm.
dia. and smaller split ring type with 10 mm. dia. iron rods with inserts plates;
toggle bolts, clamps or expansion shield.
PIPE SLEEVES
A.
Pipe sleeves shall be installed and properly secured in place at all points where
pipes pass through masonry or concrete.
B.
Pipe sleeves shall be of sufficient diameter to provide approximately 6.1 mm
clearance around the pipe of insulation.
C.
Pipe sleeves in walls and partitions shall be of cast iron, wrought iron or steel
pipe. Pipe sleeves in concrete beams or concrete slabs shall be wrought iron or
steel pipe. Pipe sleeves in concrete beams or concrete slabs shall be wrought
iron or steel pipe.
D.
Pipe sleeves on footings shall be cast iron or steel and shall be not less than 100
mm. dia. larger in diameter than the pipe to be installed.
E.
Where pipes pass through waterproofing membrane, the sleeves shall be
provided with an integral flange or clamping device to which a flashing shield can
be soldered.
F.
The space between the pipes and sleeves shall be made watertight by inserting
a picked oakum gasket and filling the remaining space with poured lead caulking
thoroughly.
PART 9
FIXTURES, FITTINGS, AND ACCESSORIES
9.01
Verify architects specification
PART 10 PUMPS
10.01
GENERAL
A.
All requirements shall be supplied from reputable firms engaged in the
manufacture of each particular item. The entire assembly as installed shall be
given a start-up and test run to prove that all the specifications have been met
before acceptance by the Owner. The test duration shall be 24 hours. Submittal
of the Certificate of Test to the Owner's shall be a condition of final payment.
B.
The Specification herein stated are basic guide only. Other items not so
indicated but which are obviously necessary for the proper operation of system
as intended shall be supplied in accordance with accepted engineering
standards.
C.
The equipment shall be guaranteed for a period of at least one (1) year of trouble
free operation. The supplier of equipment shall certify to the availability of spare
parts locally and service in case of system breakdowns within a period of at least
three (3) years. Manuals of operation and maintenance and lists of spare parts
shall be supplied together with the equipment. Submittal of Warranty Certificate
Page 10 of 18
Plumbing
Technical Specifications
shall be on condition to the final payment.
D.
The supplier shall submit at least two (2) copies of pumps performance curves
showing among others, the pump rating and pump efficiency, properly marked
thereon.
Accessories to be supplied for each group shall include one non-slam type check
valve, two (2) gate valves, approved type of strainer, 2 flexible connection; of
size equal to the size of pump discharge and suction and rated 150 psi. Also,
one pressure gauge for each set of pumps and pipe fittings necessary for
complete installation shall be provided. The pressure gauge shall be 100 mm.
face diameter and shall be reading from 0 psi (or kg/cm) to 100 psi (or 7kg/cm).
E.
Price quoted shall include cost delivery of all quoted items to the jobsite. Pump
and motor installation dimension drawings shall be submitted together with the
quotation.
F.
The brands, names, and place of manufacture of pump, motor, valves, controls
and all accessories where applicable shall be indicated in the quotation. Also, a
description of pump impellers being offered shall be included.
G.
A metal nameplate indicating in indelible letters the correct specifications of the
pump and motor shall be properly attached to the assembly at a location such
that the information written thereon can be conveniently read by all concerned.
I.
A separate price shall be quoted for installation work and preparation submittal
of as installed drawings.
10.02
CONSTANT PRESSURE SYSTEM:
Verify approved buying specification
PART 11
WATER RESERVOIR
11.01
WATER TANKS – Shall be Glass Reinforced Plastic Tank, conforming to the
Singapore Standards SS245:1995 Cross reference to British Standar BS 7491
Part 3: 199 and BS EN 13280:2001. "PIPECO" or approved equal.
11.02
PIPING, FITTINGS AND MISCELLANEOUS METAL WORKS
A.
Furnish and install all pipe fittings, valves, specials, pipe supports, miscellaneous
metal work and all required appurtenances as shown on the plans and as
required to make the entire piping system operable.
B.
All materials furnished and installed shall be new and guaranteed free from
defect in design, materials and workmanship.
C.
Adequate protective measures shall be provided to project pipes, fittings, valves
and all other materials from damage or injury during storage and installation.
11.03
FLANGES, GASKETS, AND BOLTS:
A.
Flanges shall conform in dimensions and drilling to ASA B-16.1 Class 125.
B.
Gaskets shall be ring-type JOHN MANSVILLE or cranite.
Page 11 of 18
Plumbing
Technical Specifications
C.
11.04
A.
11.05
A.
Bolts shall be standard square head machine bolts with heavy, hot, pressed
hexagon nuts. Threads shall conform to ASA B-1.1, coarse thread series, Class
2 fit.
LADDER RUNGS:
Ladder Rungs shall be of 20 mm. diameter round stainless steel bar.
INSTALLATION:
All pipes shall be carefully placed and supported at the proper lines and grade
where possible shall be sloped to permit complete draining.
B.
Piping runs shown on Drawings shall be followed as closely as possible, except
for minor adjustments to avoid adverse-effect on architectural and / or structural
features. If major relocations are required, they shall be subjected to the
approval of the Architect.
C.
Carefully inspect all pipe and fittings before installation. Inspection of pipe shall
include light tapping with a hammer to detect cracks of defects. No pipe fittings
or valve which is cracked or shown defects shall be used.
D.
Suitable anchors, brackets, or hangers shall be provided to all piping. Vertical
pipes shall be anchored by suitable galvanized steel straps. Pipe supports shall
be provided as shown on the plans and whenever else necessary to prevent
stain on joints or to facilitate taking down pipe.
E.
Piping through the Walls - Where the pipe pass through walls, care shall be
exercised to insure this joint are watertight.
11.06
A.
11.07
TESTS FOR WATER:
Tightness of Completed Tank - The completed elevated tank shall be tested for
water-tightness by filling it up with clean water after cleaning out all dirt and
debris inside the tank. The water shall be allowed to stand for a minimum period
of 24 hours reckoned from the time the free-board line was reached during filling
up. After the 24 hour period there shall be no drop in water level in the tank more
than 40 mm, otherwise, the leaks shall be located and plugged properly and the
test for water-tightness be repeated
DEFECTIVE WORK:
A.
If the inspection and test show any defect such defective work or material shall
be replaced and the test shall be repeated until such satisfactory to the Owner.
B.
All repairs shall be made with new material at the expense of the Contractor.
C. No caulking of screwed joints or holes will be accepted.
PART 12
A.
Page 12 of 18
GREASE INTERCEPTORS:
Grease Interceptor (tenant supplied) - Furnish and install where indicated on the
drawing grease interceptors (traps) with a flow rate of 7 gpm. (min.) to serve a
kitchen sink.
Plumbing
Technical Specifications
B.
Overall efficiency of the interceptor shall not be less than 90% when operating at
the specified rate of flow.
C.
Furnish and install central grease tank as required on plans. Verify drawings.
PART 13
OIL INTERCEPTORS:
A
Furnish and install where indicated on the Drawing an oil intercepting system,
complete with oil interceptor, venting system, intake and discharge piping, test
and suction line, oil storage tank and all fittings and accessories necessary for
complete oil intercepting system, ready for use.
B.
The oil interceptor shall be cast iron construction with a flow rate capacity of 20
gpm. (min.). Inlet and outlet size shall be both 50 mm. (min.).
PART 14 WATER METERS
A.
Furnish and install where indicated on the Drawings main water meter and subwater meters with sizes as shown on drawings, shall be "ARAD", “ASAHI” or
MWSI approved equal.
PART 15 SITE PLUMBING UTILITIES:
15.01
GENERAL
A.
The entire site plumbing utilities system shall be laid out and installed consistent
throughout with the given slopes in the plans. Pipe joints and connections to area
drains, catch basin, and junction boxes shall possess such leak-proof and
seepage proof integrity achievable with the works called for under this particular
section of the Specifications.
B.
Junction Boxes for storm & sanitary (sewer) drainage lines outside the building
shall be cast-in place reinforced concrete sections and pre-cast concrete over.
C.
Trench excavation and backfilling shall be as specified in excavation, trenching
and backfilling for utility system.
D.
Concrete Drainage Pipe:
1. Material, Pipe shall be reinforced concrete pipe (300 mm dia. & larger) and
non-reinforced concrete pipe 250 mm dia. & smaller conforming to ASTM
C14-75.
2. INSTALLATION:
a. Bedding surfaces shall provide a firm foundation, carefully shaped true to
line and grade.
b. Concrete pipe shall be laid carefully with hubs upgrade and ends fully and
closely joints. Joints shall be cement mortar. Cement mortar shall consist
of one part Portland Cement and 1 1/2 parts clean sharp sand with only
enough water for work-ability. A gasket of closely twisted hemp or Oakum
shall be placed around the pipe. The gasket shall be in one (1) piece of
suitable diameter (not less than 19 mm) and shall be lapped at the top.
The gasket shall be saturated with that cement before being placed and
rammed. The joint shall be completely filled with cement mortar and
rammed thoroughly with wooden calking tool. The joint shall then be
overfilled and finished to a smooth level outside.
Page 13 of 18
Plumbing
Technical Specifications
15.02
A.
EXCAVATION FOR STORM & SANITARY (SEWER SYSTEM)
General.
The Contractor shall do all excavation of whatever substances encountered
below depth shown on drawings. Excavated materials not required for fill or
backfill shall be removed from site as directed by the Engineer and disposed of
by the Contractor. Excavation for accessories to have 300 mm minimum and 60
mm maximum clearance in all side. Excavation shall not carried below the
required depth. Excess excavation below required level shall be backfilled at the
Contractor's expense with earth, sand, gravel or concrete, as directed by
Engineer, and thoroughly tamped unstable soil shall be removed and replaced
with gravel or crushed stone, which shall be thoroughly tamped.
The Engineer shall determine the depth of removal of unstable soil. Ground
adjacent to all excavation shall be graded to prevent water running. The
Contractor shall remove by pumping or other means approved by the Engineer
any water accumulated in excavation and keep trench from water until the
bedding is complete.
B.
Trench Excavation. Banks of trenches shall be vertical. Soft materials shall be
reported to the Engineer. In rock, excavation shall be carried 200 mm below
bottom of pipe. Loose earth or gravel shall be used for backfill, and tamped
thoroughly and rounded to received pipe as above.
C.
Rock Excavation. Rock excavation shall include removal of boulders larger than
1/2 m 3 in volume and ledge rock concrete or masonry structures that required
drilling in volume and ledge rock concrete.
D.
Bracing and Shoring. The Contractor shall do all bracing sheathing and shoring
necessary to perform and protect all excavation as indicated on the plans, as
required for safety, as directed by the Architect, or to conform to governing laws.
15.03
TESTING:
Test: Test for workmanship on utility lines shall be conducted in accordance with
the applicable utility specification before backfilling.
15.04
A.
BACKFILLING:
Backfilling: After pipes have been tested and approved, backfilling shall be done
with approved material free for large clods or stones.
1. Trenches. Backfilling material shall be placed evenly and carefully around and
over pipe in 150 mm maximum layers. Each layer shall be thoroughly and
carefully rammed until 300 mm of cover exists over pipe. The remainder of
backfill material shall be placed, moistened and compacted. Water settling will
not be permitted in clay soils. It may be required at the option of the Engineer
in sandy soils.
2. Trench under areas to be paved. Material shall be placed in 200 mm
maximum layers after filling 300 mm above pipe as previously described.
Each layer shall be compacted to density equal to that of adjacent original
material so that pavement can be placed immediately.
3. Structures: All forms, trash, and debris shall be removed and cleared away.
Approved backfill material may come from excavation or borrow. It shall be
free from rock, lumber or debris. Backfill material shall be placed
symmetrically on all side in eight (8) inch maximum layers. Each layer shall be
Page 14 of 18
Plumbing
Technical Specifications
moistened and compacted with mechanicals or hand tampers. In area to be
paved, each layer shall be compacted to density equal to that of adjacent
materials so that pavement can be placed immediately.
B.
Maintenance. The Contractor shall refill for settlement all backfilled areas.
C.
Clean-up. The Contractor shall clean up and dispose of all excess materials,
trash, wood forms and other debris.
PART 16 TEST AND DISINFECTION :
16.01
DRAINAGE SYSTEM TEST
A.
The entire drainage and venting system shall have all necessary openings which
can be plugged to permit the entire system to be filled with water to the level of
the highest stack vent / or vent stack above the roof.
B.
The system shall hold this water for a full thirty (30) minutes during which time
there shall be no drop more than 100 mm.
C.
Each section of pipeline shall be slowly filled water and the specified test
pressure, measured at the point of lowest elevation shall be applied by means of
a pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Architect. During
the filling of the pipe in and before applying the test pressure, all air shall be
expelled from the pipeline. To accomplish this type shall be made, if necessary,
at point of highest elevation, and after completion of the test the taps shall be
tightly plugged unless otherwise specified.
During the test, all expose pipes, fittings, valves joints and couplings will be
carefully examined. Defective materials shall be removed and replaced with
sound materials at the Contractor’s expense. The test shall be replaced until a
satisfactory result has been obtained.
16.02
PRESSURE TESTS FOR WATER LINES:
A.
After the pipe have been installed, the joints completed and with joints exposed
for examination, all newly installed pipe or any valve section therefore, shall be
subjected to hydrostatic pressure 1 1/2 the designed working pressure of the
system or as specified by the Architect.
B.
The duration of each pressure test shall be at least 10 minutes unless otherwise
specified by the Sanitary Engineer.
C.
Each section of pipeline shall be slowly filled water and the specified test
pressure, measured at the point of lowest elevation, shall be applied by means of
a pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Architect. During
the filling of the pipe and before applying the test pressure, all air shall be
expelled from the pipeline. To accomplish this type shall be made, if necessary,
at point of highest elevation and after completion of the test the taps shall be
tightly plugged unless otherwise specified. During the test, all exposed pipes,
fittings, valves, joints and couplings will be carefully examined. Defective
materials shall be removed and replaced with sound materials at the Contractor’s
expense. The test shall be then be repeated until satisfactory results are
obtained.
Page 15 of 18
Plumbing
Technical Specifications
16.03
DEFECTIVE WORK:
A.
If the inspection or test shows any defect, such defective work or material shall
be replaced and the test shall be repeated until satisfactory to the Architect.
B.
All repairs to piping shall be made with new material at the expense of the
contractor.
C.
No caulking of screwed joints of holes will be accepted.
16.04
DISINFECTION OF WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM AND WATER TANKS
( as per AWWA C-601 )
A.
The entire water system shall be thoroughly flushed and disinfected with chlorine
before it is placed on operation. Water tanks shall be washed and swabbed.
B.
Chlorination materials shall be liquid chlorine or hypochlorite, as specified and
shall be introduced into the water lines in manner approved by the Engineer.
Tanks shall be thoroughly cleaned of all debris, dirt or dust before swabbing.
C.
The chlorine dosage shall be such as to provide not less than fifty parts per
million (50ppm.) or available chlorine unless otherwise specified by a Sanitary
Engineer.
D.
Following a contact period of not less than sixteen (16) hours, the heavily
chlorinated water shall be flushed from the system with clean water until the
residual chlorine content os not greater than two tenth (0.20 ppm.). All valves in
water lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the
16-hour chlorinating period.
PART 17 CLEANING :
A.
All exposed metal surfaces shall be free of grease, dirt or other foreign
materials.
B.
Chrome or nickel plated piping, fittings and trimmings shall be polished upon
completion.
C.
All plumbing fixtures shall be properly protected from use and damage during the
construction stage. The fixtures shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the
Architect upon completion & prior to acceptance of work.
D.
All equipment, pipes, valves and fittings shall be cleaned of grease and sludge
which may have accumulated. The Contractor shall repair any clogging,
discoloration or damage to other parts of the building due to the system.
PART 18 PAINTING AND PROTECTION :
A.
All exterior of piping to be installed in or through concrete floor or fill floors and
underground shall be given one coat of acid resisting paint having a bituminous
base.
B.
Pipe hanger, supports and all other iron work in concealed spaces shall be
painted with one coat of asphalt.
Page 16 of 18
Plumbing
Technical Specifications
C.
Exposed galvanized iron pipes and fittings that are asphalt coated shall be given
two coats of shellac prior to application of two coats of iol paint as directed by
the Architect or Engineer.
PART 19 COLOR CODE FOR EXPOSED PIPES:
A.
All exposed piping shall be adequately and durably identified by distinctive colored
paints as follows:
ITEM
COLOR CODE
cold water pipe
blue
hot water pipe
blue pipe w/ red band @ 1 m . O.C.
storm water pipe
aluminum
soil pipe
black
vent pipe
green
waste pipe
gray
PART 20 WARRANTY & "AS-BUILT" PLANS :
A.
All works, equipment and fixtures shall be guaranteed by the Contractor for
satisfactory service for a minimum period for one (1) year.
B.
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner, in reproducible form plus three (3)
sets of white prints, the complete plans of the entire system as actually built. The
cost of these shall be borne by the Contractor. Submittal of "AS BUILT" Plans
shall be a condition to final payment.
C.
Equipment shall have the Owner (s) your minimum guaranteed against defective
designs, materials and workmanship.
1.
Booster Pumps
2.
Transfer Pumps
3.
Sump Pumps
4.
Elevator Sump Pump
PART 21 RESPONSIBILITIES:
A.
The general Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination among the
different trades on the job in order to finish the work in the least possible time, in
strict accordance with the Plans and Specification.
1. Throughout the construction period open ends of all temporary plugs.
2. Drainage lines shall not be used to conduct dirty construction wash water
especially those with cement mixes to avoid possible clogging.
3. A temporary fire protection system shall be provided by the contractor during
the construction period. This shall be of sufficient capacity to put out any fire
that may break out at any floors due to construction operations. This is in
addition to temporary fire extinguisher required.
4. A temporary potable water supply shall be made available to construction
Page 17 of 18
Plumbing
Technical Specifications
workers at every floor as construction progresses.
5. The Contractor shall provide a temporary human excreta disposal system to
serve the workers during the construction period.
-END OF SPECIFICATION-
Page 18 of 18
Plumbing
Part 5-0
Fire Protection
FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
The scope of work to be done on this division of the specification consist of
the fabrication complete in all details of fire protection. The installation shall
be in accordance with governing codes and regulations. The requirements in
regards to materials and workmanship specify the required standards for the
furnishing of all labor, materials and appliances necessary for the complete
installatioin of the work specified herein and indicated on the drawings.
1.2
QUALIFICATION OF INSTALLER:
The Contractor shall submit with the bid data for approval showing that the
Contractor has successfully installed fire protection systems, and equipment
of the same type and design as specified herein.
The Contractor shall submit the following:
1.
Contractor's organizational chart and name of personnel.
2.
Financial statement
3.
List of fire protection projects that have been completed and contract
amount.
4.
Company profile
Indicate the type and design of each system and certify that each system has
performed satisfactorily in the manner intended for a period of not less than
18 months.
1.3
1.4
WORK DONE BY OTHERS:
A.
Approved fire
requirements.
suppression
system
as
warranted
by
special
B.
All power supply to fire suppression detection devices, notification
devices and equipment control panels.
SUBMITTALS:
Submit shop drawings, manufacturer's data and certificates for equipment,
materials and finish, and pertinent details for each system as specified in
each individual section, and obtain approval from the Consultant before
procurement, fabrication, or delivery to the job site. Approval of submittal shall
not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of inspecting such material or
equipment for defects or non-conforming with the specifications.
Partial
submittals are not acceptable and will be returned without review. Submittals
shall include the manufacturer's name, trade name, catalog model or number,
nameplate data, size, layout dimensions, capacity, project specification and
Page 1 of 3
FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
paragraph reference, applicable, industry, and technical society publication
references, years of satisfactory service, and other information necessary to
establish contract compliance of each item the Contractor proposes to
provide. Photographs of existing installations and data submitted in lieu of
catalog data are not acceptable and will be returned without approval.
1.5
A.
Shop Drawings: Drawings shall include floor plans, sectional views,
wiring diagrams, and installation details of equipment, and equipment
spaces identifying and indicating proposed location, layout and
arrangement of items of equipment, control panels, accessories,
piping, and other items that must be shown to assure a coordinated
installation. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation,
maintenance, and replacements of operating equipment devices. If
equipment is disapproved, drawings shall be revised to show
acceptable equipment and be resubmitted.
B.
Manufacturer's Data: Submittals for each manufactured item shall be
of manufacturer's descriptive literature of cataloged products,
equipment drawings, diagrams, performance and characteristic
curves, and catalog cuts.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Where installation procedures
or any part thereof are required to be in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed,
printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished prior to
installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until
the recommendations are received.
Failure to furnish these
recommendations can be cause for rejection of the material.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
Equipment and materials shall be handled, stored, and protected to prevent
damage before and during installation in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Damaged or defective items shall be replaced.
1.6
STANDARDS PRODUCTS/SERVICE AVAILABILITY:
A.
Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer
regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products, which are of
similar material, design and workmanship. The standard products
shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for two (2)
years prior to bid opening.
B.
Service Support: The equipment items shall be supported by service
organizations. The Contractor shall submit a certified list of qualified
permanent service organizations for support of the equipment which
includes their addresses and qualifications.
These service
organizations shall be reasonably convenient to the equipment
installation and able to render satisfactory service to the equipment on
a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the
contract.
C.
Manufacturer's Nameplate: Each item of equipment shall have a
nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number,
and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the
nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.
Page 2 of 3
FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.7
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS:
A.
1.8
Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting setscrews, keys,
rotating parts, and other power transmission apparatus, located so
that any person can come in close proximity thereto, shall be fully
located or properly guarded. Points of operation, ingoing nip points,
and machinery producing flying chips and sparks shall be guarded.
AS-BUILT DRAWING:
After completion, but before final acceptance of the work, furnish a complete
set of as-built drawings covered by scope of work for record and occupancy
permit purposes. The Contractor Professional Engineer shall sign the as-built
drawing in applying for occupancy permit.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1
INSTALLATION:
Equipment, materials, installation and workmanship shall be in accordance
with the applicable standard of the National Fire Protection Association, Fire
Code of the philippines or any equivalent local/Int'l standards.
2.2
ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK:
The Consultant shall witness the formal test and approve the systems before
they are accepted by the Owner.
2.3
GUARANTEE:
All equipment and installation shall be guaranteed for one (1) year from the
date of acceptance against failure of components resulting from normal use
or factory defects. Any parts of the system or equipment that becomes
defective during the term of guarantee shall be repaired or replaced by the
Contractor at his own expense.
Page 3 of 3
FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
Description
A. Comply with - General Requirements and all documents referred to therein.
B. Provide all labor, material, equipment and appliances, and perform all
operations for the work as outlined in the specifications and delineated on the
Drawings for the installation of complete Sprinkler System in the proposed
tenancy location. All work shall be performed in strict accordance with these
specifications and the Drawings. Secure and pay for permits, fees and
inspections required for the approval of Fire Sprinkler systems. Perform
hydraulic calculations, and file the shop drawings and the calculations with
Factory Mutual and the Building Authorities.
C. The contract drawing and specifications are complimentary to each other and
any labor or material for by either, whether or not called for both if necessary
for the successful operation of any of the particular type of the equipment
furnished and installed without additional cost of the Procuring Entity.
D. GENERAL CONTRACTOR for this work shall be held to have read all of the
tender requirements, the General Conditions, and in the execution of work he
will be bound by all of the conditions and requirements therein.
E. Following is a brief outline and description of the work included, but shall not
be considered as complete and all inclusive:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Pipe and Fittings
Joints
Hangers and Supports
Pipe Sleeves
Valves
Sprinkler Heads
Fire Extinguishers
F. It is not intended that the drawings shall show every pipes,fittings, valve and
equipment. All such items whether specifically mentioned or not, or indicated
on the drawings,shall be furnished and installed if necessary to complete the
system in accordance with the best practice of the fireprotection trade and to
the satisfaction of the Procuring Entity.
1.2
Quality Assurance
A. All materials and equipment shall be produced in a plant of recognized
reputation and regularly engaged in the production of pipes and/or equipment
conforming to the specified standards. A single manufacturer shall produce all
the pipe of the same type supplied for the work. Materials and equipment
shall be new, of makes and kinds specified herein, or as indicated on the
Drawings, without exception.
B. All material and work to be in accordance with applicable portions of the latest
revisions and editions of the following standards unless otherwise indicated.
1. NFPA 13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
2. NFPA 14 Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems
Page 1 of 6
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
3. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code
4. ASTM
American Society for Testing Materials
5. ANSI
American National Standards Institute
6. AWWA
American Water Works Association
7. UL
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
8. FM
Factory Mutual
9. IBC
International Building Code 2003
10. IFC
2003 International Fire Code
12. NFPA 10 Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers
14. Local Codes and Regulations
15. FM Global Data Sheets
C. All equipment shall be UL-listed and FM approved.
D. The complete fire protection installation shall be made by an approved
installer, specializing in sprinkler and fire protection work, having not less than
five (5) years experience in installing systems of comparable size.
E. GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall submit proof of valid license to perform work
in the Philippines.
F. If any of the requirements of the above are in conflict with one another or with
the requirements of these specifications, the most stringent requirement shall
govern.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE FITTINGS
A.
B.
Pipe
1.
Pipe of 40mm and larger shall be made of B.I. Pipes, Schedule
40 as indicated, conforming to the latest standard specification
for welded steel pipe of the ASTM A-53 Grade B and ASTM A135 (ERW).
2.
Pipe of 50 mm and smaller shall be made of black steel pipe
or galvanized conforming to ASTM A53 Grade B /ASTM A135 (ERW) schedule 40 with black cast-iron, malleable iron
threaded
Fitting
1.
Fittings shall be malleable iron ANSI B16.3 for threaded
fittings, Steel ANSI B16.5 for welded fittings and steel flange.
2.
Flanges shall be ANSI B 16.5, Class 150




Page 2 of 6
Gaskets. Shall be AWWA C 111 cloth inserted red
rubber gaskets.
Bolts. Shall be ASTM A 193 Grade B8. Bolts shall be
extended no less than two full treads beyond the nut with
the bolts tightened to the required torque.
Nuts. Shall be ASTM A 194 Grade 8.
Washers. Shall be ASTM F 436. Provide flat circular
washers under bolts heads and nuts.
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
2.2
VALVES
1. Valves 50 mm and smaller shall be made of bronze to ASTM B61
NRS solid wedge and screw ends.
2.3
DRAINS
Provide test & drain piping to discharge at safe points outside each building or
to sight cones attached to drains of adequate size to readily receive the full
flow from each drain particularly the affected floors covered by renovation
under maximum pressure. Provide auxiliary drains as required by NFPA 13.
2.4
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Hangers and supports shall be provided and installed for all piping as
required by this specification and all authorities having jurisdiction over
the work, and shall be approved by the MEPF CONSULTANT.
Support piping independently from structure.
B.
All hangers and supports shall be made of steel or other durable and
non-combustible materials. Wood, wire, or perforated strap iron shall
not be used as permanent hangers or supports. Hangers that
penetrate finished ceilings shall be provided with a chrome or nickel
plated escutcheon plate manufactured by Grinnell, or approved equal.
C.
Hangers and supports shall be installed so as not to interfere with the
free expansion and contraction of piping, and all nuts and bolts shall
be drawn up tight.
D.
Except where specified elsewhere, hangers for pipes shall be
adjustable wrought steel, clevis type. Hangers shall be complete with
bolts, rod and two nuts for each bolt. The diameter of hanger rods
shall be as follows:
Pipe Size
Diameter of Rod
20 mm – 50 mm
10 mm
65 mm – 85 mm
13 mm
100 mm – 125mm
16 mm
150 mm
20 mm
E.
All vertical piping shall be firmly supported by riser clamps properly
installed to relieve weight from fittings and piping at base of risers.
Vertical pipes shall have riser clamps not to exceed 4.5 m spacing.
F.
Where required, furnish and install heavy anchorage to the pipe
against movement from expansion and contraction and secure the
approval of the MEPF CONSULTANT for the method of installing the
anchorage before the work.
G.
Horizontal piping shall be supported at intervals not greater than 3 m
spacing and at all changes of direction.
H.
Where static pressure exceeds 650 kPa, provide support to prevent
upward movement at the end of branch lines and arm-overs where
Page 3 of 6
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
sprinklers are below ceilings, where required by NFPA 13.
2.5
PIPE SLEEVES
Furnish, install sleeves for all pipes passing through floor, walls, partitions or
other building construction. Sleeves passing through walls and floors
between rooms shall be filled from both ends of sleeve with fire proof
insulation material of a fire rating equal to that of the wall or floor. pipe
sleeves materials shall be Black Iron schedule 40.
2.6
IDENTIFICATION
A. Signs, charts and tags shall be provided as described in NFPA 13 (Standard
for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems).
B. Painting finish (type, quality, and colour) to all fire protection pipework shall
comply with the requirements of Local Code Authority.
C. All equipment shall have a nameplate that identifies the manufacturer’s name,
address, type or style, model or serial number, and catalog number.
2.7
SPRINKLER
A. Pendent Sprinkler Head - UL Listed & FM Approved sprinkler head, standard
coverage, quick response , 155 degree Fahrenheit temperature rating, K
factor 5.6, and 1/2 inch orifice.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
The work throughout shall be executed in the best and most thorough
manner in accordance with NFPA standard.
B.
The contractor required to visit the site and to ascertain himself as to
the local conditions and facilities that may affect his work. He will be
deemed to have done this before preparing his proposal and any
subsequent claims on the
ground of inadequate or inaccurate information will not be entertained.
C.
Install a complete fire sprinkler coverage to subject area with all
piping, valves, hangers, signs, valves, tests, etc., as indicated on
Drawings and as specified herein.
D.
Furnish and install all drain piping, flushing, connections, drain plugs,
drain valves, etc., at drain points and all low points.
E.
Piping shall be run parallel to walls and beams. Before finalizing the
location of any piping, consult with other trades so as to avoid
interfering with their work.
F.
Care shall be exercised in the installation of the piping so that the
system will drain by gravity, back through branches.
G.
All electrical devices associated with and/or listed within this Section
including power and control wiring with the exception of main source
of power from the building’s electrical system shall be the sole
responsibility of the Contractor. This shall include but is not limited to
conduit, wiring, termination of wiring, etc.
Page 4 of 6
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
3.2
TESTS
A.
General:
1.
The entire works shall be fully tested in stages as the work
proceeds and on completion of work as applicable.
2.
To provide during normal working hours, all necessary labours,
instruments, equipment, materials, fuel, power and maker's
representatives, to carry out such tests as may be necessary
to satisfy the MEPF CONSULTANT that the installation meets
the requirement and intent of the specification as well as such
tests required by Local Fire Dept.
3.
All tests shall be made in the presence of the MEPF
CONSULTANT & or his representative or any inspecting
authority. Test shall be coordinated with the mall maintenance
representative to faciliate the existing fire sprinkler system
testing.
4.
Tests described hereinafter and including all tests prescribed
by the Authority having jurisdiction shall be carried out. Any
tests proved unsatisfactory shall be repeated to the satisfaction
of the inspecting parties.
a.
b.
Flow Switches
1)
The testing equipment for the flow switches
shall be as shown on the drawings or of an
equivalent
approved
by
the
MEPF
CONSULTANT.
2)
The calibration test equipment shall provide a
flow of 1 l/s over the vane of the flow switch in
the direction shown, to be confirmed by the
direct reading flow meter.
3)
The flow switch contacts shall make with
energisation of the lamp and the buzzer, upon a
flow not greater than 1 l/s flowing over the vane
in the correct direction.
Hydrostatic
1) Aboveground piping shall be hydrostatically tested
in accordance
with NFPA 13 at not less than
200 psi or 50 psi in excess of maximum system
operating pressure and shall maintain the pressure
without loss for 2 hours. There shall be no drop in
gauge pressure or visible leakage when the system
is subjected to the hydrostatic test. The test
pressure shall be read from a gauge located at the
low elevation point of the system or portion being
tested.
2) Where any section of pipework or equipments
unable to withstand the maximum pipework test
pressure, it shall be isolated during the pipework
test then that section of pipework or equipment
shall be re-tested at the appropriate test pressure.
c.
Page 5 of 6
Cleaning, Flushing and Pre-treatment
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
1) Prior to start-up and satisfactorily hydraulic testing,
clean the entire installation including all fittings and
pipework and the like after installation and keep
them in a new condition. All pumping systems shall
be flushed and drained at least once through to get
rid of contaminating materials. All pipes shall be
rodded when necessary to ensure clearance of
debris, cleaning and flushing shall be carried out in
sections as the installation becomes completed.
2) When the entire systems are reasonably clean, a
pre-treatment chemical shall be introduced and
circulated for at least 8 hours. Warning signs shall
be provided at all outlets during pre-treatment. The
pre-treatment chemical shall:
a) Remove oil, grease and foreign residue from the
pipework and fittings.
b) Pre-condition the metal surfaces to resist
reaction with water or air.
c) Establish as initial protective film.
d) After pre-treatment, the system shall be drained
and refilled with fresh water and left until the
system is put into operation.
e) Details and procedures of the pre-treatment
shall be submitted to the MEPF CONSULTANT
for approval.
B.
Page 6 of 6
Final Acceptance Tests:
1.
Following commissioning of the entire installation, and prior to
issue of Taking Over Certificate.
The GENERAL
CONTRACTOR shall carry out final acceptance tests in
accordance with a programme to be agreed with the MEPF
CONSULTANT.
2.
Should the results of the acceptance tests show that plant,
systems and/or equipment fail to perform to the efficiencies or
other performance figures as given in this Specification, the
GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall adjust, modify and if
necessary replace the equipment without further payment in
order that the required performance can be obtained.
3.
Where acceptance tests are required by the relevant
Authorities having jurisdiction, these tests shall be carried out
by the GENERAL CONTRACTOR prior to the issue of Taking
Over Certificate to the acceptance of the Authorities.
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
1.3
Section includes portable, hand-carried Type fire extinguishers
including mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and
classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and
mounting brackets.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in
maintenance manuals.
C.
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply
with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."
B.
Fire Extinguishers:
Listed and labeled for type, rating, and
classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
C.
Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by
FMG.
Preinstallation Conference:
1.
Review methods and procedures related to fire extinguishers
including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
1.4
Schedules and coordination requirements.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty:
Manufacturer's standard form in which
manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
Page 1 of 3
Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.
Faulty operation of valves or release levers.
Warranty Period:
Completion.
One (1) year from date of Substantial
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A.
Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection
cabinet mounting bracket indicated.
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Valves: Manufacturer's standard.
Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard.
Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying
with NFPA 10, Appendix B inspections, maintenance, and
recharging.
B.
Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 4-A:80B:C, 10-lb (4.5-kg)) nominal capacity, with monoammonium
phosphate-based dry chemical in -steel cylinder.
C.
Clean Agent Portable Fire Extinguisher 10lb (4.5kg) nominal capacity
in steel cylinder.
CEILING MOUNTED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A.
Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in UL-rated 4-A:80-B:C, 10-lb (4.5kg)) nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical
in chrome-plated brass body equipt with sprinkler type valve with standard
response glass bulb sensing element, color coded for operation temperature
of 68 deg. Celsius (155 deg. Fahrenheit)
2.3
MOUNTING BRACKETS
A.
Mounting Brackets:
Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel,
designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes
required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with
plated or red baked-enamel finish.
B.
Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction
for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by
ARCHITECT.
1.
Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words
"FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to
mounting surface.
a.
Orientation: Horizontal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations
indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.
Page 2 of 3
Mounting Brackets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor
to top of fire extinguisher.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
B.
Page 3 of 3
Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square
and plumb, at locations indicated.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Technical Specifications
STANDPIPE SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Design and provide new automatic wet Class I standpipe and fire sprinkler
systems as shown.
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
System design and manufacturer's products shall be in accordance with the
required and advisory provisions of NFPA 14 except as modified herein.
Provide sprinkler portion of system under Section 13930 WET PIPE
SPRINKLER SYSTEM. Each system shall be designed for earthquakes and
shall include materials, accessories, and equipment inside and outside the
building necessary to provide each system complete and ready for use. Devices
and equipment shall be UL Fire Prot Dir listed or FM P7825 approved for fire
protection service. In the publications referred to herein, the advisory provisions
shall be considered to be mandatory, as though the word "shall" had been
substituted for "should" wherever it appears; reference to the "authority having
jurisdiction" shall be interpreted as Local Protection Engineer.
1.2.1
Residual Pressure
The minimum residual pressure at the outlet of the most remote 64 mm
hose connection shall be 100 psig while the system is discharging at the
required design flow rates.
1.2.2
Friction Losses
Calculate losses in piping in accordance with the Hazen-Williams formula
with 'C' value of 120 for steel piping, 150 for copper tubing, and 140 for
cement-lined ductile-iron piping.
1.2.3
Water Supply
Base hydraulic calculations on a static pressure of 105 psi (gage with
500 gpm available at a residual pressure of 15 psi (gage) at the Base
hydraulic calculations on operation of fire pumps provided in Section
13920, "Fire Pumps."
1.2.4
Standpipe System Drawings
Prepare in accordance with the requirements for "Plans and
Specifications" as specified in NFPA 14. Each drawing shall be 34 by
22 inches. Plans shall be drawn to a scale not less than 1/8 inch scale
Do not commence work until the design of each system and the various
components have been approved. Show data essential for proper
installation of each system. Show details, plan view, elevations, and
sections of the systems supply and piping. Show piping schematic of
systems supply, devices, valves, pipe, and fittings. Submit drawings
signed by a registered fire protection engineer. Show:
Page 1 of 6
a.
Room, space or area layout and include pipe supports and
hangers.
b.
Field wiring diagrams showing locations of devices and points of
connection and terminals used for all electrical field connections in
the system, with wiring color code scheme.
STANDPIPE SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 ABOVEGROUND PIPING SYSTEMS
Provide fittings for changes in direction of piping and for connections. Make
changes in piping sizes through tapered reducing pipe fittings; bushings will not
be permitted. Perform welding in the shop; field welding will not be permitted.
Conceal piping in areas with suspended ceiling.
2.1.1
Pipe and Fittings
NFPA 14, except as modified herein. Steel piping shall be Schedule 40
for sizes less than 8 inches, and Schedule 30 or 40 for sizes 8 inches
and larger. Fittings shall be welded, threaded, or grooved-end type.
Plain-end fittings with mechanical couplings and fittings which use steel
gripping devices to bite into the pipe when pressure is applied will not be
permitted.
Rubber gasketed grooved-end pipe and fittings with
mechanical couplings shall be permitted in pipe sizes 1.5 inches and
larger. Fittings shall be UL Fire Prot Dir listed or FM P7825 approved for
use in wet pipe sprinkler systems. Fittings, mechanical couplings, and
rubber gaskets shall be supplied by the same manufacturer. Steel piping
with wall thickness less than Schedule 30 shall not be threaded. Side
outlet tees using rubber gasketed fittings shall not be permitted. Pipe and
fittings shall be metal.
2.1.2
Pipe Hangers and Supports
Provide in accordance with NFPA 14.
2.1.3
Valves
NFPA 14. Provide valves of types approved for fire service. Hose and
gate valves shall open by counterclockwise rotation. Provide isolation
and check valves as required by NFPA 14. Isolation valves shall be
OS&Y type. Check valves shall be flanged clear opening swing-check
type with flanged inspection and access cover plate for sizes 4 inches
and larger.
2.1.3.1
Hose Valves
Provide bronze pressure regulating type hose valve with 2 1/2
inch National Standard male hose threads, and 2 1/2 inch NH
female by 1 1/2 inch IPT male reducer with cap and chain.
Equip valve with a device to regulate pressure at the outlet to a
pressure not exceeding 100 psi under both flow and no-flow
conditions.
2.1.4
Identification Signs
NFPA 14. Attach properly lettered and approved metal signs to each
valve and alarm device.
2.1.5
Waterflow Test Connection
Provide test connections approximately 6 feet above the floor for each
standpipe system or portion of each standpipe system equipped with an
alarm device; locate downstream and adjacent to each alarm actuating
device. Provide test connection piping to a location where the discharge
will be readily visible and where water may be discharged without
property damage. Discharge to janitor sinks or similar fixtures shall not
be permitted. Provide discharge orifice equivalent to 1/2 inch sprinkler
orifice. The penetration of the exterior wall shall be no greater than 2
feet above finished grade.
Page 2 of 6
STANDPIPE SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
2.1.6
Main Drains
Provide separate drain piping to discharge at safe points outside each
building or to sight cones attached to drains of adequate size to readily
receive the full flow from each drain under maximum pressure. Provide
auxiliary drains as required by NFPA 13 and NFPA 14.
2.1.7
Pipe Sleeves
Provide where piping passes entirely through walls, floors, roofs and
partitions. Secure sleeves in position and location during construction.
Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire thickness of
walls, floors, roofs and partitions. Provide one inch minimum clearance
between exterior of piping and interior of sleeve or core-drilled hole.
Firmly pack space with mineral wool insulation. Seal space at both ends
of the sleeve or core-drilled hole with plastic waterproof cement which
will dry to a firm but pliable mass, or provide a mechanically adjustable
segmented elastomeric seal. In fire walls and fire floors, seal both ends
of pipe sleeves or core-drilled holes with UL listed fill, void, or cavity
material.
2.1.7.1
Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors, and Roofs
Provide hot-dip galvanized steel, ductile-iron, or cast-iron
sleeves. Core drilling of masonry and concrete may be
provided in lieu of pipe sleeves when cavities in the core-drilled
hole are completely grouted smooth. Extend sleeves in floor
slabs 3 inches above finished floors.
2.1.7.2
Sleeves in Partitions
Provide 26 gage galvanized steel sheet.
2.1.8
Escutcheon Plates
Provide one piece or split hinge type metal plates for piping passing
through walls, floors, and ceilings in both exposed and concealed
spaces. Provide polished stainless steel plates or chromium-plated finish
on copper alloy plates in finished spaces. Provide paint finish on metal
plates in unfinished spaces. Securely anchor plates in place.
2.1.9
Fire Department Connections
Provide connections approximately 3 feet above finish grade, of the
approved two-way type with 2.5 inch National Standard female hose
threads with plug, chain, and identifying fire department connection
escutcheon plate.
2.1.10 Alarm Valves
Provide variable pressure type alarm valve complete with retarding
chamber, alarm test valve, alarm shutoff valve, drain valve, pressure
gages, accessories, and appurtenances for the proper operation of the
system. The alarm shut-off valve in the piping between the alarm valve
and the alarm pressure switch shall be a UL listed electrically supervised
quarter-turn valve. Connection of switch shall be under Section
2.1.11 Water Motor Alarms
Provide alarms of the approved weatherproof and guarded type, to
sound locally on the flow of water in each corresponding standpipe.
Mount alarms on the outside of the outer walls of each building. Provide
separate drain piping directly to exterior of building.
Page 3 of 6
STANDPIPE SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
2.1.12 Pressure Switch
Provide switch with circuit opener or closer for the automatic transmittal
of an alarm over the facility fire alarm system. Connect into the building
fire alarm system. Alarm actuating device shall have mechanical
diaphragm controlled retard device adjustable from 10 to 60 seconds and
shall instantly recycle.
2.1.13 Waterflow Detector
Provide vane-type waterflow detector. Provide detector with adjustable
retard feature to prevent false alarms caused by momentary water
surges. Connect into the building fire alarm system. Alarm actuating
device shall have mechanical diaphragm controlled retard device
adjustable from 10 to 60 seconds and shall instantly recycle. Provide
detector where indicated in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
2.1.14 Fire Hose Cabinets
Provide recessed or
surface-mounted cabinets where indicated.
Cabinets shall be prime grade, cold-rolled, reannealed, process-leveled,
furniture steel. Fabricate cabinet from 20 gage steel and door and trim
from 18 gage steel. Provide fully welded joints ground smooth. On each
jamb, provide at least two anchors or reinforcements spaced
approximately 24 inches apart for building in or attaching the cabinets to
adjacent construction. Doors shall be flush hollow metal type with fully
welded joints ground smooth and full glazed opening. Provide door with
continuous hinge, latch and pull. Hinge door for 180 degree opening.
Glass shall conform to ASTM C 1036 and shall be Type II (flat wired
glass), Class 1 (clear), Form 1 (wired, polished both sides), Quality q 8
(glazing quality), diamond or square wire mesh, 1/4 inch thick. Factory
finish cabinet inside and out with one coat of enamel applied over a
primer. Interior finish color shall be white. Exterior finish color shall be
white or as specified.
2.1.15 Valve Tamper Switch
Provide valve tamper switch(es) to monitor the open position of valve(s)
controlling water supply to the standpipe system. Switch contacts shall
transfer from the normal (valve open) position to the off-normal (valve
closed) position during the first two revolutions of the hand wheel or
when the stem of the valve has moved not more than one-fifth of the
distance from its normal position. Switch shall be tamper resistant.
Removal of the cover shall cause switch to operate into the off-normal
position.
2.1.16 Fire Pumps
Provide as specified in Section FIRE PUMPS.
2.1.17 Backflow Preventer
Provide double check valve assembly backflow preventer with OS&Y
gate valve on both ends. Each check valve shall have a drain. Backflow
prevention assemblies shall have current "Certificate of Approval from
the Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research,
FCCCHR List. Listing of the specific make, model, design, and size in
the FCCCHR List shall be acceptable as the required documentation."
2.2 ELECTRICAL WORK
Provide electrical work associated with this section under Section 16402
INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, except for fire alarm wiring. Provide fire
Page 4 of 6
STANDPIPE SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
alarm wiring and connection to fire alarm systems under Section 13852
INTERIOR FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING
Provide under this section as specified in Section 02300 EARTHWORK.
3.2 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING WATER SUPPLY SYSTEMS
Connections to existing water supply system are specified in Section 02510
WATER DISTRIBUTION.
3.3 STANDPIPE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
Equipment, materials, installation, workmanship, fabrication, assembly, erection,
examination, inspection, and testing shall be in accordance with the NFPA
standards referenced herein. Install piping straight and true to bear evenly on
hangers and supports. Conceal piping to the maximum extent possible. Piping
shall be inspected, tested and approved before being concealed. Provide
fittings for changes in direction of piping and for all connections Make changes in
piping sizes through standard reducing pipe fittings; do not use bushings. Cut
pipe accurately and work into place without springing or forcing. Ream pipe
ends and free pipe and fittings from burrs. Clean with solvent to remove all
varnish and cutting oil prior to assemble. Make screw joints with PTFE tape
applied to male thread only.
3.4 PRELIMINARY TESTS
Each piping system shall be hydrostatically tested at 200 psig in accordance
with NFPA 14 and NFPA 24 and shall show no leakage or reduction in gauge
pressure after 2 hours. The Contractor shall conduct complete preliminary tests,
which shall encompass all aspects of system operation. Individually test alarms,
and all other components and accessories to demonstrate proper functioning.
Test water flow alarms by flowing water. When tests have been completed and
all necessary corrections made, submit to the Contracting Officer a signed and
dated certificate, similar to that specified in NFPA 13, attesting to the satisfactory
completion of all testing and stating that the system is in operating condition.
Also include a written request for a formal inspection and test.
3.5 FORMAL INSPECTION AND TESTS (ACCEPTANCE TESTS)
Naval Facilities Engineering Command, Fire Protection Engineer, will witness
formal tests and approve all systems before they are accepted. The system
shall be considered ready for such testing only after all necessary preliminary
tests have been made and all deficiencies found have been corrected to the
satisfaction of the Contracting Officer and written certification to this effect is
received by the Division Fire Protection Engineer. Submit the request for formal
inspection at least 15 working days prior to the date the inspection is to take
place. Experienced technicians regularly employed by the Contractor in the
installation of both the mechanical and electrical portions of such systems shall
be present during the inspection and shall conduct the testing. All instruments,
personnel, appliances and equipment for testing shall be furnished by the
Contractor. The Government will furnish water for the tests. All necessary tests
encompassing all aspects of system operation shall be made including the
following, and any deficiency found shall be corrected and the system retested
at no cost to the Government.
Page 5 of 6
STANDPIPE SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
3.6 FLOW TEST
Perform flow tests of each standpipe riser in accordance with NFPA 14. Affix 0200 psi pressure gauges to lowest hose valve and next-to-highest hose valve.
Connect lined, 2 1/2 inch diameter fire hose with underwriter's playpipe to
highest hose valve and flow at least 250 gpm for 5 minutes from standpipe to a
safe location outside the building. Furnish hose, nozzles and fittings required
for this test.
3.7 ALARM TESTING
a.
Each pressure switch, waterflow detector, and water motor gong shall be
activated by flow of water.
b.
Each valve tamper switch shall be activated by partially closing the
associated control valve.
c.
Alarm annunciation at the fire alarm control panel shall be verified.
d.
Circuit supervision shall be demonstrated.
3.8 ADDITIONAL TESTS
When deficiencies, defects or malfunctions develop during the tests required, all
further testing of the system shall be suspended until proper adjustments,
corrections or revisions have been made to assure proper performance of the
system. If these revisions require more than a nominal delay, the Contracting
Officer shall be notified when the additional work has been completed, to
arrange a new inspection and test of the system. All tests required shall be
repeated prior to final acceptance, unless directed otherwise.
Page 6 of 6
STANDPIPE SYSTEM
Technical Specifications
FIRE PUMPS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 JOCKEY PUMP
Pressure maintenance pump is the Jockey Pump. Vertical Inline type pump
shall automatically stop when the system pressure reaches the set Cut-out
pressure and after the pump has operated for the minimum pump run time
specified herein.
1.2 EXTRA MATERIALS
Submit Spare Parts data for each different item of equipment and material
specified. The data shall include a complete list of parts and supplies, with
current unit prices and source of supply, and a list of parts recommended by the
manufacturer to be replaced after 1 year and 3 years of service. Include a list of
special tools and test equipment required for maintenance and testing of the
products supplied by the Contractor.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
a. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer
regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and shall essentially
duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to
bid opening.
b. All equipment shall have a nameplate that identifies the manufacturer's name,
address, type or style, model or serial number, contract number and accepted
date; capacity or size; system in which installed and system which it controls
and catalog number. Pumps and motors shall have standard nameplates
securely affixed in a conspicuous place and easy to read. Fire pump shall
have nameplates and markings in accordance with UL 448. Diesel driver
shall have nameplate and markings in accordance with UL 1247. Electric
motor nameplates shall provide the
2.2 FIRE PUMP
Fire pump shall be electric motor driven. Fire pump shall furnish not less than
150 percent of rated flow capacity at not less than 65 percent of rated net
pressure. Pump shall be vertical splitcase type equipped with all standard
accessories. Pump shall be automatic start and manual stop. Pump shall
conform to the requirements of UL 448.
2.3 REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION SERVICE
2.3.1
General Requirements
Materials and Equipment shall have been tested by Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. and listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by Factory
Mutual and listed in FM P7825a and FM P7825b. Where the terms
"listed" or "approved" appear in this specification, such shall mean listed
in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM P7825a and FM P7825b.
2.3.2
Alarms
NOTE: Power for alarms must be from a source other than the engine
Page 1 of 11
FIRE PUMPS
Technical Specifications
starting batteries and shall not exceed 125 volts. Power shall not be
supplied from the same circuit supplying power to the fire pump
controllers or from an emergency circuit.
Provide audible and visual alarms as required by NFPA 20 on the
controller. Provide remote supervision as required by NFPA 20, in
accordance with NFPA 72. Provide remote alarm devices located at
where shown. Alarm signal shall be activated upon the following
conditions: fire pump controller has operated into a pump running
condition, pump controller main switch has been turned to OFF or to
MANUAL position. Exterior alarm devices shall be weatherproof type.
Provide alarm silencing switch and red signal lamp, with signal lamp
arranged to come on when switch is placed in OFF position.
2.4 ABOVE GROUND PIPING COMPONENTS
2.4.1
Pipe Sizes 65mm Ø and Larger
2.4.1.1
Pipe
Piping shall be Electric Resistance Welded, Grade A or Grade
B in accordance with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Grade
A or B, black steel pipe. Steel pipe shall be joined by means of
flanges welded to the pipe. Mechanical grooved joint is
acceptable method for seismic considerations only. Suction
piping shall be galvanized in accordance with NFPA 20. Pipe
riser of size 150mm and larger in diameter shall be seamless
type in accordance with ASTM A53 Grade A or B, schedule 80,
black steel pipe.
2.4.1.2
Grooved Mechanical Joints and Fittings
Joints and fittings shall be designed for not less than 175 psi
service and shall be the product of the same manufacturer.
Fitting and coupling houses shall be malleable iron conforming
to ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510; ductile iron conforming to
ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12. Gasket shall be the flush type
that fills the entire cavity between the fitting and the pipe. Nuts
and bolts shall be alloy steel conforming to ASTM
A193/A193M and ASTM A194/A194M respectively.
2.4.1.3
Flanges
Flanges shall be ASME B16.5, raised face finished, Class 150
flanges. Flanges shall be provided at valves connections to
equipment, and where indicated.
2.4.1.4
Gaskets
Gaskets shall be AWWA C111/A21.11, cloth inserted red
rubber gaskets.
2.4.1.5
Bolts
Bolts shall be ASTM A 193/A 193M, Grade B7. Bolts shall
extend no less than three full threads beyond the nut with bolts
tightened to the required torque.
2.4.1.6
Nuts
Nuts shall be ASTM A 194/A 194M, Grade B7.
Page 2 of 11
FIRE PUMPS
Technical Specifications
Washers shall meet the requirements of ASTM F 436. Flat
circular washers shall be provided under all bolt heads and
nuts.
2.4.2
Piping Sizes 50mm and Smaller
2.4.2.1
Steel Pipe
Steel piping shall be ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, Grade A
or Grade B, electric resistance welding, black steel pipe with
threaded end connections. Fittings shall be ASME B16.3,
Class 150, zinc-coated threaded fittings. Unions shall be
ASME B16.39, Class 150, zinc-coated unions.
2.4.3
Pipe Hangers and Supports
Pipe hangers and support shall be MSS SP-58 and or MSS SP-69,UL
listed UL Fire Prot Dir or FM approved FM P7825a and FM P7825b and
shall be fixed or adjustable type. Finish of rods, nuts, washers, hangers,
and supports shall be zinc-plated after fabrication.
2.4.4
Valves
Valves shall be UL listed UL Fire Prot Dir or FM approved FM P7825a
and FM P7825b for fire protection service. Valves shall have flange or
threaded end connections.
2.4.4.1
Gate Valves and Control Valves
Gate valves and control valves shall be outside screw and
yoke (O.S.&Y.) type which open by counterclockwise rotation.
2.4.4.2
Tamper Switch
The suction control valves, the discharge control valves, valves
to test header and flow meter, and the by-pass control valves
shall be equipped with valve tamper switches for monitoring by
the fire alarm system.
2.4.4.3
Check Valve
Check valve shall be clear open, swing type check valve with
flange or threaded inspection plate.
2.4.4.4
Relief Valve
Relief valve shall be pilot operated or spring operated type
conforming to NFPA 20. A means of detecting water motion in
the relief lines shall be provided where the discharge is not
visible within the pump house.
2.4.4.5
Circulating Relief Valve
An adjustable circulating relief valve shall be provided for each
fire pump in accordance with NFPA 20.
2.4.4.6
Suction Pressure Regulating Valve
Suction pressure regulating valve shall be FM approved FM
P7825a and FM P7825b. Suction pressure shall be monitored
through a pressure line to the controlling mechanism of the
regulating valve. Valve shall be arranged in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations.
2.4.5
Page 3 of 11
Hose Valve Manifold Test Header
FIRE PUMPS
Technical Specifications
Construct header of steel pipe. Provide ASME B16.5, Class 150
flanged inlet connection to hose valve manifold assembly. Provide
approved bronze hose gate valve with 65mm Ø National Standard male
hose threads with cap and chain; locate 3 feet above grade in the
horizontal position for each test header outlet. Welding shall be metallic
arc process in accordance with ASME B31.1.
2.4.6
Pipe Sleeves
A pipe sleeve shall be provided at each location where piping passes
entirely through walls, roofs, and floors, including pipe entering buildings
from the exterior. Secure sleeves in position and location during
construction. Provide sleeves of sufficient length to pass through entire
thickness of walls and floors. Provide 25mm minimum clearance
between exterior of piping or pipe insulation, and interior of sleeve or
core-drilled hole. Firmly pack space with mineral wool insulation. Seal
space at both ends of the sleeve or core-drilled hole with plastic
waterproof cement which will dry to a firm but pliable mass, or provide a
mechanically adjustable segmented elastomeric seal. In fire walls and
fire floors, a fire seal shall be provided between the pipe and the sleeve
in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING.
2.4.7
a.
Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Walls, Roofs, and Floors:
Provide hot-dip galvanized steel or black steel pipe sleeves. Core
drilling of masonry and concrete may be provided in lieu of pipe
sleeves provided that cavities in the core-drilled hole be
completely grouted smooth.
b.
Sleeves in Other Than Masonry and Concrete Walls, Roofs, and
Floors: Provide galvanized steel sheet pipe not less than 0.90 psf.
Escutcheon Plates
Provide one-piece or split-hinge metal plates for piping entering floors,
walls, and ceilings in exposed areas. Provide polished stainless steel or
chromium-plated finish on copper alloy plates in finished spaces.
Provide paint finish on plates in unfinished spaces. Plates shall be
secured in place.
2.5 DISINFECTING MATERIALS
2.5.1
Liquid Chlorine
Liquid chlorine shall conform to AWWA B301.
2.6 ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVER
Motors, controllers, contactors, and disconnects shall be provided with their
respective pieces of equipment, as specified herein and shall have electrical
connections provided under Section 16402 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM. Controllers and contactors shall have a maximum of 120-volt control
circuits, and auxiliary contacts for use with the controls furnished. When motors
and equipment furnished are larger than sizes indicated, the cost of providing
additional electrical service and related work shall be included under this
section. Motor shall conform to NEMA MG 1 Design B type. Integral size
motors shall be the premium efficiency type in accordance with NEMA MG 1.
Motor horsepower shall be of sufficient size so that the nameplate horsepower
rating will not be exceeded throughout the entire published pump characteristic
curve. The motor and fire pump controller shall be fully compatible.
2.7 FIRE PUMP CONTROLLER
Page 4 of 11
FIRE PUMPS
Technical Specifications
Controller shall be the automatic type and UL listed UL Fire Prot Dir or FM
approved FM P7825a and FM P7825b for fire pump service. Pump shall be
arranged for automatic start and stop, and manual push-button stop. Automatic
stopping shall be accomplished only after all starting causes have returned to
normal and after a minimum pump run time has elapsed. Controllers shall be
completely terminally wired, ready for field connections, and mounted in a NEMA
Type 2 drip-proof] or NEMA Type 4 watertight and dust tight enclosure arranged
so that controller current carrying parts will not be less than 300mm above the
floor. Controller shall be provided with voltage surge arresters installed in
accordance with NFPA 20. Controller shall be equipped with a bourdon tube
pressure switch or a solid state pressure switch with independent high and low
adjustments, automatic starting relay actuated from normally closed contacts,
visual alarm lamps and supervisory power light. Controller shall be equipped
with a thermostat switch with adjustable setting to monitor the pump room
temperature and to provide an alarm when temperature falls below 40 degrees
F. The controller shall be factory-equipped with a heater operated by thermostat
to prevent moisture in the cabinet.
2.7.1
Controller for Electric Motor Driven Fire Pump
Controller shall be electronic soft start, auto-transformer, wye-delta,
closed circuit transition starting type. Controller and transfer switch shall
have a short circuit rating as indicated. An automatic transfer switch
(ATS) shall be provided for each fire pump. The ATS shall comply with
NFPA 20 and shall be specifically listed for fire pump service. The ATS
shall transfer source of power to the alternate source upon loss of
normal power. Controller shall monitor pump running, loss of a phase or
line power, phase reversal, low reservoir and pump room temperature.
Alarms shall be individually displayed in front of panel by lighting of
visual lamps. Each lamp shall be labeled with rigid etched plastic
labels.
Controller shall be equipped with terminals for remote
monitoring of pump running, pump power supply trouble (loss of power
or phase and phase reversal), and pump room trouble (pump room
temperature and low reservoir level, and for remote start. Limited
service fire pump controllers are not permitted, except for fire pumps
driven by electric motors rated less than 15 hp. Controller shall be
equipped with a 7-day electric pressure recorder with 24-hour spring
wound back-up. The pressure recorder shall provide a read-out of the
system pressure, time, and date. Controller shall require the pumps to
run for ten minutes for pumps with driver motors under 200 horsepower
and for 15 minutes for pumps with motors 200 horsepower and greater,
prior to automatic shutdown. The controller shall be equipped with an
externally operable isolating switch which manually operates the motor
circuit. Means shall be provided in the controller for measuring current
for all motor circuit conductors.
2.8 PRESSURE SENSING LINE
A completely separate pressure sensing line shall be provided for each fire
pump and for the jockey pump. The sensing line shall be arranged in
accordance with Figure A-7-5.2.1. of NFPA 20. The sensing line shall be 1/2
inchH58 brass tubing complying with ASTM B 135. The sensing line shall be
equipped with two restrictive orifice unions each. Restricted orifice unions shall
be ground-face unions with brass restricted diaphragms drilled for a 3/32 inch.
Restricted orifice unions shall be mounted in the horizontal position, not less
than 5 feet apart on the sensing line. Two test connections shall be provided for
each sensing line. Test connections shall consist of two brass 1/2 inch globe
Page 5 of 11
FIRE PUMPS
Technical Specifications
valves and 1/4 inch gauge connection tee arranged in accordance with NFPA
20. One of the test connections shall be equipped with a 0 to 300 psi water oilfilled gauge. Sensing line shall be connected to the pump discharge piping
between the discharge piping control valve and the check valve.
2.9 PRESSURE MAINTENANCE PUMP
2.9.1
General
Pressure maintenance pump shall be electric motor driven, in-line
vertical shaft, centrifugal type, with a rated discharge of 10 gpm at 150
psig. Pump shall draft from the suction supply side of the suction pipe
gate valve of the fire pump or as indicated and shall discharge into the
system at the downstream side of the pump discharge gate valve. An
approved indicating gate valve of the outside screw and yoke (O.S.&Y.)
type shall be provided in the maintenance pump discharge and suction
piping. Oil-filled water pressure gauge and approved check valve in the
maintenance pump discharge piping shall be provided. Check valve
shall be swing type with removable inspection plate.
2.9.2
Pressure Maintenance Pump Controller
Pressure maintenance pump controller shall be arranged for automatic
and manual starting and stopping and equipped with a "manual-offautomatic" switch. The controller shall be completely prewired, ready
for field connections, and wall-mounted in a NEMA Type 2 drip-proof
enclosure. The controller shall be equipped with a bourdon tube
pressure switch or a solid state pressure switch with independent high
and low adjustments for automatic starting and stopping. A sensing line
shall be provided connected to the pressure maintenance pump
discharge piping between the control valve and the check valve. The
sensing line shall conform to paragraph, PRESSURE SENSING LINE.
The sensing line shall be completely separate from the fire pump
sensing lines. An adjustable run timer shall be provided to prevent
frequent starting and stopping of the pump motor. The run timer shall be
set for 2 minutes.
2.9.3
Steel pipe
ASTM A 53/A 53M, hot-dipped zinc-coated, Schedule 40, threaded
connections. Fittings shall be ASME B16.3, zinc-coated, threaded
malleable iron fittings. Unions shall be ASME B16.39 zinc-coated,
threaded unions.
2.10 PUMP BASE PLATE AND PAD
A common base plate shall be provided for each horizontal-shaft fire pump for
mounting pump and driver unit. The base plate shall be constructed of cast iron
with raised lip tapped for drainage or welded steel shapes with suitable
drainage. Each base plate for the horizontal fire pumps shall be provided with a
25mm galvanized steel drain line piped to the nearest floor drain. For vertical
shaft pumps, pump head shall be provided with a cast-iron base plate and shall
serve as the sole plate for mounting the discharge head assembly. Pump units
and bases shall be mounted on a raised 100mm or 150mm reinforced concrete
pad that is an integral part of the reinforced concrete floor.
2.11 HOSE VALVE MANIFOLD TEST HEADER
Page 6 of 11
FIRE PUMPS
Technical Specifications
Hose valve test header shall be connected by ASME B16.5, Class 150 flange
inlet connection. Hose valves shall be UL listed UL Fire Prot Dir or FM approved
FM P7825a and FM P7825b bronze hose gate valves with 65mm American
National Fire Hose Connection Screw Standard Threads (NH) in accordance
with NFPA 1963. The number of valves shall be in accordance with NFPA 20.
Each hose valve shall be equipped with a cap and chain, and located no more
than 3 feet and no less than 2 feet above grade.
2.12 FLOW METER
Meter shall be UL listed UL Fire Prot Dir or FM approved FM P7825a and FM
P7825b as flow meters for fire pump installation with direct flow readout device.
Flow meter shall be capable of metering any water flow quantities between 50
percent and 150 percent of the rated flow of the pumps. The flow meter shall be
arranged in accordance with Figure A-2-14.2.1 of NFPA 20. The meter throttle
valve and the meter control valves shall be O.S.&Y. valves. Automatic air
release shall be provided if flow meter test discharge is piped to the pump
suction and forms a closed-loop meter arrangement as defined in Figure A-214.2.1 of NFPA 20. Meter shall be of the venture, annular probe or orifice plate
type.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
2.1 EXAMINATION
After becoming familiar with all details of the work, verify all dimensions in the
field, and advise the Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing
the work.
2.2 FIRE PUMP INSTALLATION RELATED SUBMITTALS
The Fire Protection Engineer shall prepare a list of submittals, from the Contract
Submittal Register, that relate to the successful installation of the fire pump(s).
The submittals identified on this list shall be accompanied by a letter of approval
signed and dated by the Fire Protection Consultant when submitted to the
Government.
2.3 INSPECTION BY FIRE PROTECTION CONSULTANT
The Fire Protection Engineer shall periodically perform a thorough inspection of
the fire pump installation, including visual observation of the pump while running,
to assure that the installation conforms to the contract requirements. There shall
be no excessive vibration, leaks (oil or water), unusual noises, overheating, or
other potential problems. Inspection shall include piping and equipment
clearance, access, supports, and guards. Any discrepancy shall be brought to
the attention of the Contracting Officer in writing, no later than three working
days after the discrepancy is discovered. The Fire Protection Engineer shall
witness the preliminary and final acceptance tests and, after completion of the
inspections and a successful final acceptance test, shall sign test results and
certify in writing that the installation the fire pump installation is in accordance
with the contract requirements.
2.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Carefully remove materials so as not to damage material which is to remain.
Replace existing work damaged by the Contractor's operations with new work of
the same construction.
Equipment, materials, workmanship, fabrication,
Page 7 of 11
FIRE PUMPS
Technical Specifications
assembly, erection, installation, examination, inspection and testing shall be in
accordance NFPA 20, except as modified herein. In addition, the fire pump and
engine shall be installed in accordance with the written instructions of the
manufacturer.
2.5 PIPE AND FITTINGS
Piping shall be inspected, tested and approved before burying, covering, or
concealing. Fittings shall be provided for changes in direction of piping and for
all connections. Changes in piping sizes shall be made using tapered reducing
pipe fittings. Bushings shall not be used. Photograph all piping prior to burying,
covering, or concealing.
2.5.1
Cleaning of Piping
Interior and ends of piping shall be clean and free of any water or
foreign material. Piping shall be kept clean during installation by means
of plugs or other approved methods. When work is not in progress,
open ends of the piping shall be securely closed so that no water or
foreign matter will enter the pipes or fittings. Piping shall be inspected
before placing in position.
2.5.2
Threaded Connections
Jointing compound for pipe threads shall be polytetrafluoroethylene
(PTFE) pipe thread tape conforming to ASTM D 3308 Teflon pipe thread
paste and shall be applied to male threads only. Exposed ferrous pipe
threads shall be provided with one coat of zinc molybdate primer applied
to a minimum of dry film thickness of 1 mil.
2.5.3
Pipe Hangers and Supports
Additional hangers and supports shall be provided for concentrated
loads in aboveground piping, such as for valves and risers.
2.5.3.1
Vertical Piping
Piping shall be supported at each floor, at not more than 10
foot intervals.
2.5.3.2
Horizontal Piping
Horizontal piping supports shall be spaced as follows:
MAXIMUM SPACING (FEET)
___________________________________________________________________
_
Nominal
1 and
Pipe
Under
Size
(inches)
1.25
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
5
6+
___________________________________________________________________
_
Copper
6
7
8
7
8
9
Tube
Steel
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
Pipe
Page 8 of 11
FIRE PUMPS
Technical Specifications
2.5.4
Underground Piping
Installation of underground piping and fittings shall conform to NFPA 24.
Joints shall be anchored in accordance with NFPA 24. Concrete thrust
block shall be provided at elbow where pipe turns up towards floor, and
the pipe riser shall be restrained with steel rods from the elbow to the
flange above the floor. After installation in accordance with NFPA 24,
rods and nuts shall be thoroughly cleaned and coated with asphalt or
other corrosion-retard material approved by the Contracting Officer.
Minimum depth of cover shall be 3 feet.
2.5.5
Grooved Mechanical Joint
Grooves shall be prepared according to the coupling manufacturer's
instructions. Grooved fittings, couplings, and grooving tools shall be
products of the same manufacturer. Pipe and groove dimensions shall
comply with the tolerances specified by the coupling manufacturer. The
diameter of grooves made in the field shall be measured using a "go/nogo" gauge, vernier or dial caliper, narrow-land micrometer, or other
method specifically approved by the coupling manufacturer for the
intended application. Groove width and dimension of groove from end
of pipe shall be measured for each change in grooving tool setup to
verify compliance with coupling manufacturer's tolerances. Grooved
joints shall not be used in concealed locations, such as behind solid
walls or ceilings, unless an access panel is shown on the drawings for
servicing or adjusting the joint.
2.6 ELECTRICAL WORK
Electric motor and controls shall be in accordance with NFPA 20, NFPA 72 and
NFPA 70, unless more stringent requirements are specified herein or are
indicated on the drawings. Electrical wiring and associated equipment shall be
provided in accordance with NFPA 20 and Section 16402 INTERIOR
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. Provide wiring in rigid metal conduit or intermediate
metal conduit, except electrical metallic tubing conduit may be provided in dry
locations not enclosed in concrete or where not subject to mechanical damage.
2.7 PIPE COLOR CODE MARKING
Color code marking of piping shall be as specified in Section 09911 PAINTING.
2.8 FLUSHING
The fire pump suction and discharge piping shall be flushed at 150 percent of
rated capacity of each pump. Where the pump installation consists of more than
one pump, the flushing shall be the total quantity of water flowing when all
pumps are discharging at 120 or 150 percent of their rated capacities. The new
pumps may be used to attain the required flushing volume. No underground
piping shall be flushed by using the fire pumps. Flushing operations shall
continue until water is clear, but not less than 10 minutes. Submit a signed and
dated flushing certificate before requesting field testing.
2.9 FIELD TESTS
Submit, at least 2 weeks before starting field tests, system diagrams that show
the layout of equipment, piping, and storage units, and typed condensed
sequence of operation, wiring and control diagrams, and operation manuals
explaining preventative maintenance procedures, methods of checking the
system for normal, safe operation, and procedures for safely starting and
stopping the system shall be framed under glass or laminated plastic. After
Page 9 of 11
FIRE PUMPS
Technical Specifications
approval, these items shall be posted where directed.
2.9.1
Hydrostatic Test
Piping shall be hydrostatically tested at 225 psig for a period of 2-hours,
or at least 50 psi in excess of the maximum pressure, when the
maximum pressure in the system is in excess of 175 psi in accordance
with NFPA 20.
2.9.2
Preliminary Tests
The Fire Protection Engineer shall take all readings and measurements.
The Manufacturer's Representative, a representative of the fire pump
controller manufacturer, shall witness the complete operational testing
of the fire pump and drivers. The fire pump controller manufacturer's
representative shall each be an experienced technician employed by the
respective manufacturers and capable of demonstrating operation of all
features of respective components including trouble alarms and
operating features. Fire pumps, drivers and equipment shall be
thoroughly inspected and tested to insure that the system is correct,
complete, and ready for operation. Tests shall ensure that pumps are
operating at rated capacity, pressure and speed. Tests shall include
manual starting and running to ensure proper operation and to detect
leakage or other abnormal conditions, flow testing, automatic start
testing, testing of automatic settings, sequence of operation check, test
of required accessories; test of pump alarms devices and supervisory
signals, test of pump cooling, operational test of relief valves, and test of
automatic power transfer, if provided.
Pumps shall run without
abnormal noise, vibration or heating. If any component or system was
found to be defective, inoperative, or not in compliance with the contract
requirements during the tests and inspection, the corrections shall be
made and the entire preliminary test shall be repeated.
2.9.3
Final Acceptance Test
The Fire Protection Engineer shall take all readings and measurements.
The Manufacturer's Representative, and the fire pump controller
manufacturer's representative, shall also witness for the final tests. The
Contractor shall be responsible for repairing any damage caused by
hose streams or other aspects of the test. The final acceptance test
shall include the following:
2.9.3.1
Flow Tests
Flow tests using the test header, hoses and play pipe nozzles
shall be conducted. Flow tests shall be performed at churn (no
flow), 75, 100, 125 and 150 percent capacity for each pump
and at full capacity of the pump installation. Flow readings
shall be taken from each nozzle by means of a calibrated pitot
tube with gauge or other approved measuring equipment.
Rpm, suction pressure and discharge pressure reading shall
be taken as part of each flow test.
2.9.3.2
Starting Tests
Pumps shall be tested for automatic starting and sequential
starting. Setting of the pressure switches shall be tested when
pumps are operated by pressure drop.
Tests may be
performed by operating the test connection on the pressure
sensing lines. As a minimum, each pump shall be started
Page 10 of 11
FIRE PUMPS
Technical Specifications
automatically 10 times and manually 10 times, in accordance
with NFPA 20. The fire pumps shall be operated for a period of
a least 10 minutes for each of the starts. Pressure settings
that include automatic starting and stopping of the fire pumps
shall be indicated on an etched plastic placard, attached to the
corresponding pump controller.
2.9.3.3
Alarms
All pump alarms, both local and remote, shall be tested.
2.9.3.4
Test Documentation
The Manufacturer's Representative shall supply a copy of the
manufacturer's certified curve for each fire pump at the time of
the test. The Fire Protection Engineer shall record all test
results and plot curve of each pump performance during the
test. Complete pump acceptance test data of each fire pump
shall be recorded. The pump acceptance test data shall be on
forms that give the detail pump information such as that which
is indicated in Figure A-11-2.6.3(f) of NFPA 20. All test data
records shall be submitted in a three ring binder.
Page 11 of 11
FIRE PUMPS